2014 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owners PDF

Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.
/Mexico- Black plate (1,1)

6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
2014 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-21
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-36 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-42 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-32
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-47
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Mexico- Black plate (2,1)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
2014 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar Additional
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Special Application
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 2/11/14
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase About Driving the Vehicle

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of As with other vehicles of this type,
the features found on your vehicle. failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of
Keep this manual in the vehicle for control or an accident. Be sure to
quick reference. read the driving guidelines in this
The names, logos, emblems, manual in the section called “Driving
slogans, vehicle model names, and Using this Manual and Operating” and specifically
vehicle body designs appearing in To quickly locate information about Driver Behavior on page 9-2,
this manual including, but not limited the vehicle, use the Index in the Driving Environment on page 9-2,
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, back of the manual. It is an and Vehicle Design on page 9-2.
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
alphabetical list of what is in the
CAPTIVA are trademarks and/or manual and the page number where Danger, Warnings, and
service marks of General Motors
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,
it can be found. Cautions
or licensors.
This manual describes features that { Danger
may or may not be on your specific
Text marked { Danger provides
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or information on risk of fatal injury.
due to changes subsequent to the Disregarding this information may
printing of this owner manual. endanger life.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22893931 C Third Printing 2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
iv Introduction
A circle with a slash through it is a Vehicle Symbol Chart

{ Warning safety symbol which means “Do Here are some additional symbols
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let that may be found on the vehicle
Text marked { Warning provides this happen.” and what they mean. For more
information on risk of accident or
information on the symbol, refer to
injury. Disregarding this Symbols the Index.
information may lead to injury.
The vehicle has components and 9 : Airbag Readiness Light
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with # : Air Conditioning
{ Caution the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
component, control, message,
v +/-: Audio Steering Wheel
Text marked { Caution provides Controls
information that may indicate a gauge, or indicator.
hazard that could result in injury M : This symbol is shown when $ : Brake System Warning Light
or death. It could also result in you need to see your owner manual " : Charging System
possible damage to the vehicle. for additional instructions or I : Cruise Control
information.
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual O : Exterior Lamps
for additional instructions or # : Fog Lamps
information.
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Introduction v
j : LATCH System Child

Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Passenger Sensing Driver Information

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Rear Vision
Instrument Panel Steering Wheel Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-19
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Universal Remote System . . . 1-19
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Performance and Maintenance
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Traction Control/Electronic
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Vehicle Features Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17 Driving for Better Fuel
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17 Roadside Assistance
Head Restraint Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-18 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8-9. 12. Hood Release. See Hood on 22. Passenger Airbag Status
2. Instrument Panel Illumination page 10-3. Indicator. See Passenger
Control on page 6-4. 13. Cruise Control on page 9-30. Sensing System (United
States) on page 3-24.
3. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and 14. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
Lane-Change Signals on page 5-2. 23. Passenger Safety Belt
page 6-3. Reminder. See Safety Belt
15. Horn on page 5-3. Reminders on page 5-11.
4. Instrument Cluster on page 5-9. 16. Steering Wheel Controls on
5. Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 5-2 (If Equipped).
page 5-3. 17. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
6. AM-FM Radio on page 7-5. page 5-4.
7. Auxiliary Input Jack (If 18. Traction Control/Electronic
Equipped). See Auxiliary Stability Control on page 9-28.
Devices on page 7-20. 19. Shift Lever. See Automatic
8. Fog Lamps on page 6-4. Transmission on page 9-21.
Exterior Lamp Controls on 20. Climate Control Systems on
page 6-1. page 8-1 (If Equipped).
9. Driver Information Center (DIC) Automatic Climate Control
Buttons. See Driver Information System on page 8-5 (If
Center (DIC) on page 5-24. Equipped).
10. Instrument Panel Storage on 21. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4-1. page 6-3.
11. Data Link Connector (DLC)
(Out of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5-14.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Information Operation on page 2-2.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the Remote Vehicle Start
important features that may or may This vehicle may have a remote
not be on your specific vehicle. starting feature that starts the
For more detailed information, refer engine from outside of the vehicle.
to each of the features which can be Starting the Engine Using
found later in this owner manual.
Remote Start
Remote Keyless Entry Without Remote Start Shown, with
To start the vehicle:
(RKE) System Remote Start Similar 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
The RKE transmitter functions work Q: Press to lock all the doors,
up to 20 m (65 ft) away from the including the liftgate. 2. Press and release Q on the
vehicle. K : Press once to unlock the driver RKE transmitter.
door. If K is pressed again within 3. Immediately after completing
five seconds, all remaining doors Step 2, press and hold / until
unlock. the parking lamps flash. If the
L : Press and release to locate vehicle's lights can not be seen,
the vehicle. Press and hold L to press and hold / for at least
four seconds.
activate the panic alarm. Press L
again to turn off the alarm. When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-5
doors will be locked and the climate Door Locks

control system will operate at the
same setting as when the vehicle From the outside, lock or unlock the
was last turned off. door using the key or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
After entering the vehicle during a See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
remote start, insert and turn the key System Operation on page 2-2.
to the ON/RUN position to drive the
vehicle. From the inside, push or pull the
manual door lock on each door.
If the vehicle is left running, it
automatically shuts off after Use the power door lock switch on
10 minutes unless a time extension the front doors.
has been done. Q: Press to lock the doors.
Open the rear doors to access the
Shutting the Engine Off After a K: Press to unlock the doors. security locks on the inside edge of
Remote Start See Door Locks on page 2-6 and each door.
To manually shut off a remote start: Power Door Locks on page 2-6. To activate, insert a key into the slot
and turn it to the horizontal position.
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the Safety Locks
The door can only be opened from
vehicle and press / until the The vehicle has rear door security the outside.
parking lamps turn off. locks to prevent passengers from
To return the door to normal
. Turn on the hazard warning opening the rear doors from the
operation, open the door and turn
flashers. inside.
the slot to the vertical position.
. Turn the ignition switch on and
then off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2-4.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-6 In Brief
Liftgate Windows Express-Down Window

To lock or unlock the liftgate from The driver window switch has an
outside the vehicle, press Q or K express-down feature that lowers
the window without holding the
twice on the Remote Keyless
switch. Press the switch part way
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
and the window will open a small
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
amount. Press the switch down all
System Operation on page 2-2.
the way and release it and the
To lock or unlock the liftgate from window lowers all the way.
inside the vehicle, press Q or K on To stop the window while it is
the power door lock switch. lowering, press and release the
To open the liftgate, press the touch switch.
pad on the underside of the liftgate See Power Windows on page 2-13.
handle and pull up.
Press the front of the switch to open Window Lockout
To close the liftgate, pull down using the window. Pull the switch up to
the handle and close until it latches. close it. This feature prevents the rear seat
passengers from operating the
See Liftgate on page 2-8. The power windows operate when windows. Press the lockout switch
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ on the driver door panel to activate
ACCESSORY, or while in Retained the switch. Press it again to
Accessory Power (RAP). See deactivate the switch.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9-18.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-7
Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster Power Seats

Manual Seats
To adjust a manual seat:
If available, move the lever up or If available, move the control

down to raise or lower the seat. forward or rearward to adjust the
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. seat position.
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-8 In Brief
Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks
To raise or lower the front or rear

part of the seat cushion, move the
front or rear of the control up If available, move the lever forward
or down. or rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support. To recline the seatback:
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3-4. See Lumbar Adjustment on 1. Lift the lever on the outboard
page 3-4. side of the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-9
. Tilt the top of the control forward
To return the seatback to the upright
to raise.
Heated Seats
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without See Reclining Seatbacks on
applying pressure to the page 3-5.
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position. Second Row Seats
2. Push and pull on the seatback to The rear seatbacks can be folded
make sure it is locked. down to increase cargo space.
Power Reclining Seatbacks See Rear Seats on page 3-8.
Automatic Climate Control System

Shown
If available, the buttons are on the
climate control panel. To operate,
the ignition must be on.
Press L or M to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
To adjust a power seatback, Press the button once for the
if equipped: highest setting. With each press of
the button, the heated seat will
. Tilt the top of the control change to the next lower setting,
rearward to recline.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-10 In Brief
and then to the off setting. The Safety Belts Passenger Sensing
lights indicate two for the highest
setting and one for the lowest.
System
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3-6.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and The passenger sensing system will
adjusted properly. turn off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag under
To achieve a comfortable seating certain conditions. No other airbag
position, change the seatback is affected by the passenger
recline angle as little as necessary Refer to the following sections for sensing system.
while keeping the seat and the head important information on how to use
restraint height in the proper The passenger airbag status
safety belts properly:
position. indicator will light on the instrument
. Safety Belts on page 3-9. panel when the vehicle is started.
See Head Restraints on page 3-2 See Passenger Sensing System
. How to Wear Safety Belts
and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. (United States) on page 3-24 for
Properly on page 3-11.
more information.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-12.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3-38.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-11
Mirror Adjustment 3. Return the control to the center Manual Rearview Mirror
position so the mirror cannot be If equipped, push the tab forward for
Exterior Mirrors moved. daytime use and pull it for nighttime
Power Outside Mirrors Manual Folding Mirrors use to avoid glare from headlamps.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
The outside mirrors can be folded page 2-13.
inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car Automatic Dimming Rearview
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward Mirror
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward If equipped, automatic dimming
to return it to the original position. reduces the glare of the headlamps
Automatic Dimming Feature from behind. This feature comes on
when the vehicle is started. See
If equipped, the outside driver mirror Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
automatically dims to reduce glare on page 2-13.
from vehicle headlamps. See
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
on page 2-13.
To adjust the power mirrors:
Interior Mirrors
1. Turn the knob to choose the
left (L) or the right (R) mirror. Adjustment
2. Use the knob to move the Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
selected mirror so the side and view of the area behind your
the area behind the vehicle vehicle.
is seen.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-12 In Brief
Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel the out position and the lamps
while driving. automatically come on when any
Adjustment door is opened.
Interior Lighting +: Press the button (2) to turn the
Dome Lamps dome lamps on and off while the
doors are closed.
Reading Lamps
To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever down.
There are front and rear dome
2. Move the steering wheel up lamps in the overhead console and
or down. the headliner. The front reading lamps are in the
3. Pull or push the steering wheel *: Press the button (1) on the overhead console.
closer or away from you. overhead console to keep the dome
4. Pull the lever up to lock the lamps and other interior lamps
steering wheel in place. turned off while any door is open.
Press this button again to return it to
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-13
Turn the control to the following Windshield Wiper/Washer

positions:
9 : Turns off the exterior lamps.
The knob returns to the AUTO
position after it is released.
AUTO: Automatically turns the
exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
The rear reading lamps are in the ; : Turns on the parking lamps
headliner. including all lamps, except the
To turn the reading lamps on or off, headlamps.
press the button next to each lamp. 2 : Turns on the headlamps
together with the parking lamps and
Exterior Lighting instrument panel lights. The windshield wiper lever is on the
See: right side of the steering column.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on Move the lever up or down to select
page 6-1 the wiper speed.
. Turn and Lane-Change Signals 8: Single wipe, briefly move the
on page 6-3 lever down. The lever returns to its
starting position when released. For
. Headlamp High/Low-Beam several wipes, hold the lever down.
Changer on page 6-2
9: Turns the windshield wipers off.
The exterior lamp control is on the

instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-14 In Brief
3: Sets a delay between wipes. Climate Controls

Move the switch on top of the lever
left for less frequent wipes or right The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
for more frequent wipes. this system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate control
system functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless
a: Slow wipes. Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-2.
1: Fast wipes.
Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield wiper lever to
spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers. The wipers will
continue until the lever is released
or the maximum wash time is
reached.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper and rear wash button
is on the instrument panel above the
climate control system. Climate Control System
=: Press to wash and wipe the
rear window. 1. Fan Control 6. Air Conditioning
5 : Press to turn the delayed 2. Outside Air 7. Driver and Passenger Heated
wiping on or off. 3. Temperature Control Seats (If Equipped)
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on 4. Recirculation 8. Rear Window Defogger
page 5-3 and Rear Window Wiper/
Washer on page 5-4. 5. Air Delivery Mode Control
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-15
Transmission
Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode
ERS mode allows you to choose the
top-gear limit of the transmission
and the vehicle's speed while
driving downhill or towing a trailer.
To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever to
M (Manual).
Automatic Climate Control System
1. Fan Control 7. Driver and Passenger Heated

2. Outside Air Seats (If Equipped)
3. Temperature Control 8. Rear Window Defogger
4. Recirculation See Climate Control Systems on

page 8-1 or Automatic Climate
5. Air Delivery Mode Control Control System on page 8-5 (If
6. Air Conditioning Equipped).
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-16 In Brief
2. Press the plus/minus button Vehicle Features For more information about these
located on the shift lever, to and other radio features, see
increase or decrease the gear Operation on page 7-4.
range available. Radio(s)
Storing a Favorite Station
See Manual Mode on page 9-23. O : Press to turn the system on
and off. Turn to increase or A maximum of 36 stations can be
decrease the volume. stored as favorites using the six
softkeys below the radio station
BAND: Press to choose between
frequency tabs and by using the
FM, AM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped.
radio FAV button. Press FAV to go
f : Select radio stations. through up to six pages of favorites,
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Seek or scan each having six favorite stations
stations. available per page. Each page of
favorites can contain any
4 (Information): If equipped with combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM
XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features, stations.
press to display additional text
information related to the current See Operation on page 7-4.
FM-RDS or SiriusXM station, or CD, Setting the Clock
MP3, or WMA song. Song title
information will be displayed on the To set the time and date:
top line of the display while the artist 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
information will be displayed on the ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
bottom line, if the information is
available during XM, CD, MP3, 2. Press O to turn the radio on.
or WMA playback. When
information is not available, "No 3. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD,
Info" displays. and YYYY (hour, minute, month,
day, and year) display.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-17
4. Press the softkey below the tab Portable Audio Devices Steering Wheel Controls
to be changed.
The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
5. Increase or decrease the time or (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack on the
date by turning f clockwise or audio faceplate and a USB port in
counterclockwise. the center console. Some portable
See Clock on page 5-6. audio devices such as iPods®, MP3
players, and USB storage devices
can be connected to the vehicle
Satellite Radio using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or a
If equipped, SiriusXM® is a satellite USB cable.
radio service based in the See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-20.
48 contiguous United States and
10 Canadian provinces.
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
Bluetooth®
variety of programming and If equipped with a Bluetooth system, For vehicles with audio steering
commercial-free music, coast to it allows users with a wheel controls, some audio controls
coast, and in digital-quality sound. Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to can be adjusted at the steering
A fee is required to receive the make and receive hands-free calls wheel.
SiriusXM service. using the vehicle’s audio system
and controls. + / −: Press and release to go to
For more information, refer to: the next or the previous preset radio
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone station or CD track.
. www.siriusxm.com or call must be paired with the Bluetooth
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) system before it can be used in the J/0: For vehicles with Bluetooth®
vehicle. Not all phones will support and OnStar®, press and hold to
. www.xmradio.ca or call interact with those systems. Press
1-877-209-0079 (Canada) all functions. For more information,
see www.gm.com/bluetooth and and release to mute the system.
See Satellite Radio on page 7-6. Bluetooth on page 7-24. Press it again to turn the sound
back on.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-18 In Brief
K : Press to reject an incoming upwards to accelerate. If cruise DIC Buttons

call, or end a current call. control is already active, use to
increase vehicle speed.
v + or v −: Move the thumbwheel
up or down to increase or to −SET: Move the thumbwheel down
decrease the volume. briefly to set the speed and activate
cruise control. If cruise control is
Cruise Control already active, use to decrease
speed.
See Cruise Control on page 9-30.
3 : Press to display the trip and
fuel displays.
Infotainment System T: Press to display the vehicle
information displays.
If the vehicle has a base radio it is
included in this manual. See the U: Press to customize the feature
infotainment manual for information settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle
on the connected radios, audio Personalization on page 5-36 for
players, phone, navigation system, more information.
settings, and voice or speech V : Press to set or reset certain
recognition. functions and to turn off or
acknowledge messages on the DIC.
Driver Information See Driver Information Center (DIC)
E: Press to turn the cruise control Center (DIC) on page 5-24.
system on and off. The indicator The DIC has different displays in the
light on the button turns on or off. instrument cluster which can be
RES+: Move the thumbwheel up accessed by pressing the DIC
briefly to make the vehicle resume buttons on the instrument panel,
to a previously set speed or hold below the exterior lamps control.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-19
Vehicle Personalization Ultrasonic Parking Assist Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
Some vehicle features can be If equipped, this system uses
programmed by using the DIC sensors on the rear bumper to See Power Outlets on page 5-7.
buttons on the instrument panel to assist with parking and avoiding
the left of the steering wheel. These objects while in R (Reverse). Universal Remote System
features include: It operates at speeds less than
. Language 8 km/h (5 mph). Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) uses audible
. Door Lock and Unlock Settings beeps to provide distance and
. Lighting system information.
. Chime Volume Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
rear bumper clean to ensure proper
. Remote Start
operation. The Universal Home Remote
See Vehicle Personalization on System allows for garage door
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 5-36. openers, security systems, and
page 9-32.
home automation devices to be
Rear Vision Power Outlets programmed to work with these
Camera (RVC) buttons in the vehicle.
The accessory power outlets can be
If equipped, RVC displays a view of See Universal Remote System on
used to plug in electrical equipment,
the area behind the vehicle, on the page 5-42.
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
center stack display, when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). The power outlets are located inside
the center floor console, on the rear
See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on of the center floor console, and in
page 9-34. the rear cargo compartment.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-20 In Brief
. To turn off both Traction Control
Performance and and StabiliTrak, press and hold
Tire Pressure Monitor
Maintenance the TCS/StabiliTrak button g This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
until the StabiliTrak Off light g
Traction Control/ illuminates and the appropriate
Electronic Stability DIC message displays.
Control . Press the TCS/StabiliTrak
The Traction Control System (TCS) button g again to turn on both
limits wheel spin. The system turns systems. The appropriate DIC
on automatically every time the message displays.
vehicle is started. See Traction Control/Electronic The low tire pressure warning light
Stability Control on page 9-28. alerts to a significant loss in
The StabiliTrak system assists with pressure of one of the vehicle's
directional control of the vehicle in This vehicle also has a Brake Pedal tires. If the warning light comes on,
difficult driving conditions. The Override feature that limits engine stop as soon as possible and inflate
system also turns on automatically torque when the brake pedal is the tires to the recommended
every time the vehicle is started. applied. See Traction Control/ pressure shown on the Tire and
. To turn off or on TCS, press and Electronic Stability Control on Loading Information label. See
release the TCS/StabiliTrak page 9-28. Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
button g on the instrument The warning light will remain on until
panel. The appropriate DIC the tire pressure is corrected.
message displays. The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
may be an early indicator that the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
In Brief 1-21
tire pressures are getting low and 2. Press V for five seconds to E85 or FlexFuel
the tires need to be inflated to the reset the oil life at 100%.
proper pressure. Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can
Be careful not to reset the oil life use either unleaded gasoline or
The TPMS does not replace normal display accidentally at any time ethanol fuel containing up to 85%
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain other than after the oil is ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuel
the correct tire pressures. changed. It cannot be reset on page 9-37. For all other vehicles,
See Tire Pressure Monitor System accurately until the next oil use only the unleaded gasoline
on page 10-46. change. described under Recommended
The oil life system can also be reset Fuel on page 9-36.
Engine Oil Life System as follows:
Driving for Better Fuel
The engine oil life system calculates 1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN
engine oil life based on vehicle use with the engine off. Economy
and displays a CHANGE ENGINE Driving habits can affect fuel
2. Fully press and release the
OIL SOON message when it is time mileage. Here are some driving tips
accelerator pedal three times
to change the engine oil and filter. to get the best fuel economy
within five seconds.
Resetting the Oil Life System possible.
If the OIL LIFE REMAINING
Reset the system whenever the value is not 100%, the system
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
engine oil is changed so that the needs to be reset again. smoothly.
system can calculate the next See Engine Oil Life System on
. Brake gradually and avoid
engine oil change. To reset the page 10-10. abrupt stops.
system: . Avoid idling the engine for long
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING periods of time.
on the DIC. See Driver . When road and weather
Information Center (DIC) on
conditions are appropriate, use
page 5-24 and Engine Oil
cruise control.
Messages on page 5-31.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1-22 In Brief
. Always follow posted speed See Roadside Assistance Program
limits or drive more slowly when on page 13-5.
conditions require.
. Keep vehicle tires properly OnStar®
inflated.
If equipped, this vehicle has a
. Combine several trips into a comprehensive, in-vehicle system
single trip. that can connect to a live Advisor
. Replace the vehicle's tires with for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
the same TPC Spec number Connection, and Diagnostic
molded into the tire's sidewall Services. See OnStar Overview on
near the size. page 14-1.
. Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
Roadside Assistance
Program
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
TTY Users (U.S. Only):
1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
New Chevrolet owners are
automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance Program.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Keys and Locks
Windows Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Keys
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Keys and Locks Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-12 { Warning
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Interior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-13 the ignition key is dangerous and
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) children or others could be
Automatic Dimming Rearview seriously injured or killed. They
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4 could operate the power windows
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Windows or other controls or make the
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 vehicle move. The windows will
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 function with the keys in the
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 ignition, and children or others
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 could be caught in the path of a
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Roof closing window. Do not leave
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 children in a vehicle with the
Doors
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 ignition key.
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-10
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
page 13-15. transmitter functions work up to
If there is a decrease in the RKE 20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle.
operating range: Some conditions can affect the
. Check the distance. The performance of the transmitter. See
transmitter may be too far from Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the vehicle. System on page 2-2.
. Check the location. Other
The two keys can be used for the vehicles or objects may be
ignition and all locks. blocking the signal.
The key code is stamped on the key
. Check the transmitter's battery.
number plate and can be used to See “Battery Replacement” later
make new keys at any dealer. Store in this section.
this information in a safe place . If the transmitter is still not
outside the vehicle. working correctly, see your
If it becomes difficult to turn a key, dealer or a qualified technician
inspect the key blade for debris. for service.
Periodically clean with a brush
or pick.
If equipped, with an active OnStar
subscription, an OnStar Advisor
may remotely unlock the vehicle.
See “OnStar” if equipped.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
On some models, the fuel door will Programming Transmitters to

also be locked when the doors are the Vehicle
locked.
Only RKE transmitters programmed
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock to the vehicle will work. If a
the driver door. If K is pressed transmitter is lost or stolen, a
again within five seconds, all replacement can be purchased and
remaining doors unlock. The interior programmed through your dealer.
lamps come on and stay on for When the replacement transmitter is
20 seconds or until the ignition is programmed to the vehicle, all
turned on. The exterior lamps may remaining transmitters must also be
flash when unlocking the vehicle. programmed. Any lost or stolen
See “Remote Door Unlock” under transmitters no longer work once the
Without Remote Start Shown, with Vehicle Personalization on new transmitter is programmed.
Remote Start Similar page 5-36 for more information. Each vehicle can have up to eight
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For transmitters programmed to it.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
vehicles with this feature, this button Alarm): Press and release to Battery Replacement
is used to operate the remote start locate the vehicle. The turn signal
feature. See Remote Vehicle Start lamps flash and the horn sounds Replace the battery if the REPLACE
on page 2-4. REMOTE KEY FOB BATTERY
three times. Press and hold L to message displays on the Driver
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the activate the panic alarm. The turn Information Center (DIC). See
doors, including the liftgate. The signal lamps flash and the horn “REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOB
vehicle's lamps may flash and the sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. BATTERY” under Key and Lock
horn may sound. See “Remote Door The alarm turns off when the Messages on page 5-32.
Lock” under Vehicle Personalization ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
on page 5-36. when L is pressed again. The
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
the panic alarm to work.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
2. Remove the old battery. Do not The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
{ Caution use a metal object. range may be less while the vehicle
3. Insert the new battery, positive is running.
When replacing the battery, do
not touch any of the circuitry on side facing down. Replace with a Other conditions can affect the
the transmitter. Static from your CR2032 or equivalent battery. performance of the transmitter. See
body could damage the 4. Reassemble the transmitter. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. System on page 2-2.
Remote Vehicle Start Starting the Engine Using
If equipped with a remote starting Remote Start
feature, the engine can be started To start the vehicle:
from outside of the vehicle.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
/ (Remote Start): This button is vehicle.
on the RKE transmitter if the vehicle
has remote start. 2. Press and release Q on the
RKE transmitter.
Laws in some communities may
restrict the use of remote starters. 3. Immediately after completing
For example, some laws may Step 2, press and hold / until
require a person using the remote the parking lamps flash. If the
start to have the vehicle in view vehicle's lights can not be seen,
when doing so. Check local press and hold / for at least
To replace the battery: regulations for any requirements on
four seconds.
remote starting of vehicles.
1. Separate the transmitter with a When the vehicle starts, the parking
flat, thin object inserted into the Do not use the remote start feature lamps will turn on and remain on as
notch on the side. if the vehicle is low on fuel. The
long as the engine is running. The
vehicle could run out of fuel.
doors will be locked and the climate
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
control system will operate at the For example, if Q and then / are Conditions in Which the
same setting as when the vehicle pressed again after the vehicle has Remote Start Will Not Work
was last turned off. been running for five minutes, The vehicle cannot be started using
After entering the vehicle during a 10 minutes are added, allowing the the remote start feature if the key is
remote start, insert and turn the key engine to run for a total of in the ignition, the hood is open, or if
to the ON/RUN position to drive the 15 minutes. there is an emission control system
vehicle. A maximum of two remote starts or malfunction.
If the vehicle is left running, it remote start attempts are allowed The engine turns off during a remote
automatically shuts off after between ignition cycles. start if the coolant temperature gets
10 minutes unless a time extension After the vehicle's engine has been too high or if the oil pressure
has been done. started two times using the remote gets low.
Extending Engine Run Time start button, the ignition must be
turned on and then back off before
Remote Start Ready
To extend the engine run time by the remote start procedure can be If the vehicle does not have the
10 minutes, repeat Steps 1–3 while used again. remote vehicle start feature, it may
the engine is still running. The have the remote start ready feature.
engine run time can only be Shutting the Engine Off After a This feature allows your dealer to
extended if it is the first remote start Remote Start add the manufacturer's remote
since the vehicle has been driven. To manually shut off a remote start: vehicle start feature.
Remote start can be extended
one time. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the To add the manufacturer's remote
vehicle and press / until the vehicle start feature to the vehicle,
If the remote start procedure is used see your dealer.
again before the first 10-minute time parking lamps turn off.
frame has ended, the first . Turn on the hazard warning
10 minutes will immediately expire flashers.
and the second 10-minute time
frame will start.
. Turn the ignition switch on and
then off.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Door Locks Warning (Continued)

Delayed Locking
A chime will sound to indicate a
{ Warning injuries or even death from door or the liftgate is open when you
heat stroke. Always lock the try to lock the doors with the power
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it. door lock switch. The doors will not
dangerous. lock, and the theft‐deterrent system
. Outsiders can easily enter
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door will not arm until all the doors are
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop closed and five seconds have
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors passed.
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
locked, the handle will not happening. Automatic Door Locks
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a Automatic Door Lock
crash is increased if the To lock or unlock a door, use the
key from the outside or the door The doors are programmed to
doors are not locked. So, all automatically lock when the shift
passengers should wear lock from the inside.
lever is moved out of P (Park).
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked Power Door Locks This feature can be programmed
whenever the vehicle is through the Driver Information
Use the power door lock switch on Center (DIC). See “Auto Door Lock”
driven. the front doors. in Vehicle Personalization on
. Young children who get into Q: Press to lock the doors. page 5-36.
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can K: Press to unlock the doors.
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Automatic Door Unlock Safety Locks

The doors can be programmed to
automatically unlock when the shift { Caution
lever is moved into P (Park). See
“Auto Door Unlock” in Vehicle Pulling the inside door handle
Personalization on page 5-36. while the rear door safety locks
are engaged could damage your
Lockout Protection vehicle. Do not pull the inside
door handle while the rear door
When the power door lock switch is
safety locks are engaged.
pressed with the key in the ignition,
and any door is open, all the doors
lock and the driver door unlocks. The vehicle has rear door security Open the rear doors to access the
When doors are closed with the key locks to prevent passengers from security locks on the inside edge of
in the ignition, the horn will sound opening the rear doors from the each door.
as a reminder. inside.
To activate, insert a key into the slot
If the doors are locked with the and turn it to the horizontal position.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The door can only be opened from
transmitter, and the key is in the the outside.
ignition, a chime sounds and all
except the driver door lock. To return the door to normal
operation, open the door and turn
The lockout protection feature can the slot to the vertical position.
be overridden by holding the power
door lock switch for three seconds.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Doors Warning (Continued)

To lock or unlock the liftgate from
outside the vehicle, press Q or K
Liftgate . Adjust the Climate Control twice on the Remote Keyless
system to a setting that Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
{ Warning brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the System Operation on page 2-2.
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See Climate To lock or unlock the liftgate from
vehicle if it is driven with the Control System in the Index. inside the vehicle, press Q or K on
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with . If the vehicle is equipped with the power door lock switch. See
any objects that pass through the a power liftgate, disable the Power Door Locks on page 2-6.
seal between the body and the power liftgate function.
To open the liftgate, press the touch
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine For more information about pad on the underside of the liftgate
exhaust contains Carbon carbon monoxide, see Engine handle and pull up.
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Exhaust on page 9-20.
seen or smelled. It can cause To close the liftgate, pull down using
unconsciousness and even death. the handle and close until it latches.
If the vehicle must be driven with

the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: { Caution
. Close all of the windows. To avoid damage to the liftgate or
liftgate glass, make sure the area
. Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument above and behind the liftgate is
panel. clear before opening it.
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Liftgate Operation with Loss of Vehicle Security vehicles equipped with the remote
Power start feature only, are closed. The
This vehicle has theft-deterrent security light will come on solid for
features; however, they do not make approximately 30 seconds and then
the vehicle impossible to steal. flash slowly. If Q on the RKE
transmitter is pressed a second
Vehicle Alarm System time, the theft-deterrent system will
The vehicle may have a content arm immediately, bypassing the
theft-deterrent alarm system. 30-second delay. The content
theft-deterrent alarm is not armed
until the security light flashes slowly.
If any door, liftgate, or the hood, on
vehicles equipped with the remote
start feature only, are opened
To open the liftgate if the vehicle's without using the key or pressing K
battery is disconnected or the on the RKE transmitter, the exterior
voltage is low, access the release lamps flash and the horn will sound
lever. Remove the interior trim cover for about 30 seconds. If Q or K on
on the inside of the liftgate. Use a the RKE transmitter is not pressed,
tool to push the lever on the latch the alarm sounds and periodically
until the liftgate releases. repeats. If the system does not
operate as described above, see
The security light is near the center your dealer for service.
of the instrument panel.
The theft-deterrent system does not
To arm the theft-deterrent system, arm if you lock the doors with a key.
press Q on the RKE transmitter
when all doors and the hood, on
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
To avoid setting off the alarm by 4. Reach in through the window, The system is automatically armed
accident, always unlock a door with unlock the door with the manual when the key is removed from the
the RKE transmitter or a key. door lock, and open the door. ignition.
Unlocking a door any other way will This should set off the alarm. You do not have to manually arm or
set off the alarm if the system has If the alarm does not sound when it disarm the system.
been armed. should, but the vehicle's headlamps The security light comes on if there
If you set off the alarm by accident, flash, check to see if the horn is a problem with the theft-deterrent
turn off the alarm by pressing Q or works. The horn fuse may be blown. system operation.
K on the RKE transmitter or by To replace the fuse, see Fuses and
placing the key in the ignition and Circuit Breakers on page 10-31. When the PASS-Key III+ system
turning it to START. senses that someone is using the
If the alarm does not sound or the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle
vehicle's headlamps do not flash, from starting. Anyone using a
Testing the Alarm see your dealer for service. trial-and-error method to start the
To test the alarm:
vehicle will be discouraged because
1. From inside the vehicle, lower Immobilizer of the high number of electrical key
the driver window and open the See Radio Frequency Statement on codes.
driver door. page 13-15. When trying to start the vehicle if
2. Get out of the vehicle, close the the engine does not start and the
door, and activate the system by Immobilizer Operation security light on the instrument
locking the doors with the RKE cluster comes on, there may be a
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+
transmitter. problem with the theft-deterrent
(Personalized Automotive Security
3. Wait for the security light to flash System) theft-deterrent system. system. Turn the ignition off and try
slowly. PASS-Key III+ is a passive again.
theft-deterrent system. If the engine still does not start, and
the key does not appear to be
damaged, wait about five minutes
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
and try another ignition key and To program the new key: Exterior Mirrors
check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 10-31. 1. Verify that the new key has 1
If the engine still does not start with stamped on it. Convex Mirrors
the other key, the vehicle needs 2. Insert the already programmed
service. If the vehicle does start, the key in the ignition and start the { Warning
first key may be faulty. See your engine. If the engine does not
dealer who can service the start, see your dealer for service. A convex mirror can make things,
PASS-Key III+ to have a new like other vehicles, look farther
key made. 3. After the engine has started, turn away than they really are. If you
the key to LOCK/OFF, and cut too sharply into the right lane,
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ remove the key.
decoder to “learn” the transponder you could hit a vehicle on the
value of a new or replacement key. 4. Insert the key to be programmed right. Check the inside mirror or
Up to 10 keys may be programmed and turn it to the ON/RUN glance over your shoulder before
for the vehicle. The following position within five seconds of changing lanes.
procedure is for programming the original key being turned to
additional keys only. If all the the LOCK/OFF position.
The passenger side mirror is convex
currently programmed keys are lost The security light turns off once shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
or do not operate, you must see the key has been programmed. curved so more can be seen from
your dealer or a locksmith who can 5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additional the driver seat.
service PASS-Key III+ to have keys keys are to be programmed.
made and programmed to the
system. If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost or
damaged, see your dealer or a
See your dealer or a locksmith who locksmith to have a new key made.
can service PASS-Key III+ to get a
new key blank that is cut exactly as Do not leave the key or device that
the ignition key that operates the disarms or deactivates the
system. theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Power Mirrors Automatic Dimming Feature Heated Mirrors

If equipped, the automatic dimming The vehicle may have heated
mirror on the driver side reduces the mirrors.
glare from the headlamps from
behind. = (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the outside rearview
mirrors. See “Rear Window
Folding Mirrors Defogger” under Automatic Climate
Manual Folding Mirrors Control System on page 8-5.
The vehicle has manual folding
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded
Automatic Dimming
inward to prevent damage when Mirror
going through an automatic car The driver outside mirror
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward automatically adjusts for the glare of
To adjust the power mirrors: the vehicle. Push the mirror outward headlamps from behind.
to return it to the original position.
1. Turn the knob to choose the
left (L) or the right (R) mirror.
2. Use the knob to move the
selected mirror so the side and
the area behind the vehicle
is seen.
3. Return the control to the center
position so the mirror cannot be
moved.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Interior Mirrors Windows Power Windows
Interior Rearview Mirrors { Warning { Warning

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear Children could be seriously
Never leave a child, a helpless
view of the area behind your injured or killed if caught in the
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
vehicle. path of a closing window. Never
especially with the windows
Do not spray glass cleaner directly closed in warm or hot weather. leave keys in a vehicle with
on the mirror. Use a soft towel They can be overcome by the children. When there are children
dampened with water. extreme heat and suffer in the rear seat, use the window
permanent injuries or even death lockout button to prevent
Manual Rearview Mirror from heat stroke. operation of the windows. See
If equipped, push the tab forward for Keys on page 2-1.
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
use to avoid glare from the
headlamps from behind.
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
If equipped, automatic dimming
reduces the glare of the headlamps
from behind. This feature comes on
when the vehicle is started.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Press the front of the switch to open on the driver door panel to activate Roof
the window. Pull the switch up to the switch. Press it again to
close it. deactivate the switch.
Sunroof
The power windows operate when
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ Sun Visors
ACCESSORY, or while in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See
on page 9-18.
Express-Down Window
The driver window switch has an
express-down feature that lowers
the window without holding the
switch. Press the switch part way
and the window will open a small Pull the sun visor down to block
amount. Press the switch down all glare. If equipped, detach the sun
the way and release it and the visor from the center mount to pivot To operate the sunroof, the ignition
window lowers all the way. to the side window or to extend must be in ON/RUN, or ACC/
along the rod. ACCESSORY, or Retained
To stop the window while it is Accessory Power (RAP) must be
lowering, press and release the active. See Retained Accessory
switch. Power (RAP) on page 9-18.
Window Lockout
This feature prevents the rear seat
passengers from operating the
windows. Press the lockout switch
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1. Open/Close: Slide and release

the switch rearward to express
open the sunroof. Slide the
switch forward or rearward to
stop movement.
The sunshade opens
automatically with the sunroof or
can be manually operated. The
sunshade cannot be closed with
the sunroof open. Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
Slide and hold the switch could cause an issue with sunroof
forward to close the sunroof. operation or noise. It could also plug
The sunshade must be closed the water drainage system.
manually. Periodically open the sunroof and
2. Vent Open/Close: Press and remove any obstacles or loose
hold the switch to vent the debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
sunroof. Pull and hold the switch roof sealing area using a clean
to close it. The sunshade must cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
be manually operated when the remove grease from the sunroof.
sunroof is in the vent position. If water is seen dripping into the
water drainage system, that is
normal.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
2 NOTES
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

Safety Belt Use During Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adding Equipment to the
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-28
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29
Head Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Replacing Airbag System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-3 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Child Restraints
Front Seats Airbag System Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Infants and Young
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 When Should an Airbag Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-35
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-36
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 What Makes an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 for Children (LATCH
How Does an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Replacing LATCH System
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
What Will You See after an Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Safety Belts Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Passenger Sensing System (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
How to Wear Safety Belts (United States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Securing Child Restraints
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-46
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
{ Warning head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly, Front Seats
there is a greater chance that The vehicle's front seats have
occupants will suffer a neck/ adjustable head restraints in the
spinal injury in a crash. Do not outboard seating positions.
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and The height of the head restraint can
adjusted properly. be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head To lower the head restraint, press
restraint to make sure that it is the button located on the top of the
locked in place. seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Rear Seats Front Seats 2. Slide the seat to the desired

position and release the bar.
The vehicle's rear seats have
adjustable head restraints in the Seat Adjustment 3. Try to move the seat back and
outboard seating positions that can forth to be sure the seat is
be adjusted the same way as the locked in place.
front head restraints.
{ Warning
Seat Height Adjuster
Rear outboard head restraints are You can lose control of the
not designed to be removed. vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Active Head Restraints Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
The vehicle has an active head
restraint system in the front seating
positions. These automatically tilt To adjust a manual seat:
forward to reduce the risk of neck
injury if the vehicle is hit from
behind.
If available, move the lever up or

down to raise or lower the seat.
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Power Seat Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment
To raise or lower the front or rear

part of the seat cushion, move the
If available, move the control front or rear of the control up If equipped, move the lever forward
forward or rearward to adjust the or down. or rearward to increase or decrease
seat position. the lumbar support.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you Do not have a seatback reclined if To recline the seatback:
could go into it, receiving neck or the vehicle is moving.
other injuries. 1. Lift the lever on the outboard
Manual Reclining Seatbacks side of the seat.
The lap belt could go up over
your abdomen. The belt forces 2. Move the seatback to the
would be there, not at your pelvic { Warning desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
bones. This could cause serious
If either seatback is not locked, it seatback in place.
internal injuries.
could move forward in a sudden
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
For proper protection when the stop or crash. That could cause make sure it is locked.
vehicle is in motion, have the injury to the person sitting there.
seatback upright. Then sit well Always push and pull on the
back in the seat and wear the seatbacks to be sure they are
safety belt properly. locked.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
To return the seatback to the upright

. Tilt the top of the control forward
position: to raise.
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
Heated Front Seats
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position. { Warning
2. Push and pull on the seatback to If you cannot feel temperature
make sure it is locked. change or pain to the skin, the
Power Reclining Seatbacks seat heater may cause burns. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater, Automatic Climate Control System
especially for long periods of Shown
time. Do not place anything on
If available, the buttons are on the
the seat that insulates against climate control panel. To operate,
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, the ignition must be on.
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to Press L or M to heat the driver or
overheat. An overheated seat passenger seat cushion and
heater may cause a burn or may seatback.
damage the seat. Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
To adjust a power seatback, the button, the heated seat will
if equipped: change to the next lower setting,
and then to the off setting. The
. Tilt the top of the control
lights indicate two for the highest
rearward to recline.
setting and one for the lowest.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
The passenger seat may take

longer to heat up. { Warning
Things you put on this seatback
Folding Seatback can strike and injure people in a
The front passenger seatback may sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
fold flat. Remove or secure all items
before driving.
{ Warning
If you fold the seatback forward to To fold the seatback:
carry longer objects, such as skis, 1. Lower the head restraint all the
be sure any such cargo is not way. See Head Restraints on
near an airbag. In a crash, an page 3-2. 3. Lift the lever fully and fold the
inflating airbag might force that seatback forward until it
2. Move the seat as far back as disengages.
object toward a person. This possible. See Seat Adjustment
could cause severe injury or even on page 3-3. 4. Continue lowering the seatback
death. Secure objects away from until it is completely folded.
the area in which an airbag would To raise the seatback:
inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on 1. Raise the seatback and push it
page 3-19 and Vehicle Load rearward until it re-engages.
Limits on page 9-10.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
{ Warning Rear Seats

Folding the Seatback
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause { Caution
injury to the person sitting there. Folding a rear seat with the safety
Always push and pull on the belts still fastened may cause
seatbacks to be sure they are damage to the seat or the safety
locked. belts. Always unbuckle the safety
belts and return them to their
2. Push and pull on the seatback to normal stowed position before
make sure it is locked in place. folding a rear seat. 2. Lift the lever on the top of the
seatback and fold the seatback
To fold a seatback: forward.
1. Unbuckle the rear safety belts 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
and put the front seatback in the other seatback, if desired.
upright position. See Reclining
Seatbacks on page 3-5.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Raising the Seatback To return the seatback to the upright Safety Belts
position:
{ Warning 1. Lift the seatback up and push it
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
back into place.
If either seatback is not locked, it properly. It also describes some
could move forward in a sudden 2. Push and pull the top of the things not to do with safety belts.
stop or crash. That could cause seatback to be sure it is locked
injury to the person sitting there. into position. { Warning
Always push and pull on the 3. Make sure the safety belts are
seatbacks to be sure they are not twisted or caught in the Do not let anyone ride where a
locked. seatback. safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
passenger(s) are not wearing
other seatback, if necessary.
safety belts, injuries can be much
{ Warning When the seatback is not in use, it worse than if you are wearing
should be kept in the upright, locked safety belts. You can be seriously
A safety belt that is improperly position. injured or killed by hitting things
routed, not properly attached, inside the vehicle harder or by
or twisted will not provide the Reclining the Seatback
being ejected from the vehicle. In
protection needed in a crash. The To recline the seatback: addition, anyone who is not
person wearing the belt could be 1. Lift and hold the lever on top of buckled up can strike other
seriously injured. After raising the the seatback. passengers in the vehicle.
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are 2. Tilt the seatback rearward, and It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly routed and attached, and then release the lever. in a cargo area, inside or outside
are not twisted. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the of a vehicle. In a collision,
other seatback, if desired. passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing

Warning (Continued) safety belts makes such good
sense.
are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow Questions and Answers About
passengers to ride in any area of Safety Belts
the vehicle that is not equipped Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
with seats and safety belts. after a crash if I am wearing a
Always wear a safety belt, and safety belt?
check that all passenger(s) are A: You could be — whether you are
restrained properly too. wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious
This vehicle has indicators as a during and after a crash, so you
reminder to buckle the safety belts. can unbuckle and get out, is
See Safety Belt Reminders on When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted.
page 5-11. as fast as the vehicle does. If the Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. belts?
It could be the windshield, the
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. them. Whether or not an airbag
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Also, in nearly all states and in There are important things to know would apply force on your
all Canadian provinces, the law about wearing a safety belt properly. abdomen. This could cause
requires wearing safety belts. serious or even fatal injuries.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the
How to Wear Safety Belts shoulder and across the chest.
Properly These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
This section is only for people of
forces. The shoulder belt locks if
adult size.
there is a sudden stop or crash.
There are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller
{ Warning
children and infants. If a child will be You can be seriously injured,
riding in the vehicle, see Older or even killed, by not wearing
Children on page 3-30 or Infants your safety belt properly.
and Young Children on page 3-32. . Sit up straight and always keep
. Never allow the lap or
Follow those rules for everyone's your feet on the floor in front
protection. of you. shoulder belt to become
loose or twisted.
It is very important for all occupants . Always use the correct buckle
to buckle up. Statistics show that for your seating position.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
unbelted people are hurt more often under both arms or behind
. Wear the lap part of the belt low your back.
in crashes than those who are and snug on the hips, just
wearing safety belts. touching the thighs. In a crash,
. Never route the lap or
this applies force to the strong shoulder belt over an
pelvic bones and you would be armrest.
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
All seating positions in the vehicle get twisted.
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
The following instructions explain you pull the belt across you very
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt quickly. If this happens, let the
properly. belt go back slightly to unlock it.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is Then pull the belt across you
adjustable, so you can sit up more slowly.
straight. To see how, see “Seats” If the shoulder portion of a
in the Index. passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. 3. Push the latch plate into the
If this happens, let the belt go buckle until it clicks.
back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch plate to
On vehicles with a Passenger make sure it is secure. If the belt
Sensing System, engaging the is not long enough, see Safety
child restraint locking feature in Belt Extender on page 3-16.
the right front seating position Position the release button on
may affect the passenger the buckle so that the safety belt
sensing system. See Passenger could be quickly unbuckled if
Sensing System (United States) necessary.
on page 3-24 for more
information.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

height adjuster, move it to the
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height that is right for you. See
height adjuster for the driver and
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
right front passenger seating
later in this section for
positions.
instructions on use and
important safety information. Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
To unlatch the belt, push the button the safety belt in a crash. See How
on the buckle. The belt should to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
return to its stowed position. Slide page 3-11.
the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing when the safety belt is not
in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
near the guide loop on the side wall.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull Before a door is closed, be sure the
up on the shoulder belt. safety belt is out of the way. If a
It may be necessary to pull the door is slammed against a safety
stitching on the safety belt belt, damage can occur to both the
through the latch plate to fully safety belt and the vehicle.
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
are part of the safety belt assembly. properly adjusted, the comfort guide
They can help tighten the safety positions the shoulder belt away
belts during the early stages of a from the neck and head.
moderate to severe frontal or near There is one guide, if equipped, for
frontal crash if the threshold each outboard passenger position in
conditions for pretensioner the rear seat. Here is how to install
activation are met. And, for vehicles a comfort guide to the safety belt:
with side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the 1. Remove the guide from its
safety belts in a side crash or a storage location, which is a
rollover event. pocket on the side of the seat.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
Squeeze the release buttons pretensioners activate in a crash,
together and move the height they will need to be replaced, and
adjuster up or down to the desired probably other new parts for the
position. vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
After the adjuster is set to the after a Crash on page 3-17.
desired position, try to move it up or
down without squeezing the release Rear Safety Belt Comfort
buttons to make sure it has locked Guides
into position.
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
Safety Belt Pretensioners belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
This vehicle has safety belt 2. Place the guide over the belt
guides may provide added safety
pretensioners for the front outboard and insert the two edges of the
belt comfort for older children who
occupants. Although the safety belt belt into the slots of the guide.
have outgrown booster seats and
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
for some adults. When installed and
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
To remove and store the comfort

Warning (Continued) guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
and across the chest. These parts be removed from the guide. Store
of the body are best able to take the comfort guide in its storage
belt restraining forces. location, which is a pocket on the
side of the seat.
Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
3. Be sure that the belt is not occupants, they are more likely to
twisted and it lies flat. The be seriously injured if they do not
elastic cord must be under the wear safety belts.
belt and the guide on top.
{ Warning
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the 4. Buckle, position, and release the
protection needed in a crash. The safety belt as described
person wearing the belt could be previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt is on the shoulder and not
belt should go over the shoulder
falling off of it. The belt should
(Continued) be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Safety Belt Extender to have it repaired. Torn or frayed

safety belts may not protect you in a
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten crash. They can rip apart under
around you, you should use it. impact forces. If a belt is torn or
But if a safety belt is not long frayed, get a new one right away.
enough, your dealer will order you Make sure the safety belt reminder
an extender. When you go in to light is working. See Safety Belt
order it, take the heaviest coat you Reminders on page 5-11.
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid Keep safety belts clean and dry.
personal injury, do not let someone See Safety Belt Care on page 3-16.
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender Safety Belt Care
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults. Never Keep belts clean and dry.
portion should be worn as low as use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy. belt. See the instruction sheet that { Warning
comes with the extender. Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety It may severely weaken them. In
Safety System Check a crash, they might not be able to
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a Now and then, check that the safety provide adequate protection.
crash. For pregnant women, as for belt reminder light, safety belts, Clean safety belts only with mild
anyone, the key to making safety buckles, latch plates, retractors, and soap and lukewarm water.
belts effective is wearing them anchorages are all working properly.
properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer to have the safety Airbag System
belt assemblies inspected or
System Parts after a replaced. The vehicle has the following
Crash New parts and repairs may be
airbags:
necessary even if the safety belt . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ Warning system was not being used at the . A frontal airbag for the front
time of the crash. outboard passenger.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle. Have the safety belt pretensioners . A seat-mounted side impact
A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a airbag for the driver.
may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle . A seat-mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in airbag for the front outboard
serious injury or even death in a or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5-12. passenger.
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver
properly after a crash, have them and the passenger seated
inspected and any necessary directly behind the driver.
replacements made as soon as . A roof-rail airbag for the front
possible. outboard passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the front outboard
After a minor crash, replacement of passenger.
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that All vehicle airbags have the word
were used during any crash may AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
have been stressed or damaged. near the deployment opening.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
For frontal airbags, the word

AIRBAG is on the center of the Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the front death. Secure objects away from designed to work with safety
outboard passenger. the area in which an airbag would belts, not replace them. Also,
inflate. For more information, see airbags are not designed to inflate
For seat-mounted side impact Where Are the Airbags? on in every crash. In some crashes
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the page 3-19 and Vehicle Load safety belts are the only restraint.
side of the seatback closest to Limits on page 9-10. See When Should an Airbag
the door.
Inflate? on page 3-21.
For roof-rail airbags, the word
Airbags are designed to supplement Wearing your safety belt during a
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
the protection provided by safety crash helps reduce the chance of
Even if you do not have a front belts. Even though today's airbags hitting things inside the vehicle or
outboard passenger seat in the are also designed to help reduce being ejected from it. Airbags are
vehicle, there is still an active frontal the risk of injury from the force of an “supplemental restraints” to the
airbag in the right side of the inflating bag, all airbags must inflate safety belts. Everyone in the
instrument panel. Do not place very quickly to do their job. vehicle should wear a safety belt
cargo in front of this airbag. properly, whether or not there is
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system: an airbag for that person.
{ Warning
Be sure that cargo is not near an { Warning
airbag. In a crash, an inflating You can be severely injured or
airbag might force that object killed in a crash if you are not
toward a person. This could wearing your safety belt, even
cause severe injury or even with airbags. Airbags are
(Continued) (Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Where Are the Airbags?

{ Warning { Warning
Because airbags inflate with great Children who are up against,
force and faster than the blink of or very close to, any airbag when
an eye, anyone who is up it inflates can be seriously injured
against, or very close to any or killed. Always secure children
airbag when it inflates can be properly in the vehicle. To read
seriously injured or killed. Do not how, see Older Children on
sit unnecessarily close to any page 3-30 or Infants and Young
airbag, as you would be if sitting Children on page 3-32.
on the edge of the seat or leaning
forward. Safety belts help keep
you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear a safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver The driver frontal airbag is in the
should sit as far back as possible middle of the steering wheel.
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument cluster, which
sleep against the door or side
shows the airbag symbol. The
windows in seating positions with
system checks the airbag electrical
seat-mounted side impact airbags system for malfunctions. The light
and/or roof-rail airbags. tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5-12 for more
information.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
The front outboard passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger
frontal airbag is in the instrument Side Similar Side Similar
panel on the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
airbags for the driver and front front outboard passenger, and
outboard passenger are in the side second row outboard passengers
of the seatbacks closest to the door. are in the ceiling above the side
windows.
{ Warning
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Warning (Continued)
When Should an Airbag It depends on what is hit, the
direction of the impact, and how
Inflate? quickly the vehicle slows down.
that person causing severe injury This vehicle is equipped with
or even death. The path of an Frontal airbags may inflate at
airbags. See Airbag System on different crash speeds depending on
inflating airbag must be kept page 3-17. Airbags are designed to
clear. Do not put anything whether the vehicle hits an object
inflate if the impact exceeds the straight on or at an angle, and
between an occupant and an specific airbag system's deployment
airbag, and do not attach or put whether the object is fixed or
threshold. Deployment thresholds moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a or wide.
hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the
airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain Frontal airbags are not intended to
the occupants. The vehicle has inflate during vehicle rollovers, in
Do not use seat accessories that rear impacts, or in many side
electronic sensors that help the
block the inflation path of a impacts.
airbag system determine the
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
severity of the impact. Deployment In addition, the vehicle has
Never secure anything to the roof thresholds can vary with specific advanced technology frontal
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags vehicle design. airbags. Advanced technology
by routing a rope or tie‐down Frontal airbags are designed to frontal airbags adjust the restraint
through any door or window inflate in moderate to severe frontal according to crash severity.
opening. If you do, the path of an or near frontal crashes to help Seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflating roof-rail airbag will be reduce the potential for severe are designed to inflate in moderate
blocked. injuries, mainly to the driver's or to severe side crashes depending
front outboard passenger's head on the location of the impact.
and chest. Seat-mounted side impact airbags
Whether the frontal airbags will or are not designed to inflate in frontal
should inflate is not based primarily impacts, near frontal impacts,
on how fast the vehicle is traveling. rollovers, or rear impacts.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
A seat-mounted side impact airbag inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the first and second rows. The rollover
is designed to inflate on the side of airbag causing the bag to break out capable roof-rail airbags are
the vehicle that is struck. of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, designed to help reduce the risk of
Roof-rail airbags are designed to and related hardware are all part of full or partial ejection in rollover
inflate in moderate to severe side the airbag module. events, although no system can
crashes depending on the location For airbag locations, see Where Are prevent all such ejections.
of the impact. In addition, these the Airbags? on page 3-19. But airbags would not help in many
roof-rail airbags are designed to types of collisions, primarily
inflate during a rollover or in a How Does an Airbag because the occupant's motion is
severe frontal impact. Roof-rail not toward those airbags. See When
airbags are not designed to inflate in
Restrain? Should an Airbag Inflate? on
rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags In moderate to severe frontal or page 3-21.
will inflate when either side of the near frontal collisions, even belted
Airbags should never be regarded
vehicle is struck, if the sensing occupants can contact the steering
as anything more than a supplement
system predicts that the vehicle is wheel or the instrument panel. In
to safety belts.
about to roll over on its side, or in a moderate to severe side collisions,
severe frontal impact. even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle. What Will You See after
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have Airbags supplement the protection
an Airbag Inflates?
inflated simply because of the provided by safety belts by After the frontal airbags and
vehicle damage or repair costs. distributing the force of the impact seat-mounted side impact airbags
more evenly over the inflate, they quickly deflate, so
What Makes an Airbag occupant's body. quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Inflate? Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
are designed to help contain the
In a deployment event, the sensing head and chest of occupants in the partially inflated for some time after
system sends an electrical signal outboard seating positions in the they deploy. Some components of
triggering a release of gas from the the airbag module may be hot for
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
several minutes. For location of the

airbag modules, see What Makes Warning (Continued) { Warning
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3-22.
airbag inflates, then get fresh air A crash severe enough to inflate
The parts of the airbag that come by opening a window or a door. the airbags may have also
into contact with you may be warm, If you experience breathing damaged important functions in
but not too hot to touch. There may problems following an airbag the vehicle, such as the fuel
be some smoke and dust coming deployment, you should seek system, brake and steering
from the vents in the deflated medical attention. systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
appears to be drivable after a
prevent the driver from seeing out of
The vehicle has a feature that may moderate crash, there may be
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent automatically unlock the doors, turn concealed damage that could
people from leaving the vehicle. on the interior lamps and hazard make it difficult to safely operate
warning flashers, and shut off the the vehicle.
{ Warning fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
When an airbag inflates, there interior lamps and hazard warning has occurred.
may be dust in the air. This dust flashers by using the controls for
could cause breathing problems those features. You must first,
however, turn the ignition key to the In many crashes severe enough to
for people with a history of
following ignition switch positions: inflate the airbag, windshields are
asthma or other breathing trouble.
broken by vehicle deformation.
To avoid this, everyone in the 1. Turn the ignition key to Additional windshield breakage may
vehicle should get out as soon as LOCK/OFF. also occur from the right front
it is safe to do so. If you have 2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN. passenger airbag.
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
. Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
(Continued) inflates, you will need some new
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
parts for the airbag system. Passenger Sensing certain conditions. No other airbag
If you do not get them, the is affected by the passenger
airbag system will not be there
System (United States) sensing system.
to help protect you in another The vehicle has a passenger The passenger sensing system
crash. A new system will include sensing system for the front works with sensors that are part of
airbag modules and possibly outboard passenger position. The the front outboard passenger seat
other parts. The service manual passenger airbag status indicator and safety belt. The sensors are
for your vehicle covers the need will light on the instrument panel designed to detect the presence of
to replace other parts. when the vehicle is started. a properly-seated occupant and
. The vehicle has a crash sensing determine if the front outboard
and diagnostic module which passenger frontal airbag should be
records information after a allowed to inflate or not.
crash. See Vehicle Data According to accident statistics,
Recording and Privacy on children are safer when properly
page 13-13 and Event Data secured in a rear seat in a correct
Recorders on page 13-14. child restraint for their weight
. Let only qualified technicians The words ON and OFF will be and size.
work on the airbag systems. visible during the system check.
When the system check is Whenever possible, children age
Improper service can mean that 12 and under should be secured in
an airbag system will not work complete, either the word ON or
OFF will be visible. See Passenger a rear seating position.
properly. See your dealer for
service. Airbag Status Indicator on Never put a rear-facing child seat in
page 5-13. the front. This is because the risk to
The passenger sensing system the rear-facing child is so great,
turns off the front outboard if the airbag deploys.
passenger frontal airbag under
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13

. The system determines that a
{ Warning Warning (Continued) small child is present in a child
restraint.
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints . The system determines that a
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
small child is present in a
or killed if the passenger frontal is off. If you secure a
booster seat.
airbag inflates. This is because forward-facing child restraint in
the back of the rear-facing child the front outboard passenger . A front outboard passenger
restraint would be very close to seat, always move the seat as far takes his/her weight off of the
the inflating airbag. A child in a back as it will go. It is better to seat for a period of time.
forward-facing child restraint can secure the child restraint in a . The front outboard passenger
be seriously injured or killed if the rear seat. seat is occupied by a smaller
passenger frontal airbag inflates person, such as a child who has
and the passenger seat is in a outgrown child restraints.
If the vehicle does not have a rear
forward position. seat that will accommodate a . There is a critical problem with
Even if the passenger sensing rear-facing child restraint, a the airbag system or the
system has turned off the rear-facing child restraint should not passenger sensing system.
passenger frontal airbag, no be installed in the vehicle, even if When the passenger sensing
system is fail-safe. No one can the airbag is off. system has turned off the front
guarantee that an airbag will not The passenger sensing system is outboard passenger frontal airbag,
inflate under some unusual designed to turn off the front the off indicator will light and stay lit
circumstance, even though the outboard passenger airbag if: as a reminder that the airbag is off.
airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status
. The front outboard passenger
(Continued) Indicator on page 5-13.
seat is unoccupied.
The passenger sensing system is
. The system determines that an
designed to turn on the front
infant is present in a rear-facing
outboard passenger frontal airbag
infant seat.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
anytime the system senses that a 4. Reinstall the child restraint

person of adult size is sitting { Warning following the directions provided
properly in the front outboard by the child restraint
passenger seat. If the airbag readiness light ever manufacturer and refer to
comes on and stays on, it means Securing Child Restraints (Rear
When the passenger sensing that something may be wrong
system has allowed the airbag to be Seat) on page 3-44 or Securing
with the airbag system. To help Child Restraints (Front
enabled, the on indicator will light avoid injury to yourself or others,
and stay lit as a reminder that the Passenger Seat) on page 3-46.
have the vehicle serviced right
airbag is active. 5. If, after reinstalling the child
away. See Airbag Readiness
For some children who have restraint and restarting the
Light on page 5-12 for more
outgrown child restraints, and for vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
information, including important turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
very small adults, the passenger safety information.
sensing system may or may not turn recline the vehicle seatback and
off the front outboard passenger adjust the seat cushion,
frontal airbag, depending upon the If the On Indicator Is Lit for a if adjustable, to make sure that
person’s seating posture and body Child Restraint the vehicle seatback is not
build. Everyone in the vehicle who pushing the child restraint into
If a child restraint has been installed the seat cushion.
has outgrown child restraints should and the on indicator is lit:
wear a safety belt properly — Also make sure the child
whether or not there is an airbag for 1. Turn the vehicle off. restraint is not trapped under the
that person. 2. Remove the child restraint from vehicle head restraint. If this
the vehicle. happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
3. Remove any additional items on page 3-2.
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
6. Restart the vehicle. If a person of adult size is sitting in passenger sensing system to
If the on indicator is still lit, the front outboard passenger seat, turn the airbag off for some
secure the child restraint in a but the off indicator is lit, it could be adult-sized occupants. If this
rear seat position in the vehicle, because that person is not sitting happens, let the belt go back all
and check with your dealer. properly in the seat or that the child the way and start again without
restraint locking feature is engaged. pulling the belt out all the way.
If no rear seat is available, do Use the following steps to allow the
not install a child restraint in this 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
system to detect that person and person remain in this position for
vehicle. enable the front outboard passenger two to three minutes after the on
frontal airbag: indicator is lit.
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
Adult-Sized Occupant 1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material { Warning
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat If the front outboard passenger
heaters, or seat massagers. airbag is turned off for an
adult-sized occupant, the airbag
3. Place the seatback in the fully will not be able to inflate and help
upright position. protect that person in a crash,
4. Have the person sit upright in resulting in an increased risk of
the seat, centered on the seat serious injury or even death. An
cushion, with legs comfortably adult-sized occupant should not
extended. ride in the front outboard
If the shoulder portion of the belt passenger seat, if the passenger
is pulled out all the way, the airbag off indicator is lit.
child restraint locking feature will
be engaged. This may
unintentionally cause the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Additional Factors Affecting The on indicator may be lit if an purchase a service manual, see
System Operation object, such as a briefcase, Service Publications Ordering
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or Information on page 13-11.
Safety belts help keep the other electronic device, is put on an
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired remove the object from
{ Warning
braking, which helps the passenger the seat. For up to 10 seconds after the
sensing system maintain the
vehicle is turned off and the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” { Warning battery is disconnected, an airbag
in the Index for additional can still inflate during improper
Stowing of articles under the service. You can be injured if you
information about the importance of
passenger seat or between the are close to an airbag when it
proper restraint use.
passenger seat cushion and inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
A thick layer of additional material, seatback may interfere with the They are probably part of the
such as a blanket or cushion, proper operation of the passenger airbag system. Be sure to follow
or aftermarket equipment such as sensing system. proper service procedures, and
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
make sure the person performing
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system Servicing the work for you is qualified to do so.
operates. We recommend that you Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
not use seat covers or other Adding Equipment to the
aftermarket equipment except when Airbags affect how the vehicle
approved by GM for your specific should be serviced. There are parts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to of the airbag system in several Adding accessories that change the
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on places around the vehicle. Your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
page 3-28 for more information dealer and the service manual have height, front end, or side sheet
about modifications that can affect information about servicing the metal may keep the airbag system
how the system operates. vehicle and the airbag system. To from working properly. The
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
operation of the airbag system can of the seat fabric, could also Airbag System Check
also be affected by changing any interfere with the operation of the
parts of the front seats, safety belts, passenger sensing system. This The airbag system does not need
the airbag sensing and diagnostic could either prevent proper regularly scheduled maintenance or
module, steering wheel, instrument deployment of the passenger replacement. Make sure the airbag
panel, any of the airbag modules, airbag(s) or prevent the passenger readiness light is working. See
ceiling or pillar garnish trim, front sensing system from properly Airbag Readiness Light on
sensors, side impact sensors, turning off the passenger airbag(s). page 5-12.
or airbag wiring. See Passenger Sensing System
Your dealer and the service manual (United States) on page 3-24. { Caution
have information about the location The vehicle has rollover roof-rail If an airbag covering is damaged,
of the airbag sensors, sensing and airbags. See Different Size Tires
opened, or broken, the airbag
diagnostic module, and airbag and Wheels on page 10-54 for
may not work properly. Do not
wiring. additional important information.
open or break the airbag
In addition, the vehicle has a If you have to modify your vehicle coverings. If there are any
passenger sensing system for the because you have a disability and opened or broken airbag
front outboard passenger position, have questions about whether the coverings, have the airbag
which includes sensors that are part modifications will affect the vehicle's covering and/or airbag module
of the passenger seat. The airbag system, or if you have replaced. For the location of the
passenger sensing system may not questions about whether the airbag airbags, see Where Are the
operate properly if the original seat system will be affected if the vehicle
Airbags? on page 3-19. See your
trim is replaced with non-GM is modified for any other reason, call
dealer for service.
covers, upholstery, or trim; or with Customer Assistance. See
GM covers, upholstery, or trim Customer Assistance Offices on
designed for a different vehicle. Any page 13-3.
object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
or device, installed under or on top
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints
replace airbag system parts. See
Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
{ Warning after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag
systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
not work properly and may not
page 5-12.
protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death. To
help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as Older children who have outgrown
possible. booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
The manufacturer instructions that

. Can proper safety belt fit be In a crash, children who are not
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the buckled up can strike other people
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no, who are buckled up, or can be
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat. thrown out of the vehicle. Older
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to children need to use safety belts
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts? properly.
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the { Warning
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. Never allow more than one child
belt can provide. The shoulder
to wear the same safety belt. The
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit safety belt cannot properly spread
Does the shoulder belt rest on the impact forces. In a crash, they
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs. can be crushed together and
If no, try using the rear safety
This applies belt force to the seriously injured. A safety belt
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
child's pelvic bones in a crash. must be used by only one person
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the at a time.
page 3-12. If the shoulder belt abdomen, which could cause
still does not rest on the severe or even fatal internal
shoulder, then return to the injuries in a crash.
booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3-12.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, According to accident statistics,
return to the booster seat. children are safer when properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Warning (Continued)
Infants and Young
Children
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
{ Warning restrained while in a vehicle.
Never allow a child to wear the

safety belt with the shoulder belt
{ Warning
behind their back. A child can be Children can be seriously injured
seriously injured by not wearing or strangled if a shoulder belt is
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a wrapped around their neck and
crash, the child would not be the safety belt continues to
restrained by the shoulder belt. tighten. Never leave children
The child could move too far unattended in a vehicle and never
forward increasing the chance of allow children to play with the
head and neck injury. The child safety belts.
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Every time infants and young

children ride in vehicles, they should Warning (Continued)
have the protection provided by
appropriate child restraints. Neither seat, always move the front
the vehicle's safety belt system nor passenger seat as far back as it
its airbag system is designed will go.
for them.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ Warning
Never hold an infant or a child { Warning
while riding in a vehicle. Due to Children who are up against,
crash forces, an infant or a child or very close to, any airbag when
will become so heavy it is not it inflates can be seriously injured
possible to hold it during a crash. or killed. Never put a rear-facing
For example, in a crash at only child restraint in the right front
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) seat. Secure a rear-facing child
infant will suddenly become a restraint in a rear seat. It is also
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's better to secure a forward-facing
arms. An infant should be child restraint in a rear seat. If you
secured in an appropriate must secure a forward-facing
restraint. child restraint in the right front
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Q: What are the different types of are many kinds of restraints

add-on child restraints? available for children with Warning (Continued)
A: Add-on child restraints, which special needs.
Instead, it may settle up around
are purchased by the vehicle the child's abdomen. In a crash,
owner, are available in four basic { Warning the belt would apply force on a
types. Selection of a particular body area that is unprotected by
restraint should take into To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants any bony structure. This alone
consideration not only the child's could cause serious or fatal
weight, height, and age but also need complete support. In a
crash, if an infant is in a injuries. To reduce the risk of
whether or not the restraint will
rear-facing child restraint, the serious or fatal injuries during a
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used. crash forces can be distributed crash, young children should
across the strongest part of an always be secured in appropriate
For most basic types of child child restraints.
restraints, there are many infant's body, the back and
different models available. When shoulders. Infants should always
purchasing a child restraint, be be secured in rear-facing child
sure it is designed to be used in restraints.
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards. { Warning
The restraint manufacturer A young child's hip bones are still
instructions that come with the so small that the vehicle's regular
restraint state the weight and safety belt may not remain low on
height limitations for a particular the hip bones, as it should.
child restraint. In addition, there
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Child Restraint Systems
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats

Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
restraint with the seating surface A booster seat can also help a child
against the back of the infant. to see out the window.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Securing an Add-On Child endangered in a crash if the child Administration (NHTSA) website to
Restraint in the Vehicle restraint is not properly secured in locate the nearest child safety seat
the vehicle. inspection station.
{ Warning When securing an add-on child Securing the Child Within the
restraint, refer to the instructions Child Restraint
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual. { Warning
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are A child can be seriously injured or
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
killed in a crash if the child is not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
properly secured in the child
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
restraint. Secure the child
instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured properly following the instructions
child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a that came with that child restraint.
in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in Where to Put the
the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is Restraint
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
According to accident statistics,
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States, children and infants are safer when
seats by lap belts or the lap belt Certified Child Passenger Safety properly restrained in a child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Technicians (CPSTs) are available restraint system or infant restraint
the LATCH system. See Lower to inspect and demonstrate how to system secured in a rear seating
Anchors and Tethers for Children correctly use and install child position.
(LATCH System) on page 3-38 for restraints. In the U.S., refer to the
more information. Children can be National Highway Traffic Safety
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Whenever possible, children age

12 and under should be secured in Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
a rear seating position.
The vehicle may have a far back as it will go. It is better to
Never put a rear-facing child passenger sensing system which secure the child restraint in a
restraint in the front. This is because is designed to turn off the front rear seat.
the risk to the rear-facing child is so outboard passenger frontal airbag
great if the airbag deploys. See Passenger Sensing System
under certain conditions. (United States) on page 3-24 for
{ Warning Even if the passenger sensing
system, if equipped, has turned
additional information.
A child in a rear-facing child off the front outboard passenger When securing a child restraint in a
restraint can be seriously injured frontal airbag, no system is rear seating position, study the
or killed if the front outboard fail-safe. No one can guarantee instructions that came with the child
passenger airbag inflates. This is that an airbag will not deploy restraint to make sure it is
because the back of the under some unusual compatible with this vehicle.
rear-facing child restraint would circumstance, even though it is
Child restraints and booster seats
be very close to the inflating turned off.
vary considerably in size, and some
airbag. A child in a forward-facing Secure rear-facing child restraints may fit in certain seating positions
child restraint can be seriously in a rear seat, even if the airbag better than others. Always make
injured or killed if the front is off. If you secure a sure the child restraint is properly
outboard passenger airbag forward-facing child restraint in secured.
inflates and the passenger seat is the front outboard seat, always Depending on where you place the
in a forward position. move the front passenger seat as child restraint and the size of the
(Continued) (Continued) child restraint, you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
restraints. Adjacent seating vehicle. The LATCH system is Make sure to follow the instructions
positions should not be used if the designed to make installation of a that came with the child restraint,
child restraint prevents access to or child restraint easier. and also the instructions in this
interferes with the routing of the In order to use the LATCH system in manual.
safety belt. your vehicle, you need a child When installing a child restraint with
Wherever a child restraint is restraint that has LATCH a top tether, you must also use
installed, be sure to secure the child attachments. LATCH-compatible either the lower anchors or the
restraint properly. rear-facing and forward-facing child safety belts to properly secure the
Keep in mind that an unsecured seats can be properly installed child restraint. A child restraint must
child restraint can move around in a using either the LATCH anchors or never be installed using only the top
collision or sudden stop and injure the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not tether and anchor.
people in the vehicle. Be sure to use both the safety belts and the The LATCH anchorage system can
properly secure any child restraint in LATCH anchorage system to secure be used until the combined weight
the vehicle — even when no child is a rear-facing or forward-facing of the child plus the child restraint is
in it. child seat. 29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt
Booster seats use the vehicle’s alone instead of the LATCH
Lower Anchors and safety belts to secure the child in anchorage system once the
the booster seat. If the manufacturer combined weight is more than
Tethers for Children recommends that the booster seat 29.5 kg (65 lbs).
(LATCH System) be secured with the LATCH system, The following explains how to attach
The LATCH system secures a child this can be done as long as the a child restraint with these
restraint during driving or in a crash. booster seat can be positioned attachments in the vehicle.
LATCH attachments on the child properly and there is no interference
restraint are used to attach the child with the proper positioning of the Not all vehicle seating positions or
restraint to the anchors in the lap-shoulder belt on the child. child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4).
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. Be
sure to read and follow the
instructions for the child restraint.
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
built into the vehicle. There are two the child restraint to the vehicle.
lower anchors for each LATCH A top tether anchor is built into the
seating position that will vehicle. The top tether
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (2) on the child restraint
lower attachments (2). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Lower Anchor and Top Tether of the vehicle as the seating

Anchor Locations position where the child restraint will
be placed.
To assist in locating the lower

anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
Rear Seat
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating Do not secure a child restraint in a
positions with top tether anchors. position without a top tether anchor
H (Lower Anchor): Seating To assist in locating the top tether if a national or local law requires
positions with two lower anchors. anchors, the top tether anchor that the top tether be attached, or if
symbol is near the top tether the instructions that come with the
anchors. child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
The top tether anchors are on the
back of the rear seatback. Be sure According to accident statistics,
to use an anchor on the same side children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
position. See Where to Put the

Restraint on page 3-36 for { Warning Warning (Continued)
additional information.
Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock,
Securing a Child Restraint restraint to a single anchor. if the vehicle has one, after the
Designed for the LATCH Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed.
System restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
{ Warning to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others { Caution
If a LATCH-type child restraint is could be injured. To reduce the Do not let the LATCH
not attached to anchors, the child risk of serious or fatal injuries attachments rub against the
restraint will not be able to protect during a crash, attach only one vehicle’s safety belts. This may
the child correctly. In a crash, the child restraint per anchor. damage these parts. If necessary,
child could be seriously injured or move buckled safety belts to
killed. Install a LATCH-type child avoid rubbing the LATCH
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle safety { Warning attachments.
belts to secure the restraint, Do not fold the empty rear seat
Children can be seriously injured with a safety belt buckled. This
following the instructions that or strangled if a shoulder belt is
came with the child restraint and could damage the safety belt or
wrapped around their neck and the seat. Unbuckle and return the
the instructions in this manual. the safety belt continues to safety belt to its stowed position,
tighten. Buckle any unused safety before folding the seat.
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If you need to secure more than one 1.1. Find the lower anchors for 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
child restraint in the rear seat, see the desired seating the top tether according to
Where to Put the Restraint on position. the child restraint
page 3-36. 1.2. Put the child restraint on instructions and the
This system is designed to make the seat. following instructions:
the installation of child restraints 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
easier. When using lower anchors, attachments on the child
do not use the vehicle's safety belts. restraint to the lower
Instead, use the vehicle's anchors anchors.
and child restraint attachments to
secure the restraints. Some 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
restraints also use another vehicle recommends that the top tether
anchor to secure a top tether. be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
1. Attach and tighten the lower anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
attachments to the lower child restraint instructions and If the position you are using
anchors. If the child restraint the following steps: does not have a headrest
does not have lower or head restraint and you
attachments or the desired 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
are using a single tether,
seating position does not have route the tether over the
lower anchors, secure the child seatback.
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to the
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
are using a single tether,

raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest or
head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
If the position you are using If the position you are using securely held in place. To check,
does not have a headrest has an adjustable headrest grasp the child restraint at the
or head restraint and you or head restraint and you LATCH path and attempt to
are using a dual tether, are using a dual tether, move it side to side and back
route the tether over the route the tether around the and forth. There should be no
seatback. headrest or head restraint. more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement, for proper
installation.
If the position you are using

has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat) using the safety belt to secure the
When securing a child restraint in a child restraint in this position. Be
{ Warning rear seating position, study the sure to follow the instructions that
instructions that came with the child came with the child restraint. Secure
A crash can damage the LATCH restraint to make sure it is the child in the child restraint when
system in the vehicle. A damaged compatible with this vehicle. and as the instructions say.
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint, If the child restraint has the LATCH If more than one child restraint
system, see Lower Anchors and needs to be installed in the rear
resulting in serious injury or even
Tethers for Children (LATCH seat, be sure to read Where to Put
death in a crash. To help make
System) on page 3-38 for how and the Restraint on page 3-36.
sure the LATCH system is
where to install the child restraint 1. Put the child restraint on
working properly after a crash, using LATCH. If a child restraint is
see your dealer to have the the seat.
secured in the vehicle using a
system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether, 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
necessary replacements made as see Lower Anchors and Tethers for the lap and shoulder portions of
soon as possible. Children (LATCH System) on the vehicle's safety belt through
page 3-38 for top tether anchor or around the restraint. The child
locations. restraint instructions will show
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
you how.
and it was being used during a Do not secure a child seat in a
crash, new LATCH system parts position without a top tether anchor
may be needed. if a national or local law requires
New parts and repairs may be that the top tether be anchored, or if
necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the
system was not being used at the child restraint say that the top strap
time of the crash. must be anchored.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
(Front Passenger Seat)
{ Warning
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat A child in a rear-facing child
tether. See Lower Anchors and is a safer place to secure a restraint can be seriously injured
Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraint. See or killed if the front passenger
System) on page 3-38 for more Where to Put the Restraint on airbag inflates. This is because
information. page 3-36. the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
7. Before placing a child in the In addition, the vehicle may have a the inflating airbag. A child in a
child restraint, make sure it is passenger sensing system which is
forward-facing child restraint can
securely held in place. To check, designed to turn off the front
grasp the child restraint at the be seriously injured or killed if the
outboard passenger frontal airbag
safety belt path and attempt to under certain conditions. See front passenger airbag inflates
move it side to side and back Passenger Sensing System (United and the passenger seat is in a
and forth. When the child States) on page 3-24 and forward position.
restraint is properly installed, Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Even if the passenger sensing
there should be no more than on page 5-13 for more information, system has turned off the front
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. including important safety passenger frontal airbag, no
To remove the child restraint, information. system is fail-safe. No one can
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and Never put a rear-facing child seat in guarantee that an airbag will not
let it return to the stowed position. the front. This is because the risk to deploy under some unusual
If the top tether is attached to a top the rear-facing child is so great, circumstance, even though it is
tether anchor, disconnect it. if the airbag deploys. turned off.
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
secured using a safety belt and it when the vehicle is started. See
Warning (Continued) uses a top tether, see Lower Passenger Airbag Status
Anchors and Tethers for Children Indicator on page 5-13.
Secure rear-facing child restraints (LATCH System) on page 3-38 for
in a rear seat, even if the airbag 2. Put the child restraint on
top tether anchor locations. the seat.
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in Do not secure a child seat in a 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the front seat, always move the position without a top tether anchor the lap and shoulder portions of
front passenger seat as far back if a national or local law requires the vehicle's safety belt through
that the top tether be anchored, or if or around the restraint. The child
as it will go. It is better to secure
the instructions that come with the restraint instructions will show
the child restraint in a rear seat.
child restraint say that the top strap you how.
See Passenger Sensing System must be anchored.
(United States) on page 3-24 for You will be using the lap-shoulder
additional information. belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
If the vehicle does not have a rear that came with the child restraint.
seat that will accommodate a 1. Move the seat as far back as it
rear-facing child restraint, a will go before securing the
rear-facing child restraint should not forward-facing child restraint.
be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off. When the passenger sensing
system, if equipped, has turned
If the child restraint has the LATCH off the front outboard passenger
system, see Lower Anchors and frontal airbag, the off indicator
Tethers for Children (LATCH on the passenger airbag status
System) on page 3-38 for how and indicator should light and stay lit
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
4. Push the latch plate into the 7. If the vehicle does not have a
buckle until it clicks. rear seat and the child restraint
Position the release button on has a top tether, follow the child
the buckle so that the safety belt restraint manufacturer's
could be quickly unbuckled if instructions regarding the use of
necessary. the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3-38 for more information.
8. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
6. To tighten the belt, push down grasp the child restraint at the
on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to
shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back
tighten the lap portion of the belt and forth. When the child
and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed,
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
may be helpful to use your knee
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but Try to pull the belt out of the
not pulled out of the retractor. retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in

the passenger airbag status
indicator, if equipped, will come on
and stay on when the vehicle is
started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint ” under Passenger
Sensing System (United States) on
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
2 NOTES
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Pull down the armrest to access the

cupholders.
Compartments
Storage Compartments Front Storage
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Do not store heavy or sharp
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 objects in storage compartments.
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 In a crash, these objects may
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 cause the cover to open and
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 could result in injury.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Instrument Panel Storage
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
The vehicle has a storage area to
Cargo Management
the left of the steering wheel. Pull
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
down on the handle to access.
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
For vehicles with a storage area
Roof Rack System Glove Box located under the front passenger
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 seat, lift up on the end of the tray
To open the glove box, lift up on the
lever. If the glove box has a lock, and pull it forward to access it.
use the key to lock and unlock it.
Sunglasses Storage
Cupholders This vehicle may have a sunglasses
There are cupholders in the center storage compartment near the
console and in the second row seat rearview mirror. Push the cover
armrest. to open.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
4-2 Storage
Center Console Storage Additional Storage adapters and hooks. These are
used to hold the net and mesh
Features pocket.
Cargo Cover
For vehicles with a cargo cover, use
it to cover items in the rear of the
vehicle.
To remove the cover and remove it
from the vehicle, pull both ends
toward each other. To reinstall,
place each end of the cover in the
holes behind the rear seat.
This vehicle has a center console Cargo Tie-Downs

with an upper and lower storage
area. To access the upper storage Four cargo tie‐downs are located in The adapters are used to hold the
area pull on the latch to lift the the rear compartment of the vehicle. net. Slide the adapters to the
armrest. Slide the cupholder back to The tie-downs can be used to desired location on the upper and
access a larger storage area secure small loads. lower rail and turn the handle up to
underneath. lock it in place. Compress the rods
Cargo Management of the net and insert them into the
corresponding openings of the
System adapter. The longer rod is for the
If the vehicle has a cargo upper adapter.
management system in the rear of
the vehicle, it will have rails with
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Storage 4-3
The hooks hold the mesh pocket. To Roof Rack System

insert a hook on the rail, place the { Caution
hook in the upper groove of the rail
and press it into the lower groove. { Warning Loading cargo on the roof rack
that weighs more than 75 kg
If something is carried on top of (165 lb) or hangs over the rear or
Convenience Net the vehicle that is longer or wider sides of the vehicle may damage
For vehicles with a convenience net, than the roof rack — like paneling, the vehicle. Load cargo so that it
located in the rear, use it to store plywood, or a mattress — the rests evenly between the
small loads as far forward as wind can catch it while the vehicle crossrails, making sure to fasten
possible. The net should not be is being driven. The item being cargo securely.
used to store heavy loads. carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
and damage the vehicle. Never when driving, check to make sure
carry something longer or wider crossrails and cargo are securely
than the roof rack on top of the fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
vehicle unless using a GM rack will make the vehicle’s center
certified accessory carrier. of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
If equipped with a roof rack it can be braking, or abrupt maneuvers;
used to load items. For roof racks otherwise it may result in loss of
that do not have crossrails included, control. If driving for a long distance,
GM Certified crossrails can be on rough roads, or at high speeds,
purchased as an accessory. See occasionally stop the vehicle to
your dealer for additional make sure the cargo remains in its
information. place.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
4-4 Storage
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle

capacity when loading the vehicle.
For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9-10.
Check that all cargo is securely
fastened to prevent damage or loss
while driving.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Low Washer Fluid Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Controls Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13
Malfunction
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . .
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
5-23
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Controls Service Vehicle Soon
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Information Displays
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Driver Information
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Electric Parking Brake Vehicle Messages
Rear Window Wiper/ Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Brake System Messages . . . . 5-29
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 All-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-19 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-30
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Power Steering Warning Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Engine Cooling System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-19 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Indicators Traction Control System Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-31
Warning Lights, Gauges, and (TCS) Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-20 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-32
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Engine Coolant Temperature Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-32
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-32
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Object Detection System
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Ride Control System
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Reduced Engine Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-34
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-34
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Controls 4. Pull the lever up to lock the

Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-35 steering wheel in place.
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Adjustment
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-36 Steering Wheel Controls
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-42
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pull For vehicles with audio steering
the lever down. wheel controls, some audio controls
2. Move the steering wheel up can be adjusted at the steering
or down. wheel.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel + / − (Next/Previous): Press and
closer or away from you. release to go to the next or the
previous preset radio station or CD
track.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/15/13
J / 0 (Call/Mute): For vehicles with Windshield Wiper/Washer 3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):

Bluetooth® and OnStar®, press and Sets a delay between wipes. Move
hold to interact with those systems. the switch on top of the lever left for
See Bluetooth on page 7-24 or less frequent wipes or right for more
“OnStar,” if equipped. Press and frequent wipes.
release to mute the system. Press it a (Low): Slow wipes.
again to turn the sound back on.
1 (High): Fast wipes.
K (End Call): Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call. Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
v + or v − (Volume): Move the to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thumbwheel up or down to increase thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
or to decrease the volume. should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 10-25.
Horn Heavy snow or ice can overload the
The windshield wiper lever is on the
Press a on the steering wheel pad right side of the steering column. wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
to sound the horn. stop the motor until it cools down.
Move the lever up or down to select
the wiper speed. Rainsense™
8 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly move
the lever down. The lever returns to { Caution
its starting position when released.
For several wipes, hold the Going through an automatic car
lever down. wash with the wipers on can
damage them. Turn the wipers off
9 (Off): Turns the windshield when going through an automatic
wipers off.
car wash.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If equipped with Rainsense™ The wipers can be left in a = (Rear Wiper/Washer): Press to
windshield wipers, the moisture Rainsense mode even when it is not wash and wipe the rear window.
sensor is next to the inside rearview raining.
mirror and is mounted on the The rear window washer uses the
windshield. When active, these Windshield Washer same reservoir as the windshield
sensors are able to detect moisture washer. Check the windshield
on the windshield and automatically { Warning washer reservoir level if the front
windshield can be worked, but no
turn on the wipers.
In freezing weather, do not use fluid is sprayed when the rear
To turn on the Rainsense feature, the washer until the windshield is washer is activated. See Washer
the wipers must be set to one of the warmed. Otherwise the washer Fluid on page 10-20.
five delay settings on the lever.
Each of the five settings adjusts the
fluid can form ice on the 5 (Delay): Press to turn the
windshield, blocking your vision. delayed wiping on or off.
sensitivity of the sensor.
Since different drivers have different Compass
setting preferences, it is Pull the windshield wiper lever to
recommended that the mid-range spray windshield washer fluid and The vehicle may have a compass in
setting (position 3) be used initially. activate the wipers. The wipers will the Driver Information Center (DIC).
For more wipes, select the higher continue until the lever is released
or the maximum wash time is Compass Zone
settings; for fewer wipes, select the
lower settings located closer to the reached. The zone is set to Zone 8 upon
off position on the lever. leaving the factory. Your dealer will
Rear Window Wiper/ set the correct zone for your
The sensor automatically controls
the frequency of the wipes from the Washer location.
off setting to the high speed setting The rear wiper and rear wash button Under certain circumstances, such
according to the weather conditions. is on the instrument panel above the as during a long distance
climate control system. cross-country trip or moving to a
new state or province, it will be
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
necessary to compensate for 5. If calibration is necessary,

compass variance by resetting the calibrate the compass. See
zone through the DIC if the zone is “Compass Calibration
not set correctly. Procedure” following.
Compass variance is the difference Compass Calibration
between the earth's magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the The compass can be manually
compass is not set to the zone calibrated. Only calibrate the
where you live, the compass may compass in a magnetically clean
give false readings. The compass and safe location, such as an open
must be set to the variance zone in parking lot, where driving the
which the vehicle is traveling. vehicle in circles is not a danger.
It is suggested to calibrate away
To adjust for compass variance, use 2. Find the vehicle's current from tall buildings, utility wires,
the following procedure: location and variance zone manhole covers, or other industrial
number on the map. structures, if possible.
Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure Zones 1 through 15 are If CAL should ever appear in the
available. DIC display, the compass should be
1. Do not set the compass zone
when the vehicle is moving. Only 3. Press and hold the set/reset calibrated.
set it when the vehicle is in button to scroll through and If the DIC display does not show a
P (Park). select the appropriate heading, for example, N for North,
variance zone. or the heading does not change
Press the vehicle information
4. Press the trip/fuel button until after making turns, there may be a
button until PRESS V TO SET the vehicle heading, for strong magnetic field interfering with
COMPASS ZONE: ## displays. example, N for North, is the compass. Such interference
displayed in the DIC. may be caused by a magnetic CB or
cell phone antenna mount, a
magnetic emergency light, magnetic
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
note pad holder, or any other 4. The DIC will display 4. To increase the time or date do
magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, CALIBRATING COMPASS: one of the following:
move the magnetic item, then turn TURN IN CIRCLES. Drive the . Press the softkey below the
on the vehicle and calibrate the vehicle in tight circles at less selected tab.
compass. than 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete
To calibrate the compass, use the the calibration. The DIC will . Press ¨ SEEK, or \ FWD.
following procedure: display COMPASS
CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a . Turn f clockwise.
Compass Calibration Procedure few seconds when the 5. To decrease the time or date do
1. Before calibrating the compass, calibration is complete. The DIC one of the following:
make sure the compass is set to display will then return to the
the variance zone in which the previous menu. . Press © SEEK or s REV.
vehicle is located. See . Turn f counterclockwise.
“Compass Variance (Zone) Clock
Procedure” earlier in this The date does not automatically
To set the time and date:
section. display. To see the date press H
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ while the radio is on. The date with
Do not operate any switches ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
such as window, sunroof, display times out after a few
Press O to turn the radio on. seconds and goes back to the
climate controls, seats, etc.
normal radio and time display.
during the calibration procedure. 2. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD,
2. Press the vehicle information and YYYY (hour, minute, month,
button until PRESS V TO day, and year) display.
CALIBRATE COMPASS 3. Press the softkey below any one
displays. of the tabs to be changed.
3. Press the set/reset button to
start the compass calibration.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
To change the time default setting The power outlet located in the rear
from 12 hour to 24 hour or to cargo area is powered at all times. { Caution
change the date default setting from Remove the cover to access and
month/day/year to day/month/year: Hanging heavy equipment from
replace when not in use. the power outlet can cause
1. Press H and then the softkey damage not covered by the
below the forward arrow label to { Caution vehicle warranty. The power
select the time 12H and 24H, outlets are designed for
and the date MM/DD/YYYY Leaving electrical equipment accessory power plugs only, such
(month, day, and year) and DD/ plugged in for an extended period as cell phone charge cords.
MM/YYYY (day, month, and of time while the vehicle is off will
year) display. drain the battery. Always unplug
2. Press the softkey below the electrical equipment when not in
desired option. use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum
3. Press H again to apply the 20 amp rating.
selected default, or let the
screen time out.
Certain electrical accessories may
not be compatible with the
Power Outlets accessory power outlet and could
The accessory power outlets can be overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
used to plug in electrical equipment, If a problem is experienced, see
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. your dealer.
The power outlets are inside the When adding electrical equipment,
center floor console, on the rear of be sure to follow the installation
the center floor console, and in the instructions included with the
rear cargo compartment. equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 9-47.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Warning Lights, Warning lights come on when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
Gauges, and function. Some warning lights come driving, or when one of the gauges
on briefly when the engine is started shows there may be a problem,
Indicators to indicate they are working. check the section that explains what
Warning lights and gauges can Gauges can indicate when there to do. Follow this manual's advice.
signal that something is wrong could be a problem with a vehicle Waiting to do repairs can be costly
before it becomes serious enough function. Often gauges and warning and even dangerous.
to cause an expensive repair or lights work together to indicate a
replacement. Paying attention to the problem with the vehicle.
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Instrument Cluster
English Cluster Shown, Metric Cluster Similar

6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Speedometer right area of the speedometer. Press Fuel Gauge

the reset button to tell how many
The speedometer shows the miles or kilometers have been
vehicle's speed in either kilometers recorded on either Trip A or Trip B
per hour (km/h) or miles per since the trip odometer was last set
hour (mph). back to zero.
Odometer To reset each trip odometer to zero,

press and hold the reset button. The
The odometer shows how far the reset button resets only the trip
vehicle has been driven, in either odometer that is being displayed.
kilometers or miles. Each trip odometer must be reset
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant individually.
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new odometer installed, the new Tachometer Metric
one is set to the mileage of the old The tachometer displays the engine
odometer. If this is not possible, it is speed in revolutions per
set at zero and a label is put on the minute (rpm).
driver door to show the old mileage
reading.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the
number of miles, or kilometers,
traveled for up to two trips.
Cycle between the odometer and
trip odometers A and B by pressing
the reset button located in the lower English
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
When the ignition is on, the fuel took a little more or less than
gauge indicates how much fuel is half the tank's capacity to fill
left in the tank. the tank.
When the indicator nears empty, the . The gauge moves a little while
low fuel light comes on. There is still turning a corner or speeding up.
a little fuel left, but the fuel tank . The gauge takes a few seconds
should be refilled soon. See Low When the vehicle is started this light
to stabilize after the ignition is
Fuel Warning Light on page 5-21 for flashes and a chime may come on
turned on, but it goes back to
more information. to remind the driver to fasten their
empty when the ignition is
safety belt. Then the light stays on
An arrow on the fuel gauge turned off.
solid until the belt is buckled. This
indicates the side of the vehicle the For fuel tank capacity, see cycle may continue several times if
fuel door is on. Capacities and Specifications on the driver remains or becomes
Here are four things that some page 12-2. unbuckled while the vehicle is
owners ask about. None of these moving.
means the fuel gauge is not working Safety Belt Reminders If the driver safety belt is buckled,
properly:
Driver Safety Belt Reminder neither the light nor the chime
. At the service station, the fuel comes on.
pump shuts off before the gauge
Light
reads full. There is a driver safety belt Passenger Safety Belt
reminder light on the instrument Reminder Light
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge cluster. There may be a passenger safety
indicated. For example, the belt reminder light near the
gauge may have indicated the passenger airbag status indicator.
tank was half full, but it actually See Passenger Sensing System
(United States) on page 3-24.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
and/or chime, remove the object

from the seat or buckle the { Warning
safety belt.
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
Airbag Readiness Light comes on while driving, it means
This light shows if there is an the airbag system might not be
For vehicles equipped with the electrical problem with the airbag working properly. The airbags in
passenger safety belt warning light, system. The system check includes the vehicle might not inflate in a
when the vehicle is started this light the airbag sensor(s), passenger
flashes and a chime may come on crash, or they could even inflate
sensing system, the pretensioners, without a crash. To help avoid
to remind passengers to fasten their the airbag modules, the wiring, and
safety belt. Then the light stays on injury, have the vehicle serviced
the crash sensing and diagnostic right away.
solid until the belt is buckled. This module. For more information on the
cycle continues several times if the airbag system, see Airbag System
passenger remains or becomes on page 3-17. If there is a problem with the airbag
unbuckled while the vehicle is system, a Driver Information Center
moving. (DIC) message may also come on.
If the passenger safety belt is See Airbag System Messages on
buckled, neither the chime nor the page 5-34.
light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such The airbag readiness light comes on
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery for several seconds when the
bag, laptop, or other electronic vehicle is started. If the light does
device. To turn off the warning light not come on then, have it fixed
immediately.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Passenger Airbag Status If the word ON is lit on the

Warning (Continued)
passenger airbag status indicator, it
Indicator means that the front outboard
The vehicle has the passenger passenger frontal airbag is allowed Light on page 5-12 for more
sensing system. See Passenger to inflate. information, including important
Sensing System (United States) on safety information.
If the word OFF is lit on the airbag
page 3-24 for important safety status indicator, it means that the
information. The instrument panel passenger sensing system has Charging System Light
has a passenger airbag status turned off the front outboard
indicator. passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service. The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator { Warning on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
will light the words ON and OFF, for
If the airbag readiness light ever The light turns off when the engine
several seconds as a system check.
comes on and stays on, it means is started. If it does not, have the
Then, after several more seconds,
that something may be wrong vehicle serviced by your dealer.
the status indicator will light either
the word ON or the word OFF, to let with the airbag system. To help If the light stays on, or comes on
you know the status of the front avoid injury to yourself or others, while driving, there could be a
outboard passenger frontal airbag. have the vehicle serviced right problem with the electrical charging
away. See Airbag Readiness
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
system. Have it checked by your

dealer. Driving while this light is on Caution (Continued)
could drain the battery.
the vehicle fuel economy might
If a short distance must be driven not be as good, and the engine
with the light on, be sure to turn off might not run as smoothly. This
all accessories, such as the radio could lead to costly repairs that
and air conditioner. If the malfunction indicator lamp
might not be covered by the
comes on while the engine is
vehicle warranty.
Malfunction running, this indicates that the OBD
II system has detected a problem
Indicator Lamp and diagnosis and service might be
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
required. { Caution
Malfunctions often are indicated by
Generation) monitors the operation the system before any problem is Modifications made to the engine,
of the vehicle to ensure emissions apparent. Being aware of the light transmission, exhaust, intake,
are at acceptable levels, helping to can prevent more serious damage or fuel system of the vehicle or
maintain a clean environment. The to the vehicle. This system also the replacement of the original
malfunction indicator lamp comes assists the service technician in tires with other than those of the
on when the vehicle is placed in correctly diagnosing any same Tire Performance Criteria
ON/RUN, as a check to show it is malfunction. (TPC) can affect the vehicle's
working. If it does not, have the emission controls and can cause
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
Ignition Positions on page 9-15. { Caution this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems
If the vehicle is continually driven could lead to costly repairs not
with this light on, the emission covered by the vehicle warranty.
controls might not work as well, This could also result in a failure
(Continued) (Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If the light continues to flash, find a

. Check that good quality fuel is
Caution (Continued) safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
to pass a required Emission least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may
Inspection/Maintenance test. See engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up,
Accessories and Modifications on follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is
page 10-2. your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring,
possible. hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
This light comes on during a Light On Steady: An emission These conditions might go away
malfunction in one of two ways: control system malfunction has once the engine is warmed up.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
has been detected. A misfire
required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
increases vehicle emissions and
It may require at least one full tank
could damage the emission control The following may correct an of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis emission control system
and service might be required. malfunction: See Recommended Fuel on
page 9-36.
To prevent more serious damage to . Check that the fuel cap is fully
the vehicle: installed. See Filling the Tank on If none of the above have made the
. page 9-38. The diagnostic light turn off, your dealer can check
Reduce vehicle speed.
system can determine if the fuel the vehicle. The dealer has the
. Avoid hard accelerations. cap has been left off or proper test equipment and
. Avoid steep uphill grades. improperly installed. A loose or diagnostic tools to fix any
missing fuel cap allows fuel to mechanical or electrical problems
. If towing a trailer, reduce the that might have developed.
evaporate into the atmosphere.
amount of cargo being hauled as
A few driving trips with the cap
soon as it is possible.
properly installed should turn the
light off.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Emissions Inspection and the ignition is turned to ON/RUN Service Vehicle Soon
Maintenance Programs while the engine is off. See your
dealer for assistance in verifying
Light
Depending on where you live, your proper operation of the
vehicle may be required to malfunction indicator lamp.
participate in an emission control
system inspection and maintenance . The OBD II (On-Board
program. For the inspection, the Diagnostics) system determines
emission system test equipment will that critical emission control
likely connect to the vehicle's Data systems have not been
Link Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not The service vehicle soon light
ready for inspection. This can comes on if a condition exists that
happen if the 12-volt battery has may require the vehicle to be taken
recently been replaced or run in for service.
down. The diagnostic system is If the light comes on, take the
designed to evaluate critical vehicle to your dealer for service as
emission control systems during soon as possible.
normal driving. This can take
The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving. Brake System Warning
panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the
wheel. See your dealer if assistance vehicle still does not pass the
Light
is needed. inspection for lack of OBD II The vehicle brake system consists
The vehicle may not pass system readiness, your dealer of two hydraulic circuits. If one
inspection if: can prepare the vehicle for circuit is not working, the remaining
inspection. circuit can still work to stop the
. The malfunction indicator lamp is vehicle. For normal braking
on with the engine running, or if performance, both circuits need to
the light does not come on when be working
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Electric Parking Brake

{ Warning Light
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Metric English Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
The brake indicator light should crash. If the light is still on after
come on briefly as the engine is the vehicle has been pulled off
started. If it does not come on have the road and carefully stopped, The parking brake status light
the vehicle serviced by your dealer. have the vehicle towed for comes on when the brake is
When the ignition is on, the brake service. applied. If the light continues
system warning light may also come flashing after the parking brake is
on when the parking brake is set. released, or while driving, there is a
If the light comes on while driving, a problem with the EPB system.
The light stays on if the parking chime sounds. Pull off the road and
brake does not fully release. If it A SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
stop. The pedal might be harder to message may also display in the
stays on after the parking brake is push or go closer to the floor.
fully released, there is a brake Driver Information Center (DIC).
It might also take longer to stop. See Brake System Messages on
problem. Have the brake system If the light is still on, have the
inspected immediately. page 5-29 for more information.
vehicle towed for service. See
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-70. If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your dealer.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Antilock Brake System If the ABS warning light remains on

after resetting the system or comes
(ABS) Warning Light on again while driving, the vehicle
needs service. If the ABS warning
light is on, but the regular brake
system warning light is not on, the
The parking brake warning light antilock brakes are not working
should come on briefly when ignition properly, but the regular brakes are
is placed in ON/RUN. If it does not still functioning. Have the vehicle
come on then, have it fixed so it will serviced right away. If both brake
be ready to warn if there is a This light should come on briefly lights are on, the vehicle does not
problem. when the vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it have antilock brakes, and there is a
does not come on, have the vehicle problem with the regular brakes as
If this light comes on, there is a serviced by your dealer. well. Have the vehicle towed for
problem with a system on the service. See Towing the Vehicle on
vehicle that is causing the EPB If the ABS warning light stays on
longer than a few seconds after the page 10-70.
system to work at a reduced level.
The vehicle can still be driven, but vehicle is in ON/RUN, or comes on
should be taken to a dealer as soon and stays on while driving, try
as possible. See Parking Brake on resetting the system. To reset the
page 9-26. system:
1. While driving, pull over when it is
safe to do so.
2. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
3. Turn the vehicle off.
4. Restart the vehicle.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
All-Wheel-Drive Light This light comes on when the StabiliTrak® Indicator

compact spare tire is installed. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 10-65
Light
for more information.
Power Steering Warning

Light
For vehicles with the
All-Wheel-Drive light, it comes on The StabiliTrak light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned to briefly as the engine is started. If it
ON/RUN. does not come on, have the vehicle
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
serviced by your dealer. If the This light flashes while the
system is working normally, the This light comes on briefly when the
StabiliTrak system or the Traction
indicator light then goes off. ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a
Control System (TCS) is working.
check to show it is working.
This light comes on when there is a The light comes on when there is a
malfunction in the All-Wheel-Drive If it does not come on have the problem with the StabiliTrak system.
(AWD) system. vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Traction Control/Electronic
If this light stays on, or comes on Stability Control on page 9-28.
This light flashes when the AWD
system is temporarily disabled. while driving, the system may not be
working. If this happens, see your
For more information see All-Wheel dealer for service.
Drive on page 9-25.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Traction Control System Engine Coolant

(TCS) Warning Light Temperature Warning
{ Caution
Light The engine coolant temperature
warning light indicates that the
vehicle has overheated. Driving
with this light on can damage the
engine and it may not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. See
Engine Overheating on
This light comes on briefly as the page 10-18.
engine is started. If it does not come This light comes on briefly while
on, have the vehicle serviced by starting the vehicle. The engine coolant temperature
your dealer.
If it does not, have the vehicle warning light comes on when the
It also comes on when the Traction serviced by the dealer. If the system engine has overheated.
Control System (TCS) has been is working normally the indicator If this happens, pull over and turn
turned off. See Traction Control/ light goes off. off the engine as soon as possible.
Electronic Stability Control on
See Engine Overheating on
page 9-28.
page 10-18.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and Low Fuel Warning Light
Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Operation on page 10-47. The low fuel warning light comes on
Monitor System (TPMS), this light briefly when the vehicle is started.
comes on briefly when the engine is Fuel Economy Light This light also comes on when the
started. It provides information fuel level is low. When fuel is added,
about tire pressures and the TPMS. the light should go off. If it does not,
When the Light Is On Steady have the vehicle serviced.
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly Security Light
underinflated.
A Driver Information Center (DIC) For vehicles with the fuel economy
tire pressure message may also mode, this light comes on when the
display. See Tire Messages on eco (economy) button, located on
page 5-34. Stop as soon as the center console near the shift
possible, and inflate the tires to the lever, is pressed. Press the button
pressure value shown on the Tire again to turn off the light and exit
and Loading Information label. See the fuel economy mode. The security light should come on
Tire Pressure on page 10-44. briefly as the engine is started. If the
See Fuel Economy Mode on system is working normally, the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
indicator light turns off. If it does not Reduced Engine Power High-Beam On Light
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
Light
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system.
This light is also used to indicate the
status of the anti-theft alarm system The high-beam on light comes on
when the ignition is turned off. The The reduced engine power light when the high-beam headlamps are
light will flash rapidly if the alarm should come on briefly as the in use.
system is arming and one or more engine is started. If it does not come See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
of the monitored entry points is not on, have the vehicle serviced by Changer on page 6-2 for more
closed. The light will stay on if the your dealer. information.
alarm is arming and all entry points
are closed. This light, along with the malfunction
indicator lamp, displays when a Front Fog Lamp Light
For information regarding this light noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
and the vehicle's security system, performance occurs.
see Vehicle Alarm System on
page 2-9. The vehicle can be driven at a
reduced speed when the reduced
engine power light is on but
acceleration and speed might be
reduced. If this light stays on, see
your dealer as soon as possible for The fog lamp light comes on when
diagnosis and repair. the fog lamps are in use.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
The light goes out when the fog Cruise Control Light Gate Ajar Light
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6-4 for more
information.
Low Washer Fluid

Warning Light
This light comes on when the cruise If the gate ajar light comes on, the
control is set. liftgate is not completely closed.
This light goes out when the cruise Driving with the liftgate open can
control is canceled. See Cruise cause carbon monoxide (CO) to
Control on page 9-30. enter the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 9-20
The low washer fluid warning light
comes on when the windshield Door Ajar Light for more information.
washer fluid is low. See Washer
Fluid on page 10-20 for more
information.
This light comes on when a door is

open or not securely latched. Before
driving, check that all doors are
properly closed.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Information Displays vehicle serviced by your dealer.

If an abnormal temperature reading
The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization, and set/
is displayed for an extended period reset buttons. The button functions
Driver Information of time, consult your dealer. Under are detailed in the following pages.
Center (DIC) certain circumstances, especially 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
when the engine is idling, a delay in to display the odometer, trip
The vehicle has a Driver Information
updating the temperature display is odometer, fuel range, average
Center (DIC).
normal. economy, fuel used, and elapsed
All information appears in the DIC
See Compass on page 5-4 and time. Some vehicles also display
display in the instrument cluster.
Automatic Transmission on instantaneous economy. The
The DIC comes on when the ignition page 9-21. compass and outside temperature
is on. After a short delay, the DIC will also be shown in the display.
The DIC has different displays
displays the information that was The temperature will be shown in °C
which can be accessed by pressing
last displayed before the engine or °F depending on the units
the DIC buttons on the instrument
was turned off. selected.
panel, below the exterior lamps
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and control. T (Vehicle Information): Press
vehicle system information, and this button to display the oil life, rear
warning messages if a system DIC Buttons park assist, units, tire pressure
problem is detected. readings and tire pressure sensor
The DIC also displays the compass learning for vehicles with the Tire
direction, outside air temperature, Pressure Monitor System (TPMS),
and shift position indicator at the top compass zone setting, compass
of the DIC display. If there is a recalibration on vehicles with this
problem with the system that feature, coolant temperature, and
controls the temperature display, the battery voltage.
numbers will be replaced with
dashes. If this occurs, have the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
U (Customization): Press this Trip Odometer The fuel range estimate is based on
button to customize the feature an average of the vehicle's fuel
Press 3 until TRIP A or TRIP B economy over recent driving history
settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle
displays. This display shows the and the amount of fuel remaining in
Personalization on page 5-36 for
current distance traveled in either the fuel tank. This estimate will
more information.
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since change if driving conditions change.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to the last reset for the trip odometer. For example, if driving in traffic and
set or reset certain functions and to Pressing the trip odometer reset making frequent stops, this display
turn off or acknowledge messages stem will also display the trip may read one number, but if the
on the DIC. odometer. vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
Trip/Fuel Menu Items Each trip odometer can be reset to number may change even though
zero separately by pressing V while the same amount of fuel is in the
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button fuel tank. This is because different
to scroll through the following menu the trip odometer is displayed. You
can also reset the trip odometer driving conditions produce different
items: fuel economies. Generally, freeway
while it is displayed by pressing and
Odometer holding the trip odometer driving produces better fuel
economy than city driving. Fuel
reset stem.
Press 3 until ODOMETER range cannot be reset.
displays. This display shows the Fuel Range If the vehicle is low on fuel, the
distance the vehicle has been FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be
driven in either kilometers (km) or Press 3 until RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
miles (mi). Pressing the trip under Fuel System Messages on
odometer reset stem will also number of remaining kilometers (km)
or miles (mi) the vehicle can be page 5-32.
display the odometer.
driven without refueling. This display
To switch between metric and will show LOW if the fuel level
English measurements, see “Units” is low.
later in this section.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Average Fuel Economy To start the timer, press the set/ instantaneous fuel economy in liters
reset button while ELAPSED TIME per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or
Press 3 until AVERAGE FUEL is displayed. The display will show miles per gallon (mpg). Unlike
ECONOMY displays. This display the amount of time that has passed average fuel economy, this display
shows the approximate average since the timer was last reset, not cannot be reset.
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) including time the ignition is off.
or kilometers per liter (km/L) or Time will continue to be counted as Blank Display
miles per gallon (mpg). This number long as the ignition is on, even if This display shows no information.
is calculated based on the number another display is being shown on
of L/100 km (km/L) (mpg) recorded the DIC. The timer will record up to Vehicle Information Menu
since the last time this menu item 99 hours, 59 minutes and Items
was reset. To reset the AVERAGE
FUEL ECONOMY, press and hold
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which T (Vehicle Information): Press
the display will return to zero. this button to scroll through the
V. The display will show zero. following menu items:
To stop the timer, press V briefly
Fuel Used while ELAPSED TIME is displayed. Oil Life
Press 3 until FUEL USED To reset the timer to zero, press and Press T until OIL LIFE
displays. This display shows the hold V while ELAPSED TIME is REMAINING displays. This display
number of liters (L) or gallons (gal) displayed. shows an estimate of the oil's
of fuel used since the last reset of
remaining useful life. If you see
this menu item. To reset the fuel Instantaneous Fuel Economy 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the
used information, press and hold V If the vehicle has this display, press display, that means 99% of the
while FUEL USED is displayed. 3 until INSTANT FUEL current oil life remains. The engine
Elapsed Time ECONOMY displays. This display oil life system will alert you to
shows the current fuel economy at a change the oil on a schedule
Press 3 until ELAPSED TIME particular moment and will change consistent with the driving
displays. This display can be used frequently as driving conditions conditions.
as a timer. change. This display shows the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
When the remaining oil life is low, in this display, press V to select Coolant Temperature
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON between ON or OFF. The URPA
message will appear on the display. Press T until the coolant
system automatically turns back on temperature is displayed. The
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” after each vehicle start. When the
under Engine Oil Messages on temperature will be shown in °C or °
URPA system is turned off and the F depending on the units selected.
page 5-31. You should change the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the
oil as soon as you can. See Engine DIC will display the PARK ASSIST If the coolant temperature display
Oil on page 10-8. In addition to the OFF message as a reminder that shows dashes instead of a value,
engine oil life system monitoring the the system has been turned off. See there may be a problem with the
oil life, additional maintenance is Object Detection System Messages vehicle. If this happens often, see
recommended in the Maintenance on page 5-33 and Ultrasonic your dealer for service.
Schedule in this manual. See Parking Assist on page 9-32 for
Maintenance Schedule on Battery Voltage
more information.
page 11-2 for more information. Press T until the battery voltage is
Whenever the oil is changed, the Oil Units
displayed.
Life System will need to be reset. To
Press T until UNITS displays. This If the battery voltage display shows
reset the system through the DIC,
display allows you to select between dashes instead of a value, there
press and hold V while this display metric or English units of
is shown. When the system is reset, may be a problem with the vehicle.
measurement. Once in this display, If this happens often, see your
the display will show 100% OIL LIFE
press V to select between METRIC dealer for service.
REMAINING.
or ENGLISH units. All of the vehicle
Park Assist Tire Pressure
information will then be displayed in
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic the unit of measurement selected. If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, Monitor System (TPMS), the
pressure for each tire can be viewed
press T until PARK ASSIST in the DIC. The tire pressure will be
displays. This display allows the shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or
system to be turned on or off. Once pounds per square inch (psi). Press
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
T until the DIC displays FRONT Compass Zone Setting Vehicle Messages
TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ## This display allows for setting the
Messages are displayed on the DIC
RIGHT ##. Press T again until the compass zone. See Compass on
to notify the driver that the status of
DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa page 5-4 for more information.
the vehicle has changed and that
(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. some action may be needed by the
Compass Recalibration
If a low or high tire pressure driver to correct the condition.
This display allows for calibrating
condition is detected by the system Multiple messages may appear one
the compass. See Compass on
while driving, a message advising after another.
you to check the pressure in a Some messages may not require
specific tire will appear in the Blank Display immediate action, but you can press
display. See Tire Pressure on This display shows no information. any of the DIC buttons, or the trip
page 10-44 and Tire Messages on odometer reset stem on the
page 5-34 for more information. instrument cluster, to acknowledge
If the tire pressure display shows that you received the messages and
dashes instead of a value, there to clear them from the display.
may be a problem with the vehicle. Some messages cannot be cleared
If this consistently occurs, see your from the DIC display because they
dealer for service. are more urgent. These messages
For information on relearning tire require action before they can be
positions see “TPMS Sensor cleared. Take any messages that
Matching Process” under Tire appear on the display seriously and
Pressure Monitor Operation on remember that clearing the
page 10-47. messages will only make the
messages disappear, not correct the
problem.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
You will find the possible messages pulled while the vehicle is moving. parking brake without first pressing
that can be displayed and some See Parking Brake on page 9-26 for the brake pedal. See Parking Brake
information about them grouped by more information. on page 9-26 for more information.
subject in the following information.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM Compass Messages
Brake System Messages This message displays along with
the brake system warning light if CALIBRATING COMPASS:
PARK BRAKE RELEASED there is a problem with the brake TURN IN CIRCLES
For vehicles with the Electric system or when the brake fluid level This message displays when
Parking Brake, this message is low. See Brake System Warning calibrating the compass. Drive the
displays when the parking brake Light on page 5-16. Have the brake vehicle in circles at less than
has been released from the set system serviced by your dealer as 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the
position. See Parking Brake on soon as possible. calibration. See Compass on
page 9-26 for more information. SERVICE PARKING BRAKE page 5-4.
PARK BRAKE SET For vehicles with the Electric COMPASS CALIBRATION
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this message COMPLETE
Parking Brake, this message displays if a problem is detected This message displays when the
displays when the parking brake with the electric parking brake compass calibration is complete.
has been applied to the set position. system. See Parking Brake on See Compass on page 5-4.
See Parking Brake on page 9-26 for page 9-26 for more information.
more information. STEP ON BRAKE TO
RELEASE PARK BRAKE RELEASE PARK BRAKE
SWITCH For vehicles with the Electric
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this message
Parking Brake, this message displays if you try to release the
displays if the Park Brake switch is
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Cruise Control Messages This message continues to display Engine Cooling System
for two seconds if it has not been
CRUISE SET TO XXX acknowledged when the engine is
Messages
This message will display when the turned off. The message comes ENGINE HOT A/C (Air
cruise control is set and it will show back on for two seconds if it has Conditioning) OFF
the speed it was set to. See Cruise been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the This message displays when the
Control on page 9-30 for more engine coolant becomes hotter than
information. engine is turned off. If the condition
still exists, the message reappears the normal operating temperature.
when the engine is turned on. To avoid added strain on a hot
Door Ajar Messages engine, the air conditioning
LIFTGATE OPEN compressor is automatically turned
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message will display when the off. When the coolant temperature
This message will display when the liftgate is not closed properly. Close returns to normal, the A/C operation
driver door is not closed properly. the liftgate completely. automatically resumes. You can
Close the door completely. continue to drive the vehicle.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
HOOD OPEN ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
This message will display when the ENGINE
If the vehicle has the remote start passenger doors are not closed
feature, this message displays properly. Close the door completely. This message displays when the
along with a chime when the hood is engine coolant temperature is too
not closed properly. Make sure that hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
the hood is closed completely. See idle until it cools down.
Hood on page 10-3. This message
displays while the ignition is in ON/
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and
to clear it from the screen.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP Acknowledging this message will before filling to the recommended
ENGINE not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING level. If the oil is not low and this
display. That must be done at the message remains on, take the
This message displays along with a OIL LIFE screen. See “Oil Life” vehicle to your dealer for service.
continuous chime when the engine under Driver Information Center See Engine Oil on page 10-8.
has overheated. Stop and turn the (DIC) on page 5-24 and Engine Oil
engine off immediately to avoid Life System on page 10-10. OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
severe engine damage. See Engine ENGINE
Overheating on page 10-18. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Engine Oil Messages

This message displays when oil life { Caution
remaining is between one and
five percent and service is required If you drive the vehicle while the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL NOW engine oil pressure is low, severe
for the vehicle. See your dealer. See
This message displays when Engine Oil on page 10-8 and engine damage may occur. Stop
service is urgently required. This Maintenance Schedule on the vehicle as soon as possible.
indicates that the oil life remaining is page 11-2. Do not drive the vehicle until the
less than one percent and the oil cause of the low oil pressure is
cannot work correctly to avoid Acknowledging this message will
not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING corrected. See Engine Oil on
engine wear or damage. See your page 10-8.
dealer. See Engine Oil on page 10-8 display. That must be done at the
and Maintenance Schedule on OIL LIFE screen. See “Oil Life”
page 11-2. under Driver Information Center This message displays when the
(DIC) on page 5-24 and Engine Oil vehicle's engine oil pressure is low.
Life System on page 10-10.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as
ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL engine damage can result from
driving a vehicle with low oil
On some vehicles, this message
displays when the engine oil level
may be too low. Check the oil level
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages
by your dealer as soon as possible
when this message is displayed. FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOB
This message displays when the BATTERY
Engine Power Messages vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel This message displays if a Remote
tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
Gauge on page 5-10 and Filling the battery is low. The battery needs to
This message displays when the Tank on page 9-38 for more be replaced in the transmitter. See
vehicle's engine power is reduced. information. “Battery Replacement” under
Reduced engine power can affect Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. TIGHTEN GAS CAP System Operation on page 2-2.
If this message is on, but there is no This message may display along
reduction in performance, proceed with the malfunction indicator lamp Lamp Messages
to your destination. The on the instrument cluster if the
performance may be reduced the vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened AUTOMATIC LIGHT
next time the vehicle is driven. The properly. See Malfunction Indicator CONTROL ON
vehicle may be driven at a reduced Lamp on page 5-14. Reinstall the
speed while this message is on, but This message displays when the
fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank automatic headlamp system is
maximum acceleration and speed on page 9-38. The diagnostic
may be reduced. Anytime this activated by turning the exterior
system can determine if the fuel cap lamps control to AUTO.
message stays on, the vehicle has been left off or improperly
should be taken to your dealer for installed. A loose or missing fuel AUTOMATIC LIGHT
service as soon as possible. cap allows fuel to evaporate into the CONTROL OFF
atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should This message displays when the
turn this light and message off. automatic headlamp system has
been turned off.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Object Detection System park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist SERVICE TRACTION
on page 9-32. See your dealer for CONTROL
Messages service.
This message displays when the
PARK ASST (Assist) Traction Control System (TCS) is
BLOCKED SEE OWNERS Ride Control System not functioning properly. A warning
MANUAL Messages light also appears on the instrument
This message displays if there is cluster. See Traction Control/
SERVICE STABILITRAK Electronic Stability Control on
something interfering with the park
assist system. See Ultrasonic This message displays if there is a page 9-28. Have the TCS serviced
Parking Assist on page 9-32. problem with the StabiliTrak® by your dealer as soon as possible.
system. A warning light also
PARK ASSIST OFF appears on the instrument cluster. STABILITRAK OFF
After the vehicle has been started, See Traction Control/Electronic If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
this message displays to remind the Stability Control on page 9-28. message displays when you turn off
driver that the URPA system has If this message turns on while you the StabiliTrak, or when the stability
been turned off. Press the set/reset are driving, pull off the road as soon control has been automatically
button or the trip odometer reset as possible and stop carefully. Try disabled. To limit wheel spin and
stem to acknowledge this message resetting the system by turning the realize the full benefits of the
and clear it from the DIC display. ignition off and then back on. If this stability enhancement system, you
For more information see Ultrasonic message still stays on or turns back should normally leave StabiliTrak
Parking Assist on page 9-32. on again while you are driving, the on. However, you should turn
vehicle needs service. Have the StabiliTrak off if the vehicle gets
SERVICE PARK ASSIST system inspected by your dealer as stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow
This message displays if there is a soon as possible. and you want to rock the vehicle to
problem with the Ultrasonic Rear attempt to free it, or if you are
Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do driving in extreme off-road
not use this system to help you conditions and require more wheel
spin.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on TRACTION CONTROL ON SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

page 9-9. To turn the StabiliTrak
This message displays when the This message displays when a
system on or off, see Traction
Traction Control System (TCS) turns non-emissions-related malfunction
Control/Electronic Stability Control
on. See Traction Control/Electronic occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
on page 9-28.
Stability Control on page 9-28 for by your dealer as soon as possible.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF more information.
This message displays when the Tire Messages
Traction Control System (TCS) turns Airbag System Messages
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
off. See Traction Control/Electronic SERVICE AIR BAG
Stability Control on page 9-28. On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
This message displays when there Monitor System (TPMS), this
This message only displays while is a problem with the airbag system. message displays when the
the ignition is in ON/RUN and Have the vehicle serviced by your pressure in one or more of the
disappears after 10 seconds, unless dealer immediately. See Airbag vehicle's tires needs to be checked.
it is acknowledged or an urgent Readiness Light on page 5-12 for This message also displays LEFT
warning appears. more information. FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
Any of the following conditions may REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
cause the TCS to turn off: Service Vehicle Messages which tire needs to be checked. You
.
can receive more than one tire
The TCS is turned off by SERVICE A/C (Air pressure message at a time. To
pressing the TCS/StabiliTrak Conditioning) SYSTEM read the other messages that may
button. See Traction Control/
This message displays when there have been sent at the same time,
Electronic Stability Control on
is a problem detected in the air press the set/reset button. If a tire
page 9-28.
conditioning system. Have the pressure message appears on the
. The battery is low. vehicle serviced by your dealer. DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
. There is a TCS failure. See your the tire pressures checked and set
dealer for service. to those shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
See Tires on page 10-37, Vehicle TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

Load Limits on page 9-10, and Tire Caution (Continued)
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Pressure on page 10-44. The DIC
Monitor System (TPMS), this automatic transmission fluid listed
also shows the tire pressure values.
message displays when the TPMS in Recommended Fluids and
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
is re-learning the tire positions on Lubricants on page 11-12.
on page 5-24. If the tire pressure is
the vehicle. The tire positions must
low, the low tire pressure warning
be re-learned after rotating the tires
light comes on. See Tire Pressure This message displays when the life
or after replacing a tire or sensor.
Light on page 5-21. of the transmission fluid has expired
See Tire Rotation on page 10-50,
SERVICE TIRE MONITORING Tire Pressure Monitor System on and it should be changed. See
page 10-46, and Tire Pressure on Maintenance Schedule on
SYSTEM page 11-2 and Recommended
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Fluids and Lubricants on page 11-12
Monitor System (TPMS), this for the proper fluid and change
message displays if a part on the
Transmission Messages intervals.
TPMS is not working properly. The CHANGE TRANSMISSION
tire pressure light also flashes and SERVICE TRANSMISSION
FLUID
then remains on during the same This message displays when there
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure is a problem with the transmission.
Light on page 5-21. Several { Caution See your dealer for service.
conditions may cause this message Use of the incorrect automatic
to appear. See Tire Pressure
transmission fluid may damage
Monitor Operation on page 10-47 for
the vehicle, and the damages
more information. If the warning
comes on and stays on, there may may not be covered by the
be a problem with the TPMS. See vehicle warranty. Always use the
your dealer. (Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Vehicle Reminder Vehicle

ENGINE Messages Personalization
{ Caution ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE The vehicle may have customization
WITH CARE capabilities that allow you to
Do not drive the vehicle while the program certain features to one
This message displays when the
transmission fluid is overheating, preferred setting. Customization
outside air temperature is cold
or the transmission can be enough to create icy road features can only be programmed to
damaged. This could lead to conditions. Adjust your driving one setting on the vehicle and
costly repairs that would not be accordingly. cannot be programmed to a
covered by the warranty. preferred setting for two different
TURN SIGNAL ON drivers.
This message displays along with a This message displays and a chime All of the customization options may
chime if the transmission fluid in the sounds as a reminder to turn off the not be available on the vehicle. Only
vehicle gets hot. Driving with the turn signal if you drive the vehicle the options available will be
transmission fluid temperature high for more than about 1.2 km (0.75 displayed on the DIC.
can cause damage to the vehicle. mile) with a turn signal on. See Turn The default settings for the
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to and Lane-Change Signals on customization features were set
allow the transmission to cool. This page 6-3 for more information. when the vehicle left the factory, but
message clears and the chime may have been changed from their
stops when the fluid temperature default state since then.
reaches a safe level.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
To change customization
preferences, use the following
procedure.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Entering the Feature DISPLAY LANGUAGE AUTO DOOR LOCK

Settings Menu This feature allows you to select the This feature allows you to select
1. Turn the ignition on and place language in which the DIC when the vehicle's doors will
the vehicle in P (Park). messages will appear. automatically lock. See Automatic
Door Locks on page 2-6.
To avoid excessive drain on the Press U until the PRESS V TO
battery, it is recommended that SET DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen Press U until PRESS V TO SET
the headlamps are turned off. appears on the DIC display. Press AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the
2. Press U to scroll through the
V once to access the settings for DIC display. Press V once to
available customizable options. this feature. Then press U to scroll access the settings for this feature.
through the following settings: Then press U to scroll through the
Feature Settings Menu Items ENGLISH (default): All messages following settings:
The following are customization will appear in English. SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
features that allow you to program FRANCAIS: All messages will The doors will automatically lock
settings to the vehicle: appear in French. when the vehicle is shifted out of
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH P (Park).
ESPANOL: All messages will
This feature will only display if a appear in Spanish. AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors
language other than English has will automatically lock when the
PORTUGUESE: All messages will vehicle speed is above 13 km/h
been set. This feature allows you to appear in Portuguese.
change the language in which the (8 mph) for three seconds.
DIC messages appear to English. NO CHANGE: No change will be NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current made to this feature. The current
Press U until the PRESS V TO setting will remain. setting will remain.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen
appears on the DIC display. Press To select a setting, press V while To select a setting, press V while
V once to display all DIC messages the desired setting is displayed on the desired setting is displayed on
in English. the DIC. the DIC.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL DOORS AT KEY OUT: All of Press U until PRESS V TO SET
This feature allows you to select the doors will unlock when the key REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
is taken out of the ignition.
whether or not to turn off the the DIC display. Press V once to
automatic door unlocking feature. ALL DOORS IN PARK (default): access the settings for this feature.
It also allows you to select which All of the doors will unlock when the Then press U to scroll through the
doors and when the doors will vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
following settings:
automatically unlock. See Automatic NO CHANGE: No change will be
Door Locks on page 2-6. VERIFICATION OFF: There will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain. no feedback when you press Q on
Press U until PRESS V TO SET
the RKE transmitter.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on To select a setting, press V while
the DIC display. Press V once to VERIFICATION LIGHTS ONLY:
the desired setting is displayed on
access the settings for this feature. The exterior lamps will flash when
the DIC.
Then press U to scroll through the you press Q on the RKE transmitter.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
following settings: VERIFICATION HORN ONLY: The
This feature allows you to select the horn will sound on the second press
OFF: None of the doors will type of feedback you will receive
automatically unlock. of Q on the RKE transmitter.
when locking the vehicle with the
DRIVER DOOR AT KEY OUT: Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) VERIFICATION HORN & LIGHTS
Only the driver door will unlock transmitter. You will not receive (default): The exterior lamps will
when the key is taken out of the feedback when locking the vehicle flash when you press Q on the RKE
ignition. with the RKE transmitter if the doors transmitter, and the horn will sound
are open. See Remote Keyless
DRIVER DOOR IN PARK: Only the when Q is pressed again within
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
driver door will unlock when the five seconds of the previous
page 2-2.
vehicle is shifted into P (Park). command.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
VERIFICATION NO CHANGE: No Press U until PRESS V TO SET is open, this feature will delay
change will be made to this feature. REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears locking the doors until five seconds
The current setting will remain. after the last door is closed. You will
on the DIC display. Press V once to
hear three chimes to signal that the
To select a setting, press V while access the settings for this feature. delayed locking feature is in use.
the desired setting is displayed on Then press U to scroll through the The key must be out of the ignition
the DIC. following settings: for this feature to work. You can
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK VERIF LIGHTS OFF: The exterior temporarily override delayed locking
lamps will not flash when you press by pressing the power door lock
This feature allows you to select the switch twice or the lock button on
type of feedback you will receive K on the RKE transmitter.
the RKE transmitter twice. See
when unlocking the vehicle with the VERIF LIGHTS ON (default): The Delayed Locking on page 2-6.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) exterior lamps will flash when you
transmitter. You will not receive press K on the RKE transmitter. Press U until PRESS V TO SET
feedback when unlocking the DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if VERIF NO CHANGE: No change
the DIC display. Press V once to
the doors are open. See Remote will be made to this feature. The
access the settings for this feature.
Keyless Entry (RKE) System current setting will remain.
Then press U to scroll through the
Operation on page 2-2. To select a setting, press V while following settings:
the desired setting is displayed on
OFF: There will be no delayed
the DIC.
locking of the vehicle's doors.
DELAY DOOR LOCK ON (default): The doors will not
This feature allows you to select lock until five seconds after the last
whether or not the locking of the door is closed.
vehicle's doors will be delayed. NO CHANGE: No change will be
When locking the doors with the made to this feature. The current
power door lock switch and a door setting will remain.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
To select a setting, press V while NO CHANGE: No change will be ON (default): If it is dark enough
the desired setting is displayed on made to this feature. The current outside, the exterior lamps will turn
the DIC. setting will remain. on briefly when you unlock the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
EXIT LIGHTING To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on The lamps will remain on for
This feature allows you to select the the DIC. 20 seconds or until Q on the RKE
amount of time you want the transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle
exterior lamps to remain on when it APPROACH LIGHTING is no longer off. See Remote
is dark enough outside. This This feature allows you to select Keyless Entry (RKE) System
happens after the key is turned from whether or not to have the exterior Operation on page 2-2.
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. lamps turn on briefly during low light NO CHANGE: No change will be
Press U until PRESS V TO SET periods after unlocking the vehicle made to this feature. The current
EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC using the Remote Keyless Entry setting will remain.
(RKE) transmitter.
display. Press V once to access the
To select a setting, press V while
settings for this feature. Then press Press U until PRESS V TO SET
U to scroll through the following the desired setting is displayed on
APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC.
settings: the DIC display. Press V once to
OFF: The exterior lamps will not access the settings for this feature. CHIME VOLUME
turn on. Then press U to scroll through the This feature allows you to select the
10 SECONDS (default): The following settings: volume level of the chime.
exterior lamps will stay on for OFF: The exterior lamps will not
10 seconds. turn on when you unlock the vehicle
30 SECONDS: The exterior lamps with the RKE transmitter.
will stay on for 30 seconds.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
stay on for two minutes.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Press U until PRESS V TO SET outside of the vehicle using the Press U until PRESS V TO
CHIME VOLUME appears on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RESTORE DEFAULTS appears on
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
DIC display. Press V once to the DIC display. Press V once to
Start on page 2-4.
access the settings for this feature. access the settings for this feature.
Then press U to scroll through the Press U until PRESS V TO SET Then press U to scroll through the
following settings: REMOTE START appears on the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will DIC display. Press V once to RESTORE (default): The
be set to a normal level. access the settings for this feature. customization features will be set to
Then press U to scroll through the their factory default settings.
LOUD: The chime volume will be
set to a loud level. following settings: NO CHANGE: The customization
NO CHANGE: No change will be OFF: The remote start feature will features will not be set to their
made to this feature. The current be disabled. factory default settings.
setting will remain. ON (default): The remote start To select a setting, press V while
There is no default for chime feature will be enabled. the desired setting is displayed on
volume. The volume will stay at the NO CHANGE: No change will be the DIC.
last known setting. made to this feature. The current EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press V while This feature allows you to exit the
the desired setting is displayed on To select a setting, press V while feature settings menu.
the DIC. the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC. Press U until PRESS V TO EXIT
REMOTE START FEATURE SETTINGS appears in
FACTORY SETTINGS
If the vehicle has this feature, it the DIC display. Press V once to
allows you to turn the remote start This feature allows you to set all of exit the menu.
off or on. The remote start feature the customization features back to
allows you to start the engine from their factory default settings.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If you do not exit, pressing U again Universal Remote Do not use the Universal Remote
will return you to the beginning of system with any garage door opener
the feature settings menu. System that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any
See Radio Frequency Statement on
Exiting the Feature garage door opener model
page 13-15.
Settings Menu manufactured before April 1, 1982.
The feature settings menu will be Universal Remote System Read these instructions completely
exited when any of the following before programming the Universal
occurs:
Programming Remote system. It may help to have
another person assist with the
. The vehicle is no longer in
programming process.
ON/RUN.
Keep the original hand-held
. The 3 or T DIC buttons are transmitter for use in other vehicles
pressed. as well as for future programming.
. The end of the feature settings Erase the programming when
menu is reached and exited. vehicle ownership is terminated.
If equipped, these buttons are in the See “Erasing Universal Remote
. A 40-second time period has overhead console. System Buttons” later in this
elapsed with no selection made. section.
This system can replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to To program a garage door opener,
activate devices such as garage park outside directly in line with and
door openers, security systems, and facing the garage door opener
home automation devices. These receiver. Clear all people and
instructions refer to a garage door objects near the garage door.
opener, but can be used for other
devices.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Make sure the hand-held transmitter 2. At the same time, press and programming is complete.
has a new battery for quicker and hold both the hand-held There is no need to
more accurate transmission of the transmitter button and one of the complete Steps 4–6.
radio-frequency signal. three Universal Remote system . If the indicator light does
buttons to be used to operate not come on or the garage
Programming the Universal the garage door. Do not release
Remote System door does not move, a
either button until the indicator second button press may
For questions or help programming light changes from a slow to a be required. For a second
the Universal Remote system, call rapid flash. Then release both time, press and hold the
1-800-355-3515 or see buttons. newly programmed button
www.homelink.com. Some garage door openers may for five seconds. If the light
Programming involves require substitution of Step 2 stays on or the garage door
time-sensitive actions, and may time with the procedure under “Radio moves, programming is
out causing the procedure to be Signals for Canada and Some complete.
repeated. Gate Operators” later in this . If the indicator light blinks
section. rapidly for two seconds,
To program up to three devices:
3. Press and hold the newly then changes to a solid light
1. Hold the end of the hand-held programmed Universal Remote and the garage door does
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to system button for five seconds not move, continue with
3 in) away from the Universal while watching the indicator light programming Steps 4–6.
Remote system buttons with the and garage door activation.
indicator light in view. The
hand-held transmitter was . If the indicator light stays on
supplied by the manufacturer of continuously or the garage
the garage door opener receiver. door moves when the
button is pressed, then
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
flash, press and hold the same enough for the Universal Remote
button a second time for system to pick up the signal during
two seconds, then release it. programming.
Again, if the door does not move If the programming did not work,
or the garage door lamp does replace Step 2 under “Programming
not flash, press and hold the the Universal Remote System” with
same button a third time for the following:
two seconds, then release it.
Press and hold the Universal
The Universal Remote system Remote system button while
Learn or Smart Button
should now activate the pressing and releasing the
4. After completing Steps 1–3, garage door. hand-held transmitter button every
locate the Learn or Smart button
Repeat the process for two seconds until the signal has
inside the garage on the garage
programming the two remaining been successfully accepted by the
door opener receiver. The name
buttons. Universal Remote system. The
and color of the button may vary
Universal Remote system indicator
by manufacturer. Radio Signals for Canada and light will flash slowly at first and then
5. Press and release the Learn or Some Gate Operators rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
Smart button. Step 6 must be For questions or programming help, “Programming the Universal Remote
completed within 30 seconds of call 1-800-355-3515 or see System” to complete.
pressing this button. www.homelink.com.
6. Inside the vehicle, press and Canadian radio-frequency laws and
hold the newly programmed some U.S. gate operators require
Universal Remote system button transmitter signals to time out or quit
for two seconds, then release it. after several seconds of
If the garage door does not transmission. This may not be long
move or the lamp on the garage
door opener receiver does not
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Universal Remote System To erase all programmed buttons on Reprogramming a Single

the Universal Home Remote device: Universal Home Remote
Operation
Button
Using the Universal Home To reprogram any of the three
Remote Universal Home Remote buttons,
Press and hold the appropriate repeat the programming instructions
Universal Home Remote button for earlier in this section, beginning with
at least half of a second. The Step 2.
indicator light will come on while the For help or information on the
signal is being transmitted. 1. Press and hold down the two
Universal Home Remote System,
outside buttons until the
Erasing Universal Home call 1-800-355-3515 or go to
indicator light begins to flash,
Remote Buttons www.homelink.com.
after 20 seconds.
The programmed buttons should be 2. Release both buttons.
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
2 NOTES
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting The current status of the AUTO

system is displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display.
Exterior Lamp Controls See Vehicle Reminder Messages on
Exterior Lighting
page 5-36.
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 parking lamps including all lamps,
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 except the headlamps.
Daytime Running 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 headlamps together with the parking
Automatic Headlamp lamps and instrument panel lights.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 Lamps On Reminder
Turn and Lane-Change A warning chime sounds, if the
The exterior lamp control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 driver door is opened while the
instrument panel to the left of the
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 ignition is off and the lamps are on.
steering wheel.
Interior Lighting Turn the control to the following Wiper-Activated Headlamps
Instrument Panel Illumination positions:
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 The headlamps and parking lamps
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 9 (Off): Turns off the exterior turn on automatically if the exterior
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 lamps. The knob returns to the lamp control is set in the AUTO
AUTO position after it is released. position and the windshield wipers
Lighting Features are turned on and have completed
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 eight wipe cycles.
turns the exterior lamps on and off,
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6
depending on outside lighting.
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
6-2 Lighting
When the ignition is turned off, the Flash-to-Pass When the exterior lamp control is
wiper-activated headlamps turned to the headlamp position, the
immediately turn off. They also turn To flash the high beams, pull the regular headlamps will come on.
off if the windshield wiper control is turn signal lever toward you, and The other lamps that come on with
turned off. release. the headlamps will also come on.
Daytime Running When the headlamps are turned off,

Headlamp High/ the regular lamps also turn off, and
Low-Beam Changer Lamps (DRL) the low-beam headlamps turn on.
2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam On vehicles equipped with DRL, the The regular headlamp system
Changer): Push the turn signal low-beam headlamps come on in should be used when needed.
lever away from you to turn the high daylight when all the following
beams on. conditions are met: Automatic Headlamp
Pull the lever toward you to return to
. The engine is running, System
low beams. . The exterior lamp control is in When it is dark enough outside, the
AUTO, and headlamps come on automatically.
. The light sensor determines it is
daytime.
Fully functional DRL are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
When the DRL are on, the
This indicator light turns on in the low-beam headlamps will be on.
instrument cluster when the The taillamps, sidemarker lamps,
high-beam headlamps are on. instrument panel lights, and other
lamps will not be on.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Lighting 6-3
lamps coming on varies based on Press | again to turn the

wiper speed. When the wipers are flashers off.
not operating, these lamps turn off.
Move the exterior lamp control to9 Turn and Lane-Change
or ; to disable this feature. Signals
Hazard Warning Flashers
Do not cover the light sensor on top

of the instrument panel or the Move the lever all the way up or
headlamps will come on when they down to signal a turn.
are not needed. An arrow on the instrument cluster
The system may also turn on the flashes in the direction of the turn or
headlamps when driving through a lane change.
parking garage or tunnel. Raise or lower the lever until the
Lights On with Wipers arrow starts to flash and then
release, to signal a lane change.
If the windshield wipers are | (Hazard Warning Flasher): The turn signal flashes
activated in daylight with the engine Press this button to make the front automatically three times.
on, and the exterior lamp control is and rear turn signal lamps flash on
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking and off. This warns others that you The lever returns to its starting
lamps, and other exterior lamps are having trouble. position whenever it is released.
come on. The transition time for the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
6-4 Lighting
If after signaling a turn or lane The fog lamp indicator in the Interior Lighting
change the arrow flashes rapidly or instrument panel comes on when
does not come on, a signal bulb the fog lamps are in use.
may be burned out. Instrument Panel
The parking lamps or low-beam
Have any burned out bulbs headlamps must be on, before the
Illumination Control
replaced. If a bulb is not burned out, fog lamps can be turned on. The thumbwheel for this feature is
check the fuse. See Instrument If the exterior lamp control is set to on the left side of the steering wheel
Panel Fuse Block on page 10-34. AUTO mode, the parking lamps and next to the exterior lamp control.
low-beam headlamps come on
Fog Lamps simultaneously when the fog lamps
are turned on.
When the high-beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps turn off
automatically. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog
lamps come on again.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on with
the fog lamps.
For vehicles with fog lamps, the
button is on the instrument panel Turn the thumbwheel to the right or
next to the exterior lamp control. left to brighten or dim the instrument
# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the panel lights.
fog lamps on or off.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Lighting 6-5
Dome Lamps + (On/Off): Press the button (2) to

turn the dome lamps on and off
while the doors are closed.
Reading Lamps
The rear reading lamps are in the

headliner.
To turn the reading lamps on or off,
press the button next to each lamp.
There are front and rear dome

lamps in the overhead console and
the headliner.
* (Dome Lamp Override): Press
the button (1) on the overhead The front reading lamps are in the
console to keep the dome lamps overhead console.
and other interior lamps turned off
while any door is open. Press this
button again to return it to the out
position and the lamps automatically
come on when any door is opened.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
6-6 Lighting
Lighting Features When the battery's state of charge

is low, the voltage is raised slightly
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
to quickly bring the charge back up. by balancing the generator's output
Entry Lighting When the state of charge is high, and the vehicle's electrical needs.
If the dome lamp override button is the voltage is lowered slightly to It can increase engine idle speed to
in the out position, the lamps inside prevent overcharging. The voltage generate more power, whenever
the vehicle automatically come on may move up or down on the needed. It can temporarily reduce
when any door is opened, or when voltmeter gauge or the voltage the power demands of some
K is pressed on the Remote display on vehicles with the Driver accessories. Normally, these actions
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Information Center. This is normal. occur in steps or levels, without
After the door is opened, the lamps If there is a problem, an alert will be being noticeable.
remain on and stay on for displayed.
20 seconds after the doors are The battery can be discharged at Battery Power Protection
closed, or until the key is put into idle if the electrical loads are very The battery saver feature is
the ignition and turned to the ACC/ high. This is true for all vehicles. designed to protect the vehicle's
ACCESSORY position. The lamps This is because the generator battery.
will then gradually dim until they are (alternator) may not be spinning fast
no longer lit. enough at idle to produce all the If any interior or exterior lamp is left
power that is needed for very high on and the ignition is turned off, the
Battery Load electrical loads. battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after
Management A high electrical load occurs when 10 minutes.
The vehicle has Electric Power several of the following are on, such
Management (EPM) that estimates as: headlamps, high beams, fog
the battery's temperature and state lamps, rear window defogger,
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage climate control fan at high speed,
for best performance and extended heated seats, engine cooling fans,
life of the battery. trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Infotainment System 7-1

. Set up the tone, speaker
Infotainment Introduction adjustments, and preset radio
System Infotainment
stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Read the following pages to Driving on page 9-3.
Introduction become familiar with the
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
infotainment system features. { Caution
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
{ Warning Contact your dealer before adding
any equipment.
Taking your eyes off the road for
Radio extended periods could cause a
Adding audio or communication
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 equipment could interfere with the
crash resulting in injury or death
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 operation of the engine, radio,
to you or others. Do not give
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 or other systems, and could
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-10 extended attention to infotainment
damage them. Follow federal
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-10 tasks while driving.
rules covering mobile radio and
Audio Players telephone equipment.
This system provides access to
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
many audio and non-audio listings.
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 The vehicle has Retained
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 To minimize taking your eyes off the Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
road while driving, do the following the infotainment system can play
Phone while the vehicle is parked: even after the ignition is turned off.
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
. Become familiar with the See Retained Accessory Power
operation and controls of the (RAP) on page 9-18 for more
audio system. information.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
7-2 Infotainment System
If the vehicle has a base radio it is Overview

included in this manual. See the
infotainment manual for information
on the connected radios, audio
players, phone, navigation system,
and voice or speech recognition.
There is also information on settings
and downloadable applications (if
equipped).
Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1. 4 (Information) 7. f (Tone) 14. s REV (Reverse)

. Press to show information . Press to set the bass or . Press and hold to go
on the current station or treble. backward fast through a
track. track.
8. H (Clock)
2. FAV (Favorites Pages) 15. \ FWD (Forward)
. Press to set the clock.
. Press to scroll through the . Press and hold to fast
favorite pages. 9. BAND
forward through a track.
3. MENU
. Press to scroll through the
available bands AM, FM, 16. CD/AUX
. Press to open the tone or XM if equipped. . Press to scroll through
menu to adjust the bass, selecting the CD or an
midrange, treble, fade, and 10. © SEEK auxiliary device.
balance. . Seeks the previous
4. Buttons 1 - 6 station.
17. Z EJECT
. Press to eject the
. Save and select favorite 11. ¨ SEEK
stations. loaded CD.
. Seeks the next station.
5. EQ (Equalizer)
12. DVD Slot
. Press to adjust the
equalizer settings. 13. O (Power/Volume)
6. CAT (Category) . Press to turn the
. Press to display a list of XM infotainment system on
categories. or off.
. Turn to adjust the volume.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Operation Setting the Tone (Bass/ than two seconds. A beep sounds
Midrange/Treble) and the level adjusts to the middle
Playing the Radio position.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn or Treble): To adjust bass, To quickly adjust all speaker and
the system on and off. midrange, or treble: tone controls to the middle position,
Turn to increase or decrease the press the f knob for more than
1. Press the f knob until the tone two seconds until a beep sounds.
volume.
control labels display.
4 (Information) (MP3 and RDS EQ (Equalization): Press to select
Features): Press to display 2. Continue pressing the f knob to preset equalization settings.
additional text information related to highlight the desired label,
To return to the manual mode, press
the current FM-RDS, CD, MP3, or press the pushbutton under
the EQ button until Manual displays
or WMA. If information is available the desired label.
or manually adjust the bass,
during FM-RDS, CD, MP3, or WMA 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, midrange, or treble by pressing the
playback, the song title information do one of the following: f knob.
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information . Turn the f knob clockwise Adjusting the Speakers
displays on the bottom line. When or counterclockwise. (Balance/Fade)
information is not available, NO
INFO displays.
. Press the \ FWD, or s BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
REV button. adjust the balance or fade:
If a station's frequency is weak or if 1. Press the f knob until the
there is static, decrease the treble. speaker control labels display.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, 2. Continue pressing the f knob to
or treble to the middle position, highlight the desired label,
press the pushbutton under the or press the pushbutton under
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more the desired label.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
3. To adjust the highlighted setting, Normal and Loud. The selected Radio
do one of the following until the volume level appears on the radio
desired levels are obtained: display.
AM-FM Radio
. Turn the f knob clockwise Removing the radio and not
or counterclockwise. replacing it with a factory radio or Radio Data System (RDS)
chime module will disable vehicle The RDS feature is available for use
. Press the \ FWD, or s chimes. only on FM stations that broadcast
REV button. RDS information. This system relies
Radio Messages
To quickly adjust balance or fade to upon receiving specific information
the middle position, press the Calibration Error: The audio from these stations and only works
pushbutton under the BAL or FADE system has been calibrated for the when the information is available.
label for more than two seconds. vehicle from the factory. While the radio is tuned to an
A beep sounds and the level adjusts If Calibration Error displays, it FM-RDS station, the station name
to the middle position. means that the radio has not been or call letters display. In rare cases,
configured properly for the vehicle a radio station could broadcast
To quickly adjust all speaker and and it must be returned to your incorrect information that causes the
tone controls to the middle position, dealer for service. radio features to work improperly.
press the f knob for more than Locked: This message displays If this happens, contact the radio
two seconds until a beep sounds. when the TheftLock system has station.
Chime Volume locked up the radio. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
Finding a Station
The radio may be used to adjust the BAND: Press to switch between
vehicle's chime level. If the radio If any error occurs repeatedly or if
AM or FM.
can be used to change the volume an error cannot be corrected,
level of the chime, press and hold contact your dealer. f (Tune): Turn to select radio
the sixth FAV pushbutton with the stations.
ignition on and the radio power off. © SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press to go to
The volume level changes between the previous or to the next station.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
To scan stations, press and hold can contain any combination of AM, 3. Select the desired number of
either button for a few seconds until FM, or SiriusXM stations (if favorites pages by pressing the
a beep sounds. The radio goes to a equipped). pushbutton below the displayed
station, plays for a few seconds, The balance/fade and tone settings page numbers.
then goes to the next station. Press that were previously adjusted, are 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time
either button again to stop scanning. stored with the favorite stations. out, to return to the original main
The radio only seeks and scans To store a station as a favorite: radio screen showing the radio
stations with a strong signal that are station frequency labels and to
in the selected band. 1. Tune to a radio station. begin the process of
2. Press FAV to display the page programming favorites for the
Storing a Radio Station as a chosen number of numbered
where to store the station.
Favorite pages.
3. Press and hold one of the
Drivers are encouraged to set up
six pushbuttons until a beep Satellite Radio
their radio station favorites while the
sounds. When that pushbutton is
vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to If equipped with a SiriusXM®
pressed and released, the
favorite stations using the presets, Satellite Radio tuner and a valid
station that was set returns.
favorites button, and steering wheel SiriusXM Satellite subscription can
controls. See Steering Wheel 4. Repeat the steps for each radio
receive SiriusXM programming.
Controls on page 5-2. station to be stored as a favorite.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of To set up the number of favorites SiriusXM Satellite Radio
36 stations can be stored as pages: Service
favorites using the six softkeys 1. Press MENU to display the radio SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
below the radio station frequency setup menu. based in the 48 contiguous United
tabs and by using the radio FAV States and 10 Canadian provinces.
button. Press FAV to go through up 2. Press the pushbutton below the SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide
to six pages of favorites, each FAV 1-6 label. variety of programming and
having six favorite stations available commercial-free music, coast to
per page. Each page of favorites
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
coast, and in digital-quality sound. Finding a Category (CAT)

. Press the pushbutton below
A service fee is required to receive Station the right or left arrows on
the SiriusXM service. For more the display.
information, contact SiriusXM at CAT (Category): The CAT button is
used to find SiriusXM stations when . Press the © SEEK or ¨
www.siriusxm.com or
the radio is in the XM mode. To find SEEK button.
1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
www.xmradio.ca or call SiriusXM channels within a desired 5. To exit the category search
1-877-209-0079 (Canada). category: mode, press the FAV button or
1. Press BAND until the XM the BAND button to display the
Finding a Station frequency displays. favorites again.
BAND: Press to switch between 2. Press CAT to display the Removing SiriusXM Categories
AM, FM, or SiriusXM. The selection category tabs.
displays. Undesired SiriusXM categories can
3. To navigate through the be removed through the setup
f (Tune): Turn to select radio categories, do one of the menu. To remove an undesired
stations. following: category:
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press to go to . Press the CAT button. 1. Press the MENU button.
the previous or to the next station
and stay there. . Press the s REV or \ 2. Press the pushbutton below the
FWD button. XM CAT label.
To scan stations, press and hold ©
f knob. 3. Turn the f knob, then press the
SEEK or ¨ SEEK until a beep . Turn the
sounds. The radio goes to a station,
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK button or the
4. To tune to a station in the s REV or \ FWD button to
plays for a few seconds, then goes selected category, do one of the display the category to be
to the next station. Press either following: removed.
arrow again to stop scanning.
. Turn the f knob.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
4. Press the pushbutton under the FAV (Favorites): A maximum of To set up the number of favorites
Remove tab until the category 36 stations can be programmed as pages:
name along with the word favorites using the six pushbuttons 1. Press MENU to display the radio
Removed displays. below the radio station frequency setup menu.
5. Repeat the steps to remove labels and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). 2. Press the pushbutton below the
more categories. FAV 1-6 label.
Press to go through up to six pages
Removed categories can be of favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the desired number of
restored by pressing the pushbutton stations available per page. Each favorites pages by pressing the
under the Add label when a page of favorites can contain any pushbutton below the displayed
removed category is displayed or by combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM page numbers.
pressing the pushbutton under the stations.
Restore All label. 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time
The balance/fade and tone settings out, to return to the original main
Categories cannot be removed or that were previously adjusted, are radio screen showing the radio
added while the vehicle is moving stored with the favorite stations. station frequency labels and to
faster than 8 km/h (5 mph). begin the process of
To store a station as a favorite:
Storing a Radio Station as a programming favorites for the
1. Tune to a radio station. chosen number of favorites
Favorite
2. Press FAV to display the page pages.
Drivers are encouraged to set up where to store the station.
their radio station favorites while the SiriusXM Radio Messages
vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to 3. Press and hold one of the
six pushbuttons until a beep XL (Explicit Language
favorite stations using the presets, Channels): These channels, or any
favorites button, and steering wheel sounds. When that pushbutton is
pressed and released, the others, can be blocked at a
controls. See Steering Wheel customer's request, by calling
Controls on page 5-2. station that was set returns.
1-866-635-2349 (U.S) or
4. Repeat the steps for each radio 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
station to be stored as a favorite.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
XM Updating: The encryption code If this station was one of the 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
in the receiver is being updated, and presets, choose another station for www.xmradio.ca or call
no action is required. This process that preset button. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
should take no longer than No Artist Info: No artist CAT Not Found: There are no
30 seconds. information is available at this time channels available for the selected
No XM Signal: The system is on this channel. The system is category. The system is working
functioning correctly, but the vehicle working properly. properly.
is in a location that is blocking the No Title Info: No song title XM Theftlocked: The SiriusXM
SiriusXM signal. When the vehicle is information is available at this time receiver in the vehicle could have
moved into an open area, the signal on this channel. The system is previously been in another vehicle.
should return. working properly. For security purposes, SiriusXM
Loading XM: The audio system is No CAT Info: No category receivers cannot be swapped
acquiring and processing audio and information is available at this time between vehicles. If this message is
text data. No action is needed. This on this channel. The system is received after having the vehicle
message should disappear shortly. working properly. serviced, check with your dealer.
Channel Off Air: This channel is No Information: No text or XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
not currently in service. Tune in to informational messages are this message alternates with the
another channel. available at this time on this SiriusXM Radio eight digit radio ID
Channel Unauth: This channel is channel. The system is working label. This label is needed to
blocked or cannot be received with properly. activate the service.
your SiriusXM Subscription No Subscription Please Renew: Unknown: If this message is
package. SiriusXM subscription needs to be received when tuned to channel 0,
Channel Unavail: This previously reactivated. Contact SiriusXM at there could be a receiver fault.
assigned channel is no longer www.siriusxm.com or Consult with your dealer.
assigned. Tune to another station.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Check XM Receiver: If this each other. For better radio level of static while listening to the
message does not clear within a reception, most AM radio stations radio. If static is received while
short period of time, the receiver boost the power levels during the listening to the radio, unplug the
could have a fault. Consult with your day, and then reduce these levels cellular phone and turn it off.
dealer. during the night. Static can also
XM Not Available: If this message occur when things like storms and Fixed Mast Antenna
does not clear within a short period power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try The fixed mast antenna can
of time, the receiver could have a withstand most car washes without
fault. Consult with your dealer. reducing the treble on the radio.
being damaged as long as it is
FM Stereo securely attached to the base. If the
Radio Reception FM signals only reach about mast becomes slightly bent,
Frequency interference and static 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles). straighten it out by hand. If the mast
can occur during normal radio is badly bent, replace it.
Although the radio has a built-in
reception if items such as cell phone electronic circuit that automatically Occasionally check to make sure
chargers, vehicle convenience works to reduce interference, some the antenna is tightened to its base.
accessories, and external electronic static can occur, especially around If tightening is required, tighten
devices are plugged into the tall buildings or hills, causing the by hand.
accessory power outlet. If there is sound to fade in and out.
interference or static, unplug the
Cellular Phone Usage
Satellite Radio Antenna
item from the accessory power
outlet. The SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Cellular phone usage may cause
antenna is on the roof of the vehicle.
interference with the vehicle's radio.
AM This interference may occur when
Keep the antenna clear of
The range for most AM stations is obstructions for clear radio
making or receiving phone calls,
reception.
greater than for FM, especially at charging the phone's battery,
night. The longer range can cause or simply having the phone on. This
station frequencies to interfere with interference causes an increased
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Tall buildings or hills can interfere Audio Players

with satellite radio signals, causing Caution (Continued)
the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under CD Player the CD player, use only CDs in
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, good condition without any label,
Care of the CD Player load one CD at a time, and keep
or tunnels may cause loss of the
SiriusXM signal for a period of time. Do not add any label to a CD. the CD player and the loading slot
It could get caught in the CD player. free of foreign materials, liquids,
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the If a CD is recorded on a personal and debris.
performance of the SiriusXM system computer and a description label is
may be affected if the sunroof needed, try labeling the top of the
is open. If an error displays, see “CD Player
recorded CD with a marking pen.
Messages” later in this section.
The use of CD lens cleaners for
CDs is not advised, due to the risk Care of CDs
of contaminating the lens of the CD If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
optics with lubricants internal to the can be reduced due to CD-R or
CD player mechanism. CD-RW quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music
{ Caution that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
If a label is added to a CD, more handled. Handle them carefully.
than one CD is inserted into the Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
slot at a time, or an attempt is original cases or other protective
made to play scratched or cases and away from direct sunlight
damaged CDs, the CD player and dust. The CD player scans the
could be damaged. While using bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such
(Continued)
as cracked, broken, or scratched,
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
the CD does not play properly or not Playing a CD portable audio player is not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side connected, No Input Device Found
If the ignition or radio is turned off
of a CD while handling it; this could displays.
with a CD in the player, it stays in
damage the surface. Pick up CDs 4 (Information): Press to display
the player. When the ignition or
by grasping the outer edges or the additional text information related to
radio is turned on, the CD starts
edge of the hole and the outer edge. the current song. If information is
playing where it stopped if it was the
If the surface of a CD is soiled, last selected audio source. available, the song title information
clean it with a soft, lint-free cloth or displays on the top line of the
When a CD is inserted, the CD
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, display and artist information
symbol displays on the left side of
neutral detergent solution mixed displays on the bottom line. When
the radio display. As each new track
with water. Make sure the wiping information is not available, NO
starts to play, the track number
process starts from the center to INFO displays.
displays.
the edge. f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
The CD player can play the smaller
Inserting a CD the CD currently playing.
8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an
Insert a CD partway into the slot, adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the © SEEK: Press to go to the start of
label side up. The player pulls it in smaller CDs are loaded in the same the current track, if more than
and the CD should begin playing. manner. 10 seconds on the CD have played.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to Press to go to the previous track if
Ejecting a CD
cycle through CD or Auxiliary when less than 10 seconds on the CD
Z EJECT: Press and release to listening to the radio. The CD icon have played.
eject the disc. Remove the CD and a message showing the disc Press and hold, or press multiple
when Remove Disc displays. If the and/or track number display when a times to continue moving backward
disc is not removed, after several CD is in the player. Press again and through the tracks on the CD.
seconds, the disc is automatically the system automatically searches
pulled back into the player. for an auxiliary input device. See ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
Auxiliary Devices on page 7-20. If a track.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Press and hold, or press multiple 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, Root Directory
times to continue moving forward 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, The root directory is treated as a
through the tracks on the CD. 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or folder. Files are stored in the root
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press a variable bit rate. directory when the disc or storage
and hold to reverse playback quickly Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode device does not contain folders.
within a track. Discs Files accessed from the root
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press directory of a CD display as
The radio can play discs that
and hold to advance playback F1 ROOT.
contain both uncompressed CD
quickly within a track. audio and MP3 files. If both formats Empty Folder
RDM (Random): Press to listen to are on the disc, the radio reads all Folders that do not contain files are
tracks in random, rather than MP3 files first, then the skipped, and the player advances to
sequential order. To use random: uncompressed CD audio files. the next folder that contains files.
1. Press the softkey under the CD-R or CD-RW Supported File Order of Play
RDM tab until Random Current and Folder Structure
Disc displays. Compressed audio files are
The radio supports: accessed in the following order:
2. Press the softkey again to turn . Up to 50 folders. .
off random play. Playlists (Px).
. Up to eight folders in depth. . Files stored in the root directory.
MP3 Supported Files . Up to 50 playlists. . Files stored in folders in the root
Format . Up to 255 files. directory.
Radios that have the capability of . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma extension.
files that were recorded onto a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
be recorded with the following fixed extension.
bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Tracks are played in the following show parts of words on the last 512 folders and files, the player
order: page of text and the extension of allows access and navigates up to
. Play begins from the first track in the file name is not displayed. the maximum, but all items over the
the first playlist and continues maximum are not accessible.
Preprogrammed Playlists
sequentially through all tracks in Playing an MP3
each playlist. When the last CDs that have preprogrammed
track of the last playlist has playlists that were created using 4 (Information): Press to display
played, play continues from the WinAmp®, MusicMatch®, or Real additional text information related to
first track of the first playlist. Jukebox® software can be the current song. If information is
accessed; however, there is no available, the song title information
. Play begins from the first track in playlist editing capability using the displays on the top line of the
the first folder and continues radio. These playlists are treated as display and artist information
sequentially through all tracks in special folders containing displays on the bottom line. When
each folder. When the last track compressed audio song files. information is not available, NO
of the last folder has played, INFO displays.
play continues from the first Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
track of the first folder. file extension and are stored on a f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files
USB device may be supported by on the CD currently playing.
File System and Naming the radio with a USB port.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
The song name that displays is the Playlists can be changed by using the track, if more than 10 seconds
song name contained in the ID3 tag. the softkeys below the S c and have played. Press and hold or
If the song name is not present in c T tabs, the f knob, the © SEEK press multiple times to continue
the ID3 tag, then the radio displays moving backward through tracks.
button, or the ¨ SEEK button. An
the file name without the extension
(such as .mp3) as the track name. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that has been ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
recorded without using file folders track. Press and hold or press
Track names longer than 32 can be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW multiple times to continue moving
characters or 4 pages are contains more than the maximum of forward through tracks.
shortened. The display does not 50 folders, 15 playlists, and
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold 2. Press the softkey again to turn To change from playback by artist to
to reverse playback quickly. Sound off random play. playback by album:
is heard at a reduced volume and h (Music Navigator): Press the 1. Press the softkey below the Sort
the elapsed time of the file displays. softkey below the h tab to have By tab.
Release s REV to resume playing. the files played in order by artist or 2. Press one of the softkeys below
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press album. The player scans the disc to the album tab from the sort
and hold to advance playback sort the files by artist and album ID3 screen.
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced tag information. It can take several
minutes to scan the disc depending 3. Press the softkey below the
volume and the elapsed time of the back tab to return to the main
file displays. Release \ FWD to on the number of files on the disc.
music navigator screen.
The radio may begin playing while it
resume playing. The elapsed time of
is scanning in the background. The album name displays on the
the file displays.
When the scan is finished, the disc second line between the arrows,
S c (Previous Folder): Press begins playing files in order by
and songs from the current album
the softkey below the S c tab to artist. The current artist playing is
begin to play. Once all songs from
go to the first track in the previous shown on the second line of the that album have played, the player
folder. display. Once all songs by that artist moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD and
c T (Next Folder): Press the are played, the player moves to the
next artist in alphabetical order and begins playing MP3 files from that
softkey below the c T tab to go to album.
begins playing files by that artist.
the first track in the next folder. To exit music navigator mode, press
To listen to files by another artist,
RDM (Random): Press to listen to the softkey below the Back tab to
press the softkey below either arrow
tracks in random, rather than tab. The disc goes to the next or return to normal MP3 playback.
sequential order. To use random: previous artist in alphabetical order.
1. Press the softkey under the Continue pressing either softkey
RDM tab until Random Current below the arrow tab until the desired
Disc displays. artist displays.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
CD Player Messages displays an error message, write it multiple times, the player continues
down and provide it to your dealer moving backward through MP3 files
CHECK DISC: If this message
when reporting the problem. on the CD.
displays and/or the CD ejects, it
could be for one of the following ¨ SEEK: Press ¨ SEEK to go to
reasons: MP3 the next track. Press ¨ SEEK and
. It is very hot. When the MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc hold or press multiple times to
temperature returns to normal, continue moving forward through
The radio plays MP3 files that were tracks.
the CD should play. recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
. The road is very rough. When The files can be recorded with the S c (Previous Folder): Press
the road becomes smoother, the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, the softkey under the Folder label to
CD should play. 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, go to the first track in the previous
96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, folder.
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, c T (Next Folder): Press the
or upside down.
256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a softkey under the Folder label to go
. The air is very humid. If so, wait variable bit rate. Song title, artist to the first track in the next folder.
about an hour and try again. name, and album are available for
display by the radio when recorded s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
. There was a problem while to reverse playback quickly within
burning the CD. using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
an MP3 file. Sound is heard at a
. The label is caught in the CD Playing an MP3 reduced volume. Release to resume
player. f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files playing the file. The elapsed time of
on the CD-R or CD-RW currently the file displays.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for
any other reason, try a known playing. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
good CD. © SEEK: Press © SEEK to go to and hold to advance playback
the start of the current MP3 file, quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected, if more than 10 seconds have
contact your dealer. If the radio played. If © SEEK is held or pressed
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
heard at a reduced volume. Release background. When the scan is name is displayed on the second
to resume playing the file. The finished, the CD-R or CD-RW line between the arrows, and songs
elapsed time of the file displays. begins playing again. from the current album begin to
RDM (Random): With the random Once the disc has been scanned, play. Once all songs from that
setting, the MP3 files on the CD-R the player defaults to playing MP3 album are played, the player moves
or CD-RW can be listened to in files in order by artist. The current to the next album in alphabetical
random, rather than sequential artist playing is shown on the order on the CD-R/CD-RW and
order, on one CD-R/CD-RW. To play second line of the display between begins playing MP3 files from that
MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW the arrows. Once all songs by that album.
in random order, press the softkey artist are played, the player moves To exit music navigator mode, press
under the RDM label until Random to the next artist in alphabetical the softkey below the Back label to
Current Disc displays. Press the order on the CD-R/CD-RW and return to normal MP3 playback.
same softkey again to turn off begins playing MP3 files by that
random play. artist. To listen to MP3 files by Compressed Audio
h (Music Navigator): Use the another artist, press the softkey The radio also plays discs that
music navigator feature to play MP3 below either arrow button. The disc contain both uncompressed CD
files on the CD-R or CD-RW in goes to the next or previous artist in audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. By
order by artist or album. Press the alphabetical order. Continue default the radio reads only the
softkey below the music navigator pressing either softkey until the uncompressed audio and ignores
label. The player scans the disc to desired artist is displayed. the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT
sort the files by artist and album ID3 To change from playback by artist to (category) button toggles between
tag information. It can take several playback by album, press the compressed and uncompressed
minutes to scan the disc depending softkey below the Sort By label. audio format.
on the number of MP3 files From the sort screen, push one of
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. the softkeys below the album label.
The radio can begin playing while it Press the softkey below the Back
is scanning the disc in the label to return to the main music
navigator screen. Now the album
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
MP3 Supported File and Folder the complexity and confusion in Playlists can be changed by using
Structure trying to locate a particular folder S c and c T , the tune knob,
To burn an MP3 disc on a personal during playback. or the SEEK arrows. An MP3 CD-R
computer: . Make sure playlists have a .m3u or CD-RW that was recorded using
or .wpl extension; other file no file folders can also be played.
. Make sure the MP3 files are If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more
recorded on a CD-R or extensions may not work.
than the maximum of 50 folders, 50
CD-RW disc. . Minimize the length of the file, playlists, and 255 files, the player
. Do not mix standard audio and folder, or playlist names. Long can access and navigate up to the
MP3 files on one disc. file, folder, or playlist names, maximum, but all items over the
or a combination of a large maximum are not accessible.
. The CD player is able to read number of files, folders,
and play a maximum of or playlists can cause the player Root Directory
50 folders, 50 playlists, and to be unable to play up to the The root directory of the CD-R or
255 files. maximum number of files, CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the
. Create a folder structure that folders, playlists, or sessions. To root directory has compressed audio
makes it easy to find songs play a large number of files, files, the directory displays as F1
while driving. Organize songs by folders, playlists or sessions, ROOT. All files contained directly
albums using one folder for each minimize the length of the file, under the root directory are
album. Each folder or album folder, or playlist name. Long accessed prior to any root directory
should contain 18 songs or less. names also take up more space folders. However, playlists (Px) are
on the display, potentially getting always accessed before root folders
. Avoid subfolders. The system cut off. or files.
can support up to
eight subfolders deep; however,
. Finalize the audio disc before Empty Directory or Folder
keep the total number of folders burning it. Trying to add music to
an existing disc can cause the If a root directory or a folder exists
to a minimum in order to reduce somewhere in the file structure that
disc not to function in the player.
contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
beneath them, the player advances Order of Play File System and Naming
to the next folder in the file structure Tracks recorded to the CD-R or The song name displayed is the
that contains compressed audio CD-RW are played in the following song name contained in the ID3 tag.
files. The empty folder does not order: If the song name is not present in
display. the ID3 tag, then the radio displays
. Play begins from the first track in
No Folder the first playlist and continues the file name without the extension
sequentially through all tracks in (such as .mp3) as the track name.
When the CD contains only
compressed files, the files are under each playlist. When the last Track names longer than 32
the root folder. The next and track of the last playlist has characters or four pages are
previous folder functions do not played, play continues from the shortened. Parts of words on the
display on a CD that was recorded first track of the first playlist. last page of text and the extension
without folders or playlists. When . Play begins from the first track in of the file name do not display.
displaying the name of the folder, the first folder and continues Preprogrammed Playlists
the radio displays ROOT. sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track Preprogrammed playlists created by
When the CD contains only playlists WinAmp, MusicMatch, or Real
and compressed audio files, but no of the last folder has been
played, play continues from the Jukebox software can be accessed;
folders, all files are under the root however, they cannot be edited
folder. The folder down and up first track of the first folder.
using the radio. These playlists are
buttons search playlists (Px) first When play enters a new folder, the treated as special folders containing
and then go to the root folder. When display does not automatically show compressed audio song files.
the radio displays the name of the the new folder name unless the
folder the radio displays ROOT. folder mode is chosen as the default
display. The new track name
displays.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Auxiliary Devices O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise Using the USB Port

or counterclockwise to increase or
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack decrease the volume of the portable
Radios with an auxiliary input jack player. Additional volume
on the lower right side of the adjustments might have to be made
faceplate can connect to an external from the portable device if the
audio device such as an iPod®, volume is not loud or soft enough.
MP3 player, or CD player, for use as BAND: Press to listen to the radio
another source for audio listening. when a portable audio device is
This input jack is not an audio playing. The portable audio device
output; do not plug headphones into continues playing.
the front auxiliary input jack.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
To use a portable audio player, play a CD when a portable audio
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to device is playing. Press again and
the radio's front auxiliary input jack. the system begins playing audio Radios with a USB port can control
When a device is connected, press from the connected portable audio a USB storage device or an iPod
the radio CD/AUX button to begin player. If a portable audio player is using the radio buttons and knobs.
playing audio from the device over not connected, No Input Device The USB port is in the center
the vehicle speakers. Found displays. console.
For optimal sound quality, increase USB Support
the portable audio device's volume The USB connector is in the center
to the loudest level.
console, and uses the USB 2.0
It is always best to power the standard.
portable audio device through its
own battery while playing.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
USB Supported Devices USB Supported File and Folder To connect an iPod, connect one
. USB Flash Drives Structure end of the USB cable that came
The radio supports: with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
. Portable USB Hard Drives connector and connect the other
. Up to 700 folders.
. Fifth generation or later iPod end to the USB port in the center
. Up to eight folders in depth. console. If the vehicle is on and the
. iPod nano® USB connection works, OK to
. iPod touch ® . Up to 65,535 files. disconnect and a GM logo may
. Folder and file names up to appear on the iPod and iPod
. iPod classic® appears on the radio display. The
64 bytes.
Not all iPods and USB drives are iPod music appears on the radio’s
compatible with the USB port.
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
display and begins playing.
extension.
Make sure the iPod has the latest The iPod charges while it is
firmware from Apple® for proper
. AAC files stored on an iPod. connected to the vehicle if the
operation. iPod firmware can be . FAT16. vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
updated using the latest iTunes® . FAT32. or ON/RUN position. When the
application. See www.apple.com/ vehicle is turned off, the iPod
itunes. Connecting a USB Storage automatically powers off and will not
For help with identifying your iPod, Device or iPod charge or draw power from the
go to www.apple.com/support. vehicle's battery.
The USB port can be used to
Radios that have a USB port can control an iPod or a USB storage If you have an older iPod model that
play .mp3 and .wma files stored on a device. is not supported, it can still be used
USB storage device as well as AAC by connecting it to the auxiliary
To connect a USB storage device, input jack using a standard 3.5 mm
files stored on an iPod. connect the device to the USB port (1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the
in the center console or on the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
instrument panel. information.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Using the Radio to Control a volume. Release \ FWD to j (Pause): Press the softkey below
USB Storage Device or iPod resume playing. The elapsed time of j to pause the track. The tab
The radio can control a USB the file displays. appears raised when pause is being
storage device or an iPod using the 4 (Information): Press to display used. Press the softkey below j
radio buttons and knobs, and additional information about the again to resume playback.
display song information on the selected track. Back: Press the softkey below the
radio’s display. radio display to go back to the main
Using Softkeys to Control a
f (Tune): Turn to select files. USB Storage Device or iPod
display screen on an iPod, or the
root directory on a USB storage
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of The six softkeys below the radio device.
the track, if more than 10 seconds display are used to control the
have played. Press and hold or functions listed below.
c (Folder View): Press the
press multiple times to continue softkey below c to view the
moving backward through tracks. To use the softkeys: contents of the current folder on the
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next 1. Press the first or fifth softkey USB drive. To browse and select
track. Press and hold or press below the radio display to files:
multiple times to continue moving display the functions listed
forward through tracks. below, or press the softkey 1. Press the softkey below c.
below the function if it is 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold currently displayed.
to reverse playback quickly. Sound of folders.
is heard at a reduced volume. 2. Press the softkey below the tab
with the function on it to use that 3. Press f to select the desired
Release s REV to resume playing. folder. If there is more then one
The elapsed time of the file function.
folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
displays. the desired folder is reached.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press 4. Turn f to scroll through the files
and hold to advance playback
in the selected folder.
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13

. Genres . Third softkey, 5% through the list
5. Press f to select the desired file
. Songs each time the softkey is pressed.
to be played.
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
. Composers
To skip through large lists, the five
list each time the softkey is
softkeys can be used to navigate in To select files: pressed.
the following order:
. First softkey, first item in the list.
1. Press the softkey below h. . Fifth softkey, end of the list.
. Second softkey, 1% through the 2. Turn f to scroll through the list Repeat Functionality
list each time the softkey is of menus. To use Repeat:
pressed.
3. Press f to select the Press the softkey below " or '
. Third softkey, 5% through the list desired menu. to select between Repeat All and
each time the softkey is pressed. Repeat Track.
4. Turn f to scroll through the
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the " (Repeat All): Press the softkey
folders or files in the
selected menu. below " to repeat all tracks. The
pressed.
tab appears lowered when Repeat
. Fifth softkey, end of the list. 5. Press f to select the desired file
All is being used. This is the default
to be played. mode when a USB storage device
h (Music Navigator): Press the
To skip through large lists, the five or iPod is first connected.
softkey below h to view and
softkeys can be used to navigate in ' (Repeat Track): Press the
select a file on an iPod, using the
the following order:
iPod's menu system. Files are softkey below ' to repeat one
sorted by: . First softkey, first item in the list. track. The tab appears raised when
. Playlists . Second softkey, 1% through the Repeat Track is being used.
. Artists
pressed.
. Albums
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Shuffle Functionality
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
To use Shuffle: all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
Press the softkey below >, 2, Bluetooth this section for more information.
C , or = to select between For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the
or Shuffle Folder. allowing: address book or contact list. See
> (Shuffle Off): Press the . Placement and receipt of calls in “Voice Pass-Thru” in this section
for more information.
softkey below 2 to turn shuffle a hands-free mode.
off. This is the default mode when a . Sharing of the cell phone’s
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone
USB storage device or iPod is first address book or contact list with Numbers” in this section for
connected. the vehicle. more information.
2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
Songs): Press the softkey below
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
{ Warning
= or C to shuffle all songs on parked: When using a cell phone, it can
the USB storage device or iPod. . Become familiar with the be distracting to look too long or
C (Shuffle Album): Press the features of the cell phone. too often at the screen of the
softkey below > to shuffle all Organize the phone book and phone or the infotainment system.
songs in the current album on contact lists clearly and delete Taking your eyes off the road too
an iPod. duplicate or rarely used entries. long or too often could cause a
If possible, program speed dial crash resulting in injury or death.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the or other shortcuts. Focus your attention on driving.
softkey below > to shuffle all . Review the controls and
songs in the current folder on a USB
operation of the infotainment
storage device.
system.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/15/13
A Bluetooth system can use a When to Speak: A short tone J / 0 (Call/Mute): Press to answer
Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a sounds after the system responds incoming calls, confirm system
Hands-Free Profile to make and indicating when it is waiting for a information, and start speech
receive phone calls. The system voice command. Wait until the tone recognition.
can be used while the key is in the and then speak.
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY K (End Call): Press to end a call,
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a reject a call, or cancel an operation.
position. The range of the Bluetooth calm and natural voice.
system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Pairing
Not all phones support all functions, Audio System
and not all phones work with the A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth must be paired to the Bluetooth
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
system, sound comes through the system and then connected to the
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
vehicle's front audio system vehicle before it can be used. See
information on compatible phones.
speakers and overrides the audio the cell phone manufacturer's user
Voice Recognition system. Use the audio system guide for Bluetooth functions before
volume knob, during a call, to pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
The Bluetooth system uses voice change the volume level. The
recognition to interpret voice phone is not connected, calls will be
adjusted volume level remains in made using OnStar Hands-Free
commands to dial phone numbers memory for later calls. To prevent
and name tags. Calling, if equipped. See “OnStar,”
missed calls, a minimum volume if equipped.
For additional information, say level is used if the volume is turned
“Help” while you are in a voice down too low. Pairing Information
recognition menu. . A Bluetooth phone with MP3
Bluetooth Controls
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to capability cannot be paired to
a minimum. The system may not Use the buttons on the steering the vehicle as a phone and an
recognize voice commands if there wheel to operate the in-vehicle MP3 player at the same time.
is too much background noise. Bluetooth system. See Steering . Up to five cell phones can be
Wheel Controls on page 5-2.
paired to the Bluetooth system.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13

. The pairing process is disabled 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds Listing All Paired and Connected
when the vehicle is moving. with instructions and a four-digit Phones
. Pairing only needs to be Personal Identification Number The system can list all cell phones
completed once, unless the (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
pairing information on the cell 4. Start the pairing process on the also connected to the vehicle, the
phone changes or the cell phone cell phone that you want to pair. system responds with “is connected”
is deleted from the system. For help with this process, see after that phone name.
. Only one paired cell phone can the cell phone manufacturer's
be connected to the Bluetooth user guide. 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
two seconds.
system at a time. 5. Locate the device named “Your
Vehicle” in the list on the cell 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
. If multiple paired cell phones are
within range of the system, the phone. Follow the instructions 3. Say “List.”
system connects to the first on the cell phone to enter the
PIN provided in Step 3. After the Deleting a Paired Phone
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired PIN is successfully entered, the If the phone name you want to
to the system. To connect to a system prompts you to provide a delete is unknown, see “Listing All
different paired phone, see name for the paired cell phone. Paired and Connected Phones.”
“Connecting to a Different This name will be used to
Phone” later in this section. indicate which phones are 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
paired and connected to the two seconds.
Pairing a Phone vehicle. The system responds 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
1. Press and hold J / 0 for with “<phone name> has been
successfully paired” after the 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
two seconds. which phone to delete.
pairing process is complete.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command 4. Say the name of the phone you
6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pair
can be skipped. want to delete.
additional phones.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command
To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to 30 two seconds.
next available cell phone in the phone numbers as name tags in the
order in which all available cell 2. Say “Store.”
Hands-Free Directory that is shared
phones were paired. Depending on between the Bluetooth and OnStar 3. Say the phone number or group
which cell phone you want to systems, if equipped. of numbers you want to store all
connect to, you may have to use at once with no pauses, then
this command several times. The following commands are used
follow the directions given by the
to delete and store phone numbers.
system to save a name tag for
1. Press and hold J / 0 for Store: This command will store a this number.
two seconds. phone number, or a group of
2. Say “Bluetooth.” numbers as a name tag. Using the “Digit Store” Command
3. Say “Change phone.” Digit Store: This command allows If an unwanted number is
a phone number to be stored as a recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is “Clear” at any time to clear the last
name tag by entering the digits one
found, the response will be number.
at a time.
“<Phone name> is now
connected.” Delete: This command is used to To hear all of the numbers
delete individual name tags. recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is not “Verify” at any time.
found, the original phone Delete All Name Tags: This
remains connected. command deletes all stored name 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
tags in the Hands-Free Calling two seconds.
Directory and the OnStar 2. Say “Digit Store.”
Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
if equipped.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
3. Say each digit, one at a time, To delete all name tags: Digit Dial: This command allows a
that you want to store. After phone number to be dialed by
each digit is entered, the system 1. Press and hold J / 0 for entering the digits one at a time.
repeats back the digit it heard two seconds.
Re-dial: This command is used to
followed by a tone. After the last 2. Say “Delete all name tags.” dial the last number used on the cell
digit has been entered, say phone.
“Store,” and then follow the Listing Stored Numbers
directions given by the system to The list command will list all stored Using the “Dial” or “Call”
save a name tag for this number. numbers and name tags. Command
Using the “Delete” Command Using the “List” Command 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
two seconds.
1. Press and hold J / 0 for 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
two seconds. two seconds. 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
2. Say “Delete.” 2. Say “Directory.” 3. Say the entire number without
pausing, or say the name tag.
3. Say the name tag you want to 3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”
delete. Once connected, the person called
4. Say “List.” will be heard through the audio
Using the “Delete All Name Tags” speakers.
Command Making a Call
Calls can be made using the Calling 911 Emergency
This command deletes all stored
name tags in the Hands-Free following commands. 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
Calling Directory and the OnStar Dial or Call: The dial or call two seconds.
Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory, command can be used
if equipped. 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag. 3. Say “911.”
4. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Once connected, the person called followed by a tone. After the last Call Waiting
will be heard through the audio digit has been entered,
Call waiting must be supported on
speakers. say “Dial.”
the cell phone and enabled by the
Using the “Digit Dial” Command Once connected, the person called wireless service carrier.
will be heard through the audio
The digit dial command allows a speakers.
. Press J / 0 to answer an
phone number to be dialed by incoming call when another call
entering the digits one at a time. Using the “Re-dial” Command is active. The original call is
After each digit is entered, the placed on hold.
system repeats back the digit it 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
heard followed by a tone. two seconds. . Press J / 0 again to return to
If an unwanted number is 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” the original call.
recognized by the system, say Once connected, the person called . To ignore the incoming call, no
“Clear” at any time to clear the last will be heard through the audio action is required.
number. speakers. . Press K to disconnect the
To hear all of the numbers Receiving a Call current call and switch to the call
recognized by the system, say on hold.
“Verify” at any time. When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring Three-Way Calling
1. Press and hold J / 0 for tone is heard in the vehicle.
two seconds. Three-way calling must be
. Press J / 0 to answer the call. supported on the cell phone and
2. Say “Digit Dial.” enabled by the wireless service
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
. Press K to ignore a call. carrier.
that you want to dial. After each
digit is entered, the system
1. While on a call, press J / 0.
repeats back the digit it heard 2. Say “Three-way call.”
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
3. Use the dial or call command to The cell phone must be paired and Voice Pass-Thru
dial the number of the third party connected with the Bluetooth
Voice pass-thru allows access to the
to be called. system before a call can be
voice recognition commands on the
4. Once the call is connected, transferred. The connection process
cell phone. See your cell phone
can take up to two minutes after the
press J / 0 to link all callers ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
manufacturer's user guide to see if
together. the cell phone supports this feature.
Transferring Audio from the To access contacts stored in the cell
Ending a Call Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone phone:
Press K to end a call. During a call with the audio in the
1. Press and hold J / 0 for
vehicle:
Muting a Call two seconds.
During a call, all sounds from inside
1. Press J / 0. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
the vehicle can be muted so that the 2. Say “Transfer Call.” can be skipped.
person on the other end of the call 3. Say “Voice.” The system
Transferring Audio to the
cannot hear them. responds “OK, accessing
Bluetooth System from a Cell
. To mute a call, press J / 0 , and Phone <phone name>.”
then say “Mute call.” During a call with the audio on the The cell phone's normal prompt
cell phone, press J / 0. The audio messages will go through their cycle
. To cancel mute, press J / 0 , according to the phone's operating
and then say “Un-mute call.” transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle, use instructions.
Transferring a Call the audio transfer feature on the cell
Audio can be transferred between phone. See your cell phone
the Bluetooth system and the cell manufacturer's user guide for more
phone. information.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency previous section “Deleting a Paired

(DTMF) Tones Phone” and the previous sections
on deleting name tags.
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as Other Information
name tags during a call. You can
The Bluetooth® word mark and
use this feature when calling a
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
menu-driven phone system.
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
Account numbers can also be
by General Motors is under license.
stored for use.
Other trademarks and trade names
Sending a Number or Name Tag are those of their respective owners.
During a Call See Radio Frequency Statement on
1. Press J / 0. The system page 13-15.
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Dial.”
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
2 NOTES
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate control
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 system functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless
Automatic Climate Control Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-2.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
1. Fan Control 6. Air Conditioning

2. Outside Air 7. Driver and Passenger Heated
3. Temperature Control Seats (If Equipped)
4. Recirculation 8. Rear Window Defogger
5. Air Delivery Mode Control

6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
8-2 Climate Controls
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided recirculation mode off automatically
or counterclockwise to increase or between the instrument panel and and runs the air conditioning
decrease the fan speed. To turn the the floor outlets. compressor unless the outside air is
fan off, turn the knob all the way 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the at or below freezing. Recirculation
counterclockwise. In any setting floor outlets with some air directed mode cannot be selected while in
other than off, the fan runs to the windshield. defrost mode. This helps prevent
continuously with the ignition on. window fogging.
There will be some airflow When this mode is selected, the
system turns the recirculation mode For best results, clear all snow and
noticeable from the various outlets ice from the windshield before
when driving, even with the fan in off. Recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in floor mode. This defrosting.
the off position. To turn off the air
helps prevent window fogging. # (Air Conditioning): Press to
completely, turn the fan to 9 and turn the air conditioning system on
select the @ button. - (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the or off. An indicator light comes on to
Temperature Control: Turn floor outlets, with some air directed show that the air conditioning is on.
clockwise or counterclockwise to to the windshield and side window The air conditioning can be selected
increase or decrease the outlets. In this mode, the system in any mode as long as the fan is on
temperature inside the vehicle. turns the recirculation mode off and and the outside temperature is
runs the air conditioning compressor above freezing. A flashing indicator
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
unless the outside air is at or below light indicates that the air
clockwise or counterclockwise to
freezing. Recirculation mode cannot conditioning compressor is currently
change the current airflow mode.
be selected while in defog mode. not available.
Select from the following air delivery
This helps prevent window fogging. On hot days, open the windows to
modes:
0 (Defrost): Removes fog or frost let hot inside air escape; then close
H (Vent): Air is directed to the them. This helps reduce the time it
from the windshield more quickly.
instrument panel outlets. takes for the vehicle to cool down
Air is directed to the windshield and
the side window outlets. In this and helps the system to operate
mode, the system turns the more efficiently.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
For quick cool down on hot days, 8 (Outside Air): Press to turn Recirculation mode is not available
select the following settings the outside air mode on. An in floor, defog, or defrost modes and
together: indicator light comes on to show will shut off automatically and
that outside air is on. Air from change to outside air. The indicator
1. Select H mode. outside the vehicle will circulate will flash if the button is selected in
2. Select 8. throughout the vehicle. The outside any of these modes. This helps
air mode can be used with all prevent window fogging and
3. Turn the # on. modes, but it cannot be used with moisture building up inside the
the recirculation mode. Pressing this vehicle.
4. Select the coolest temperature
and highest fan speed. button will cancel the Rear Window Defogger
recirculation mode.
5. Once the vehicle's interior The rear window defogger uses a
temperature is below the outside @ (Recirculation): Press to turn warming grid to remove fog from the
temperature, select recirculation on the recirculation mode. An rear window.
mode for enhanced cooling. indicator light comes on to show
that recirculation is on. This mode The rear window defogger only
Using these settings together for recirculates and helps to quickly works when the ignition is in
long periods of time may cause the cool or heat the air inside the ON/RUN.
air inside the vehicle to become too vehicle. It can be used to prevent 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
dry. To prevent this from happening, outside air and odors from entering Press to turn the rear window
after the air inside of the vehicle has the vehicle. Avoid using the defogger on or off. An indicator light
cooled, turn the recirculation recirculation mode during high on the button comes on to show that
mode off. periods of humidity and cool outside the rear window is activated.
The air conditioning system temperatures since this may result
in increased window fogging. The rear window defogger stays on
removes moisture from the air, so a
If window fogging is experienced, for approximately 10 minutes after
small amount of water might drip
select the defrost mode. the button is pressed, unless the
under the vehicle while idling or
ignition is turned to ACC/
after turning off the engine. This is
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
normal.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If turned on again, the defogger only Remote Start Climate Control

runs for approximately five minutes Operation
before turning off again. At higher For vehicles with the remote start
vehicle speeds, the defogger may feature, when it is activated, the
stay on continuously. The defogger climate control system heats and
can also be turned off by turning off cools the inside of the vehicle using
the engine. the modes that were set before the
vehicle was turned off.
{ Caution
Using a razor blade or sharp
object on the inside rear window
can damage the antenna or
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not stick anything to the rear
window.
L or M (Heated Front Seats, If

Equipped): Press to heat the driver
or passenger seat cushion and
seatback. To turn off, press the
button until the indicator lights turn
off. See Heated Front Seats on
page 3-6.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Automatic Climate Control System Automatic Operation

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with This climate control system
this system. If equipped with remote start, the climate control system automatically maintains the desired
functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless Entry temperature inside the vehicle. Do
(RKE) System Operation on page 2-2. not cover the sensor on the top of
the instrument panel near the
windshield, or the sensor grille
below the climate control faceplate.
These two sensors help regulate the
inside air temperature.
AUTO (Automatic Fan): Turn the
fan knob to AUTO for the system to
automatically adjust the fan speed
to reach the desired inside
temperature.
Temperature Control: Select the
desired cabin air temperature
between 16-32°C (60-90°F).
Choosing the coldest or warmest
1. Fan Control 6. Air Conditioning
temperature setting does not cause
2. Outside Air 7. Driver and Passenger Heated the system to heat or cool any
3. Temperature Control Seats (If Equipped) faster.
4. Recirculation 8. Rear Window Defogger
5. Air Delivery Mode Control

6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
AUTO (Automatic Air Delivery length of time needed to warm the Choosing the coldest or warmest
Mode): Turn the air delivery mode interior depends on the outside temperature setting does not cause
knob to AUTO for the system to temperature and inside temperature the system to heat or cool any
automatically control the direction of of the vehicle. faster.
the airflow to help reach the desired Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
inside temperature. Manual Operation
clockwise or counterclockwise to
The system automatically controls 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise change the current airflow mode.
the air inlet to supply the outside air or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. To turn the Select from the following air delivery
or recirculated inside air needed to modes:
heat or cool the vehicle faster. The fan off, turn the left knob to the 9
@ button indicator light is lit position. In any setting other than H (Vent): Air is directed to the
whenever the recirculation mode off, the fan runs continuously with instrument panel outlets.
is on. the ignition on. The fan must be ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
turned on to run the air conditioning between the instrument panel
Press the 8 button to change to compressor. There will be some outlets and the floor outlets.
outside air. However, the airflow noticeable from the various
recirculation mode may turn back on outlets when driving, even with the 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
automatically. fan in the off position. To turn off the floor outlets with some air directed
to the windshield.
In cold weather, if the fan and air air completely, turn the fan to 9
delivery modes are in automatic, the and select the @ button. When this mode is selected, the
system starts at lower fan speeds to system turns the recirculation mode
Temperature Control: Turn off. Recirculation mode cannot be
avoid directing cold air into the
clockwise or counterclockwise to selected while in floor mode. This is
vehicle until warmer air is available.
increase or decrease the to help prevent window fogging.
The climate control system directs
temperature. Select the desired
air to the floor, but may - (Defog): Clears the windows of
cabin air temperature between
automatically change modes as the fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
16-32°C (60-90°F). Typically, the
vehicle warms up to maintain the floor outlets, with some air directed
best setting is near 23°C (75°F).
chosen temperature setting. The to the windshield and side window
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
outlets. In this mode, the system in any mode as long as the fan is on outside the vehicle will circulate
turns the recirculation mode off and and the outside temperature is throughout the vehicle. The outside
runs the air conditioning compressor above freezing. A flashing indicator air mode can be used with all
unless the outside air is at or below light indicates that the air modes, but it cannot be used with
freezing. Recirculation mode cannot conditioning compressor is currently the recirculation mode. Pressing this
be selected while in defog mode. not available. button will cancel the
This helps prevent window fogging. On hot days, use the automatic fan recirculation mode.
0 (Defrost): Removes fog or frost and automatic air delivery mode @ (Recirculation): Press to turn
from the windshield more quickly. settings and the vehicle will reach on the recirculation mode. An
Air is directed to the windshield and the desired temperature more indicator light comes on to show
the side window outlets. In this quickly. The desired fan and air that recirculation is on. This mode
mode, the system turns the delivery mode settings can still be recirculates and helps to quickly
recirculation mode off automatically adjusted manually. Open the cool or heat the air inside the
and runs the air conditioning windows to let the hot inside air vehicle. It can be used to prevent
compressor unless the outside air is escape, then close them. This helps outside air and odors from entering
at or below freezing. Recirculation reduce the time it takes for the the vehicle. Avoid using the
mode cannot be selected while in vehicle to cool down and helps the recirculation mode during high
defrost mode. This helps prevent system to operate more efficiently. periods of humidity and cool outside
window fogging. The air conditioning system temperatures since this may result
For best results, clear all snow and removes moisture from the air, so a in increased window fogging.
ice from the windshield before small amount of water might drip If window fogging is experienced,
defrosting. under the vehicle while idling or select the defrost mode.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to after turning off the engine. Recirculation mode is not available
turn the air conditioning system on 8 (Outside Air): Press to turn in floor, defog, or defrost modes and
or off. An indicator light comes on to the outside air mode on. An will shut off automatically and
show that the air conditioning is on. indicator light comes on to show change to outside air. If the button is
The air conditioning can be selected that outside air is on. Air from selected in any of these modes, the
indicator will flash. This helps
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
prevent window fogging and continuously. The defogger can also Remote Start Climate Control
moisture building up inside the be turned off by turning off the Operation
vehicle. engine. If equipped with the remote start
Rear Window Defogger feature, when it is activated, the
The rear window defogger uses a
{ Caution climate control system heats and
cools the inside of the vehicle using
warming grid to remove fog from the Using a razor blade or sharp the modes that were set before the
rear window. object on the inside rear window vehicle was turned off.
The rear window defogger only can damage the antenna or
works when the ignition is in defogger. Repairs would not be
ON/RUN. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not stick anything to the rear
1 (Rear Window Defogger): window.
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light
on the button comes on to show that L or M (Heated Front Seats, If
it is activated. Equipped): Press to heat the driver
or passenger seat cushion and
The rear window defogger stays on
seatback. To turn off, press the
for approximately 10 minutes after
button until the indicator lights turn
the button is pressed, unless the
off. See Heated Front Seats on
ignition is turned to ACC/
page 3-6.
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
If turned on again, the defogger only
runs for approximately five minutes
before turning off. At higher vehicle
speeds, the defogger may stay on
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Air Vents Maintenance

Move the louvers on the air outlets
up or down to change the direction Passenger Compartment
of the airflow. The louvers do Air Filter
not turn.
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
Use the thumbwheels near each other airborne irritants from outside
vent to open and close off the air that is pulled into the vehicle.
airflow.
The filter should be replaced as part
Operation Tips of routine scheduled maintenance.
. Clear away any ice, snow, See Maintenance Schedule on
or leaves from the air inlets at page 11-2 for replacement intervals. 1. Remove the four screws from
the base of the vehicle that may To find out what type of filter to use, around the glove box and detach
block the flow of air into the see Maintenance Replacement the three inner clips from the
vehicle. Parts on page 11-13. glove box.
. Do not use any non-GM The passenger compartment air 2. Lower the loosened glove box
approved hood deflectors that filter can be accessed by removing housing.
could adversely affect the the entire glove box.
performance of the system.
. Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
. Do not insert objects into the air
outlets. This may affect the
operation of the outlet.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
4. Remove the air filter cover

screw.
3. Unplug both wire cables and

remove the glove box.
5. Remove the filter cover and pull

out the old air filter.
6. Install the new air filter.
7. Reinstall the air filter cover.
Reconnect the wire cabling and
reinstall the glove box.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Retained Accessory Driver Assistance Systems

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-32
Operating Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Rear Vision
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Parking over Things
Driving Information That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Fuel
Driver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Driving Environment . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Vehicle Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-36
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Running the Vehicle While California Fuel
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-37
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Automatic Transmission Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-21 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Filling a Portable Fuel
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Drive Systems Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Trailer Towing
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7 Brakes General Towing
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Antilock Brake Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Driving Characteristics and
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Starting and Operating Ride Control Systems Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14 Traction Control/Electronic
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Conversions and Add-Ons
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Add-On Electrical
Cruise Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information Driving Environment same as a vehicle with a lower

center of gravity, like a car, in similar
Be prepared for driving in inclement situations.
Driver Behavior weather, at night, or during other
times where visibility or traction may Safe driver behavior and
Driving is an important understanding of the environment
responsibility. Driver behavior, the be limited, such as on curves,
slippery roads, or hilly terrain. can help avoid a rollover crash in
driving environment, and the any type of vehicle, including utility
vehicle's design all affect how well a Unfamiliar surroundings can also
have hidden hazards. vehicles.
vehicle performs.
Being aware of these factors can Learn more about driving in different Distracted Driving
help in understanding how the conditions and off-road driving in
this section. Distraction comes in many forms
vehicle handles and what can be
and can take your focus from the
done to avoid many types of
Vehicle Design task of driving. Exercise good
crashes, including a rollover crash.
judgment and do not let other
Most serious injuries and fatalities to Utility vehicles have a significantly activities divert your attention away
unbelted occupants can be reduced higher rollover rate than other types from the road. Many local
or prevented by the use of safety of vehicles. This is because they governments have enacted laws
belts. In a rollover crash, an have a higher ground clearance and regarding driver distraction. Become
unbelted person is significantly a narrower track or shorter familiar with the local laws in
more likely to die than a person wheelbase than passenger cars, your area.
wearing a safety belt. In addition, which makes them more capable for
avoiding excessive speed, sudden off-road driving. While these design
or abrupt turns, and drunken or characteristics provide the driver
aggressive driving can help make with a better view of the road, these
trips safer and avoid the possibility vehicles do have a higher center of
of a crash. gravity than other types of vehicles.
A utility vehicle does not handle the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
To avoid distracted driving, always

. Stop or park the vehicle to tend . Assume that other road users
keep your eyes on the road, hands to children. (pedestrians, bicyclists, and
on the wheel, and mind on the drive. . Keep pets in an appropriate other drivers) are going to be
carrier or restraint. careless and make mistakes.
. Do not use a phone in Anticipate what they might do
demanding driving situations. . Avoid stressful conversations and be ready.
Use a hands-free method to while driving, whether with a
place or receive necessary passenger or on a cell phone.
. Allow enough following distance
phone calls. between you and the driver in
front of you.
. Watch the road. Do not read, { Warning . Focus on the task of driving.
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other Taking your eyes off the road too
electronic devices. long or too often could cause a Drunk Driving
crash resulting in injury or death. Death and injury associated with
. Designate a front seat
passenger to handle potential Focus your attention on driving. drinking and driving is a global
distractions. tragedy.
. Become familiar with vehicle Refer to the Infotainment section for
features before driving, such as more information on using that
system, including pairing and using
{ Warning
programming favorite radio
stations and adjusting climate a cell phone. Drinking and then driving is very
control and seat settings. dangerous. Your reflexes,
Program all trip information into Defensive Driving perceptions, attentiveness, and
any navigation device prior to judgment can be affected by even
Defensive driving means “always
driving. a small amount of alcohol. You
expect the unexpected.” The first
. Wait until the vehicle is parked step in driving defensively is to wear (Continued)
to retrieve items that have fallen the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
to the floor. page 3-9.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Warning (Continued)
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m Steering
(66 ft), which could be a lot of
distance in an emergency. Hydraulic Power Steering
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind This vehicle has hydraulic power
drinking. include: steering. It may require
. Keep enough distance between maintenance. See Power Steering
Do not drink and drive or ride with Fluid on page 10-20.
a driver who has been drinking. you and the vehicle in front
of you. If power steering assist is lost
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
. Avoid needless heavy braking. because the engine stops or
with a group, designate a driver
because of a system malfunction,
who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic. the vehicle can be steered but may
If the engine ever stops while the require increased effort. See your
Control of a Vehicle vehicle is being driven, brake dealer if there is a problem.
normally but do not pump the
Braking, steering, and accelerating
are important factors in helping to
brakes. Doing so could make the { Caution
pedal harder to push down. If the
control a vehicle while driving. If the steering wheel is turned
engine stops, there will be some
power brake assist but it will be until it reaches the end of its
Braking used when the brake is applied. travel, and is held in that position
Braking action involves perception Once the power assist is used up, it for more than 15 seconds,
time and reaction time. Deciding to can take longer to stop and the damage may occur to the power
push the brake pedal is perception brake pedal will be harder to push. steering system and there may be
time. Actually doing it is loss of power steering assist.
reaction time.
Average driver reaction time is
about three-quarters of a second. In
that time, a vehicle moving at
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Curve Tips Off-Road Recovery 3. Turn the steering wheel to go

straight down the roadway.
. Take curves at a reasonable
speed.
Loss of Control
. Reduce speed before entering a
curve. Skidding
. Maintain a reasonable steady There are three types of skids that
speed through the curve. correspond to the vehicle's three
control systems:
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating . Braking Skid — wheels are not
gently into the straightaway. rolling.
Steering in Emergencies
. Steering or Cornering Skid —
too much speed or steering in a
. There are some situations when curve causes tires to slip and
steering around a problem may The vehicle's right wheels can drop lose cornering force.
be more effective than braking. off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving. Follow
. Acceleration Skid — too much
. Holding both sides of the throttle causes the driving
steering wheel allows you to turn these tips:
wheels to spin.
180 degrees without removing 1. Ease off the accelerator and
a hand. then, if there is nothing in the Defensive drivers avoid most skids
way, steer the vehicle so that it by taking reasonable care suited to
. Antilock Brake System (ABS) existing conditions, and by not
allows steering while braking. straddles the edge of the
pavement. overdriving those conditions. But
skids are always possible.
2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
pavement edge.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help

these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid. Warning (Continued)
. Ease your foot off the Flowing or rushing water creates
accelerator pedal and steer the Driving on Wet Roads strong forces. Driving through
way you want the vehicle to go. Rain and wet roads can reduce flowing water could cause the
The vehicle may straighten out. vehicle traction and affect your vehicle to be carried away. If this
Be ready for a second skid if it ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle
occurs. Always drive slower in these types occupants could drown. Do not
. Slow down and adjust your of driving conditions and avoid ignore police warnings and be
driving according to weather driving through large puddles and very cautious about trying to drive
conditions. Stopping distance deep‐standing or flowing water. through flowing water.
can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when { Warning Hydroplaning
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other Wet brakes can cause crashes. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
material on the road. Learn to They might not work as well in a can build up under the vehicle's
recognize warning clues — such quick stop and could cause tires so they actually ride on the
as enough water, ice, or packed pulling to one side. You could water. This can happen if the road is
snow on the road to make a lose control of the vehicle. wet enough and you are going fast
mirrored surface — and slow enough. When the vehicle is
down when you have any doubt. After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle hydroplaning, it has little or no
. Try to avoid sudden steering, contact with the road.
wash, lightly apply the brake
acceleration, or braking, pedal until the brakes work There is no hard and fast rule about
including reducing vehicle speed normally. hydroplaning. The best advice is to
by shifting to a lower gear. Any slow down when the road is wet.
sudden changes could cause (Continued)
the tires to slide.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Other Rainy Weather Tips

. Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides. Warning (Continued)
Besides slowing down, other wet .
weather driving tips include: Check the rearview mirror and could result in a loss of braking.
vehicle instruments often.
. Allow extra following distance. Shift the transmission to a lower
gear to let the engine assist the
. Pass with caution. Hill and Mountain Roads brakes on a steep downhill slope.
. Keep windshield wiping Driving on steep hills or through
equipment in good shape. mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
. Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled. driving in these conditions include: { Warning
. Have good tires with proper
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
tread depth. See Tires on good shape. or with the ignition off is
page 10-37. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, dangerous. This can cause
tires, cooling system, and overheating of the brakes and
. Turn off cruise control.
transmission. loss of steering. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle
Highway Hypnosis . Shift to a lower gear when going
in gear.
down steep or long hills.
Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a { Warning . Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
safe place to park the vehicle center of the road. Drive at
Using the brakes to slow the
and rest. speeds that let you stay in your
vehicle on a long downhill slope
Other driving tips include: can cause brake overheating, can own lane.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. reduce brake performance, and . Be alert on top of hills;
. Keep the interior (Continued) something could be in your lane
temperature cool. (stalled car, accident).
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13

. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction. Blizzard Conditions
signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or Being stuck in snow can be a
wheels will spin and polish the
no-passing zones) and take serious situation. Stay with the
surface under the tires even more.
appropriate action. vehicle unless there is help nearby.
Traction Control should be turned If possible, use Roadside
on. See Traction Control/Electronic Assistance. See Roadside
Winter Driving Stability Control on page 9-28. Assistance Program on page 13-5.
Driving on Snow or Ice The Antilock Brake System (ABS) To get help and keep everyone in
improves vehicle stability during the vehicle safe:
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the hard stops on slippery roads, but . Turn on the hazard warning
road, creating less traction or grip. apply the brakes sooner than when flashers.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32° on dry pavement. See Antilock . Tie a red cloth to an outside
F) when freezing rain begins to fall, Brake System (ABS) on page 9-25.
mirror.
resulting in even less traction. Avoid Allow greater following distance on
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain any slippery road and watch for
until roads can be treated with salt slippery spots. Icy patches can
or sand. occur on otherwise clear roads in
Drive with caution, whatever the shaded areas. The surface of a
condition. Accelerate gently so curve or an overpass can remain icy
traction is not lost. Accelerating too when the surrounding roads are
quickly causes the wheels to spin clear. Avoid sudden steering
and makes the surface under the maneuvers and braking while
tires slick, so there is even less on ice.
traction. Turn off cruise control on slippery
surfaces.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If it takes some time for help to

{ Warning Warning (Continued) arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on pedal slightly so the engine runs
under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument faster than the idle speed. This
cause exhaust gases to get panel. keeps the battery charged to restart
inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control the vehicle and to signal for help
carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that with the headlamps. Do this as little
cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the as possible to save fuel.
cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
death. to the highest setting. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: “Climate Control Systems”.
Slowly and cautiously spin the
. Clear away snow from around For more information about wheels to free the vehicle when
the base of your vehicle, carbon monoxide, see Engine stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
especially any that is blocking Exhaust on page 9-20.
If stuck too severely for the traction
the exhaust pipe. system to free the vehicle, turn the
. Check again from time to To save fuel, run the engine for only traction system off and use the
time to be sure snow does short periods as needed to warm rocking method. See Traction
not collect there. the vehicle and then shut the engine Control/Electronic Stability Control
off and close the window most of on page 9-28.
. Open a window about 5 cm the way to save heat. Repeat this
(2 in) on the side of the until help arrives but only when you
vehicle that is away from the feel really uncomfortable from the
wind to bring in fresh air. cold. Moving about to keep warm
(Continued) also helps.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Slowly spinning the wheels in the

{ Warning forward and reverse directions { Warning
causes a rocking motion that could
If the vehicle's tires spin at high free the vehicle. If that does not get Do not load the vehicle any
speed, they can explode, and you the vehicle out after a few tries, it heavier than the Gross
or others could be injured. The might need to be towed out. If the Vehicle Weight Rating
vehicle can overheat, causing an vehicle does need to be towed out, (GVWR), or either the
engine compartment fire or other see Towing the Vehicle on maximum front or rear Gross
damage. Spin the wheels as little page 10-70. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
as possible and avoid going This can cause systems to
above 56 km/h (35 mph). Vehicle Load Limits break and change the way the
It is very important to know how vehicle handles. This could
Rocking the Vehicle to Get much weight the vehicle can cause loss of control and a
it Out carry. This weight is called the crash. Overloading can also
Turn the steering wheel left and vehicle capacity weight and shorten the life of the vehicle.
right to clear the area around the includes the weight of all
front wheels. Turn off any traction occupants, cargo and all
system. Shift back and forth nonfactory-installed options.
between R (Reverse) and a low Two labels on the vehicle show
forward gear, spinning the wheels how much weight it may
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
properly carry, the Tire and
wheels stop spinning before shifting Loading Information label and
gears. Release the accelerator the Certification label.
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Tire and Loading Information positions (1), and the maximum “Steps for Determining Correct
Label vehicle capacity weight (2) in Load Limit–
kilograms and pounds. 1. Locate the statement "The
The Tire and Loading combined weight of
Information label also shows the occupants and cargo should
tire size of the original never exceed XXX kg or
equipment tires (3) and the XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
recommended cold tire inflation placard.
pressures (4). For more 2. Determine the combined
information on tires and inflation, weight of the driver and
see Tires on page 10-37 and passengers that will be riding
Tire Pressure on page 10-44. in your vehicle.
There is also important loading 3. Subtract the combined
Label Example information on the Certification
weight of the driver and
A vehicle specific Tire and label. It tells you the Gross
passengers from XXX kg or
Loading Information label is Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
XXX lbs.
attached to the vehicle's center and the Gross Axle Weight
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver Rating (GAWR) for the front and 4. The resulting figure equals
door open, you will find the label rear axle. See “Certification the available amount of cargo
attached near the door lock Label” later in this section. and luggage load capacity.
post. The Tire and Loading For example, if the "XXX"
Information label shows the amount equals 1400 lbs. and
number of occupant seating there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing Example 1 Example 2
a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
vehicle. Consult this manual Example 1 = 453 kg Example 2 = 453 kg
to determine how this (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
reduces the available cargo 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
and luggage load capacity of 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
your vehicle.” (300 lbs). (750 lbs).
See Trailer Towing on page 9-44 3. Available Occupant and 3. Available Cargo Weight =
for important information on Cargo Weight = 317 kg 113 kg (250 lbs).
towing a trailer, towing safety (700 lbs).
rules and trailering tips.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
seating positions. The combined the weight of the vehicle, all

weight of the driver, passengers, occupants, fuel, and cargo.
and cargo should never exceed Never exceed the GVWR for the
the vehicle's capacity weight. vehicle, or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
Certification Label
the front or rear axle.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy
load, it should be spread out.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this
section.
Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for { Warning
Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ Vehicle Weight Rating
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example (GVWR), or either the
(1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification maximum front or rear Gross
3. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to the lower Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
0 kg (0 lbs). area of the center pillar (B-Pillar) This can cause systems to
on the driver side of the vehicle. break and change the way the
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and vehicle handles. This could
Loading Information label for The label tells the gross weight
specific information about the capacity of the vehicle, called (Continued)
vehicle's capacity weight and the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued) Starting and

Operating
cause loss of control and a . Never stack heavier
crash. Overloading can also things, like suitcases, New Vehicle Break-In
shorten the life of the vehicle. inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats. { Caution
{ Warning . Do not leave an The vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will
unsecured child restraint
Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle. perform better in the long run if
strike and injure people in a you follow these guidelines:
sudden stop or turn, or in a
. Secure loose items in the . Do not drive at any one
crash. vehicle. constant speed, fast or slow,
. Put things in the cargo
. Do not leave a seat folded for the first 805 km (500 mi).
down unless needed. Do not make full-throttle
area of the vehicle. In the
starts. Avoid downshifting to
cargo area, put them as brake or slow the vehicle.
far forward as possible.
Try to spread the weight
. Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 mi) or
evenly.
so. During this time the new
(Continued) brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Ignition Positions
Caution (Continued) { Caution
breaking-in guideline every Using a tool to force the key to
time you get new brake turn in the ignition could cause
linings. damage to the switch or break the
. Do not tow a trailer during key. Use the correct key, make
break-in. See Trailer Towing sure it is all the way in, and turn it
on page 9-44 for the trailer only with your hand. If the key
towing capabilities of the cannot be turned by hand, see
vehicle and more information. your dealer.
Following break-in, engine speed
and load can be gradually LOCK (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
increased. LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
stopped, turn the ignition switch to
The ignition switch has four different
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
positions.
To shift out of P (Park), turn the will remain active. See Retained
ignition to ON/RUN or ACC/ Accessory Power (RAP) on
ACCESSORY and apply the regular page 9-18.
brake pedal.
This position locks the ignition.
It also locks the steering wheel and
the transmission. The key can only
be removed in LOCK/OFF. The shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
The steering can bind with the 3. Come to a complete stop, shift ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is
wheels turned off center. If this to P (Park), and turn the ignition the position in which you can
happens, move the steering wheel to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with operate some electrical accessories
from right to left while turning the an automatic transmission, the or items plugged into the accessory
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this shift lever must be in P (Park) to power outlets.
does not work, the vehicle needs turn the ignition switch to the Use this position if the vehicle must
service. LOCK/OFF position. be pushed or towed.
Do not turn the engine off when the 4. Set the parking brake. See ON (ON/RUN): This position can
vehicle is moving. This will cause a Parking Brake on page 9-26 be used to operate the electrical
loss of power assist in the brake accessories and to display some
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
{ Warning instrument cluster warning and
indicator lights. This position can
If the vehicle must be shut off in an Turning off the vehicle while also be used for service and
emergency: moving may cause loss of power diagnostics, and to verify the proper
assist in the brake and steering operation of the malfunction
1. Brake using a firm and steady systems and disable the airbags.
pressure. Do not pump the indicator lamp as may be required
While driving, only shut the for emission inspection purposes.
brakes repeatedly. This may
vehicle off in an emergency. The switch stays in this position
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force. when the engine is running. The
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, transmission is also unlocked in this
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). position. If you leave the key in the
This can be done while the and must be shut off while driving,
turn the ignition to ACC/ ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
vehicle is moving. After shifting positions with the engine off, the
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the ACCESSORY.
battery could be drained. You may
brakes and steer the vehicle to a not be able to start the vehicle if the
safe location. battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
START: This is the position that turned to the START position,

starts the engine. When the engine { Caution and then released when the
starts, release the key. The ignition engine begins cranking, the
switch returns to ON/RUN for If the steering wheel is turned engine will continue cranking for
driving. until it reaches the end of its a few seconds or until the
travel, and is held in that position vehicle starts. If the engine does
A warning tone will sound when the while starting the vehicle, damage
driver door is opened, the ignition is not start and the key is held in
may occur to the hydraulic power START, cranking will be stopped
in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/ steering system and there may be
OFF, and the key is in the ignition. after 15 seconds to prevent
loss of power steering assist. cranking motor damage. To
prevent gear damage, this
Starting the Engine system also prevents cranking if
Starting Procedure
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or the engine is already running.
N (Neutral). The engine will not start 1. With your foot off the accelerator Engine cranking can be stopped
in any other position. To restart the pedal, turn the ignition to START. by turning the ignition switch to
engine when the vehicle is already When the engine starts, let go of the ACC/ACCESSORY or
moving, use N (Neutral) only. the key. The idle speed will slow LOCK/OFF position.
down as the engine warms. Do
{ Caution not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
{ Caution
Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the engine and transmission gently Cranking the engine for long
vehicle is moving. If you do, you to allow the oil to warm up and periods of time, by returning the
lubricate all moving parts. ignition to the START position
could damage the transmission.
Shift to P (Park) only when the The vehicle has a immediately after cranking has
vehicle is stopped. Computer-Controlled Cranking ended, can overheat and damage
System. This feature assists in the cranking motor, and drain the
starting the engine and protects (Continued)
components. If the ignition key is
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
engine and transmission gently The outside mirror, power windows

Caution (Continued) until the oil warms up and and sunroof will function until a door
lubricates all moving parts. is opened.
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the The radio will function until the
cranking motor cool down. { Caution driver door is opened.
If you add electrical parts or
accessories, you could change
Shifting Into Park
2. If the engine does not start after
five to 10 seconds, especially in the way the engine operates. Any To shift into P (Park):
very cold weather (below −18°C resulting damage would not be 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
or 0°F), it could be flooded with covered by the vehicle warranty. set the parking brake. See
too much gasoline. Try pushing See Add-On Electrical Equipment Parking Brake on page 9-26 for
the accelerator pedal all the way on page 9-47. more information.
to the floor and holding it there
as you hold the key in START 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
for up to a maximum of Retained Accessory by holding in the button on the
15 seconds. Wait at least shift lever and pushing the lever
Power (RAP) all the way toward the front of
15 seconds between each try, to
allow the cranking motor to cool These vehicle accessories may be the vehicle.
down. When the engine starts, used for up to 10 minutes after the 3. Turn the ignition key to
let go of the key and accelerator. ignition key is turned to the LOCK LOCK/OFF.
If the vehicle starts briefly but position:
then stops again, repeat these . Outside Mirror
steps. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not
. Power Windows
race the engine immediately . Sunroof (if equipped)
after starting it. Operate the . Radio
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Leaving the Vehicle With the If you have to leave an automatic Move the shift lever out of P (Park)
Engine Running transmission vehicle with the engine before you release the parking
running, be sure the vehicle is in brake.
P (Park) and the parking brake is
{ Warning firmly set before you leave it. After
If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push
It can be dangerous to leave the you have moved the shift lever into yours a little uphill to take some of
vehicle with the engine running. P (Park), hold the brake pedal down. the pressure from the parking pawl
It could overheat and catch fire. Then, see if you can move the shift in the transmission, so you can pull
lever away from P (Park) without the shift lever out of P (Park).
It is dangerous to get out of the first pushing the button. If you can, it
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully means that the shift lever was not
in P (Park) with the parking brake fully locked into P (Park). Shifting out of Park
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. The vehicle has an electronic shift
Torque Lock lock release system. The shift lock
Do not leave the vehicle when the
If you are parking on a hill and you release is designed to:
engine is running. If you have left
do not shift into P (Park) properly, . Prevent ignition key removal
the engine running, the vehicle
the weight of the vehicle may put unless the shift lever is in
can move suddenly. You or others too much force on the parking pawl
could be injured. To be sure the P (Park) with the shift lever
in the transmission. You may find it button fully released.
vehicle will not move, even when difficult to pull the shift lever out of
you are on fairly level ground, P (Park). This is called “torque lock.” . Prevent movement of the shift
always set the parking brake and To prevent torque lock, set the lever out of P (Park), unless the
move the shift lever to P (Park). parking brake and then shift into ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
See Shifting Into Park on P (Park) properly before you leave ACCESSORY and the regular
page 9-18. If you are towing a the driver seat. To find out how, see brake pedal is applied.
trailer, see Driving Characteristics Shifting Into Park on page 9-18.
and Towing Tips on page 9-41.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
The shift lock release is always If you still cannot move the shift Engine Exhaust
functional except in the case of an lever from P (Park), consult your
uncharged or low voltage (less than dealer or a professional towing
9 volt) battery. service. { Warning
If the vehicle has an uncharged Engine exhaust contains carbon
battery or a battery with low voltage, Parking over Things monoxide (CO) which cannot be
try charging or jump starting the That Burn seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
battery. See Jump Starting on can cause unconsciousness and
page 10-66 for more information. { Warning even death.
To shift out of P (Park): Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
Things that can burn could touch
1. Apply the brake pedal. hot exhaust parts under the . The vehicle idles in areas
2. Press the shift lever button. vehicle and ignite. Do not park with poor ventilation (parking
3. Move the shift lever to the over papers, leaves, dry grass, garages, tunnels, deep snow
desired position. or other things that can burn. that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
If you still are unable to shift out of .
P (Park): The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
. The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
. The vehicle exhaust system
again. has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
3. Move the shift lever to the
(Continued)
desired position.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Warning (Continued)
Running the Vehicle Automatic
While Parked Transmission
. There are holes or openings
It is better not to park with the
in the vehicle body from
engine running.
damage or aftermarket
modifications that are not If the vehicle is left with the engine
completely sealed. running, follow the proper steps to
be sure the vehicle will not move.
If unusual fumes are detected or
See Shifting Into Park on page 9-18
if it is suspected that exhaust is and Engine Exhaust on page 9-20.
coming into the vehicle:
If parking on a hill and pulling a
. Drive it only with the windows trailer, see Driving Characteristics
completely down. and Towing Tips on page 9-41.
. Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the There are several different positions
engine running in an enclosed for the automatic transmission.
area such as a garage or a
P (Park): This position locks the
building that has no fresh air
wheels. It is the best position to use
ventilation. when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
the shift lever button before you can To rock the vehicle back and forth to
{ Warning shift from P (Park) when the ignition get out of snow, ice, or sand without
key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot damaging the transmission, see If
It is dangerous to get out of the shift out of P (Park), ease pressure the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9.
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully on the shift lever and push the shift
in P (Park) with the parking brake N (Neutral): In this position, the
lever all the way into P (Park) as engine does not connect with the
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. you maintain brake application. wheels. To restart the engine when
Do not leave the vehicle when the Then press the shift lever button the vehicle is already moving, use
engine is running. If you have left and move the shift lever into N (Neutral) only. Also, use
the engine running, the vehicle another gear. See Shifting out of N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
can move suddenly. You or others Park on page 9-19. being towed.
could be injured. To be sure the R (Reverse): Use this gear to
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
back up. { Warning
always set the parking brake and { Caution Shifting into a drive gear while the
move the shift lever to P (Park). engine is running at high speed is
See Shifting Into Park on Shifting to R (Reverse) while the dangerous. Unless your foot is
page 9-18 and Driving vehicle is moving forward could firmly on the brake pedal, the
Characteristics and Towing Tips damage the transmission. The vehicle could move very rapidly.
on page 9-41. repairs would not be covered by You could lose control and hit
the vehicle warranty. Shift to people or objects. Do not shift
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle into a drive gear while the engine
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
is stopped. is running at high speed.
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You have to fully apply the
regular brakes first and then press
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
M (Manual): This position allows instrument panel cluster. When

{ Caution you to change gears similar to a using the ERS mode a number will
manual transmission. If equipped, display in place of the D (Drive),
Shifting out of P (Park) or see Manual Mode on page 9-23. indicating the current gear range
N (Neutral) with the engine that has been selected.
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The { Caution
repairs would not be covered by Spinning the tires or holding the
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the vehicle in one place on a hill
engine is not running at high using only the accelerator pedal
speed when shifting the vehicle. may damage the transmission.
The repair will not be covered by
D (Drive): This position is for the vehicle warranty. If you are
normal driving with the automatic stuck, do not spin the tires. When
transmission. It provides the best stopping on a hill, use the brakes
fuel economy. If you need more to hold the vehicle in place.
power for passing, and you are:
. Going less than about 55 km/h Manual Mode
(35 mph), push the accelerator To use this feature:
pedal about halfway down. Electronic Range Select 1. Move the shift lever to
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph), (ERS) Mode M (Manual).
push the accelerator all the ERS mode allows you to choose the 2. Press the plus/minus button
way down. top-gear limit of the transmission located on the shift lever, to
Downshifting the transmission in and the vehicle's speed while increase or decrease the gear
slippery road conditions could result driving downhill or towing a trailer. range available.
in skidding. See “Skidding” under The vehicle has an electronic shift
Loss of Control on page 9-5. position indicator within the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
When you shift from D (Drive) to the vehicle, then press the − (Minus) Pressing the eco button by the shift
M (Manual), the transmission will button to the desired lower gear lever will engage fuel economy
shift to a pre-determined lower gear range. mode. When activated, the eco light
range. The highest gear available Automatic Engine Grade Braking is in the instrument cluster will come
for this pre-determined range is not available when the ERS is on. See Fuel Economy Light on
displayed in the DIC. See Driver active. It is available in D (Drive). page 5-21. Pressing the button a
Information Center (DIC) on While using the ERS, cruise control second time will turn fuel economy
page 5-24. The number displayed in can be used. mode off.
the DIC is the highest gear that the When fuel economy mode is on:
transmission will be allowed to
operate in. This means that all Fuel Economy Mode . The transmission will upshift
gears below that number are The vehicle may have a fuel sooner, and downshift later.
available. For example, when economy mode. When engaged, . The torque converter will lock–
4 (Fourth) is shown, 1 (First) through fuel economy mode can improve the up sooner, and stay on longer.
4 (Fourth) gears are automatically vehicle's fuel economy.
shifted by the vehicle. The
. The gas pedal will be less
transmission will not shift into sensitive.
5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is . The vehicle’s driving
used or you shift back into D (Drive). performance will be more
While in M (Manual), the conservative.
transmission will prevent shifting to . The vehicle's computers will
a lower gear range if the engine more aggressively shut off fuel
speed is too high. You have a brief to the engine under deceleration.
period of time to slow the vehicle.
If vehicle speed is not reduced
. The engine idle speed will be
within the time allowed, the lower lower.
gear range shift will not be Do not use fuel economy mode
completed. You must further slow while towing.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Drive Systems Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it

becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
Vehicles with this feature always System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels
send engine power to all four are slowing down. If one of the
This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
wheels. It is fully automatic, and wheels is about to stop rolling, the
electronic braking system that helps
adjusts itself as needed for road computer will separately work the
prevent a braking skid.
conditions. brakes at each wheel.
When the vehicle begins to drive
When using a compact spare tire on ABS can change the brake pressure
away, ABS checks itself.
an AWD vehicle, the system to each wheel, as required, faster
A momentary motor or clicking noise
automatically detects the compact than any driver could. This can help
might be heard while this test is
spare and disables AWD. To restore you steer around the obstacle while
going on, and it might even be
AWD operation and prevent braking hard.
noticed that the brake pedal moves
excessive wear on the system, a little. This is normal. As the brakes are applied, the
replace the compact spare with a computer keeps receiving updates
full-size tire as soon as possible. on wheel speed and controls
See Compact Spare Tire on braking pressure accordingly.
page 10-65.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
If there is a problem with ABS, this close to the vehicle in front of you,
warning light stays on. See Antilock there will not be enough time to
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light apply the brakes if that vehicle
on page 5-18.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
suddenly slows or stops. Always Parking Brake Center (DIC) messages. See Brake
leave enough room up ahead to System Messages on page 5-29. In
stop, even with ABS. case of insufficient electrical power,
the EPB cannot be applied or
Using ABS released.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold Before leaving the vehicle, check
the brake pedal down firmly and let the parking brake status light to
ABS work. You might hear the ABS insure the parking brake is applied.
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is EPB Apply
normal. The EPB can be applied any time
Braking in Emergencies the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
applied by momentarily lifting up on
ABS allows you to steer and brake the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
at the same time. In many the parking brake status light and
emergencies, steering can help The vehicle has an Electric Parking
Brake (EPB). The switch for the brake system warning light will be
more than even the very best on. While the brake is being applied,
braking. EPB is in the center console. The
EPB can always be activated, even the status light will flash until full
if the ignition is OFF. To prevent apply is reached. Once fully applied,
draining the battery, avoid repeated the DIC message PARK BRAKE
cycles of the EPB system when the SET will be displayed. If the status
engine is not running. light does not come on, or remains
flashing, have the vehicle serviced.
The system has a parking brake Do not drive the vehicle if the
status light and a parking brake parking brake status light is flashing.
warning light. See Electric Parking See your dealer. See Electric
Brake Light on page 5-17. There are Parking Brake Light on page 5-17.
also several Driver Information
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If the EPB is applied while the on the EPB switch and hold it in the If the parking brake warning light is
vehicle is in motion, a chime will up position. Full application of the on, the EPB has detected an error
sound, and the DIC message parking brake by the EPB system in another system and is operating
RELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCH may take a longer period of time with reduced functionality. To
will be displayed. The vehicle will than normal when this light is on. release the EPB when this light is
decelerate as long as the switch is Continue to hold the switch until the on, push down on the EPB switch
held in the up position. Releasing parking brake status light remains and hold it in the down position.
the EPB switch during deceleration on. If the parking brake warning light EPB release may take a longer
will release the parking brake. If the is on, see your dealer. period of time than normal when this
switch is held in the up position until If the EPB fails to apply, the rear light is on. Continue to hold the
the vehicle comes to a stop, the wheels should be blocked to switch until the parking brake status
EPB will remain applied. prevent vehicle movement. light is off. If the light is on, see your
If the parking brake status light dealer.
flashes continuously, the EPB is EPB Release
only partially applied or released, To release the EPB, place the { Caution
or there is a problem with the EPB. ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
The DIC message SERVICE ON/RUN position, apply and hold Driving with the parking brake on
PARKING BRAKE will be displayed. the brake pedal, and push down can overheat the brake system
If this light flashes continuously, momentarily on the EPB switch. and cause premature wear or
release the EPB, and attempt to If you attempt to release the EPB damage to brake system parts.
apply it again. If this light continues without the brake pedal applied, a Make sure that the parking brake
to flash, do not drive the vehicle. chime will sound, and the DIC is fully released and the brake
See your dealer. message STEP ON BRAKE TO warning light is off before driving.
If the parking brake warning light is RELEASE PARK BRAKE will be
on, the EPB has detected an error displayed. The EPB is released
in another system and is operating when the parking brake status light
with reduced functionality. To apply is off.
the EPB when this light is on, lift up
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Automatic EPB Release Ride Control Systems vehicle wheel brakes to assist the
driver in keeping the vehicle on the
The EPB will automatically release if
intended path.
the vehicle is running, placed into Traction Control/
gear and an attempt is made to If cruise control is being used and
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
Electronic Stability traction control or StabiliTrak begins
when the EPB is applied, to Control to limit wheel spin, cruise control will
preserve parking brake lining life. disengage. Cruise control may be
System Operation turned back on when road
For maximum EPB force when
The vehicle has a Traction Control conditions allow.
towing a trailer or parking on a hill,
System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an Both systems come on
pull the EPB switch twice. If you are
electronic stability control system. automatically when the vehicle is
towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
These systems help limit wheel slip started and begins to move. The
see Driving Characteristics and
and assist the driver in maintaining systems may be heard or felt while
Towing Tips on page 9-41.
control, especially on slippery road they are operating or while
conditions. performing diagnostic checks. This
TCS activates if it senses that any is normal and does not mean there
of the drive wheels are spinning or is a problem with the vehicle.
beginning to lose traction. When this It is recommended to leave both
happens, TCS applies the brakes to systems on for normal driving
the spinning wheels and reduces conditions, but it may be necessary
engine power to limit wheel spin. to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets
StabiliTrak activates when the stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
vehicle senses a difference between See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
the intended path and the direction page 9-9 and “Turning the Systems
the vehicle is actually traveling. Off and On” later in this section.
StabiliTrak selectively applies
braking pressure to any one of the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If d comes on and stays on:

{ Caution
1. Stop the vehicle.
Do not repeatedly brake or
2. Turn the engine off and wait
accelerate heavily when TCS is
15 seconds.
off. The vehicle driveline could be
3. Start the engine. damaged.
The indicator light for both systems
is in the instrument cluster. This Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
light will: and stays on, the vehicle may need To turn off only TCS, press and
. Flash when TCS is limiting
more time to diagnose the problem. release the g button. The
If the condition persists, see your appropriate message displays in the
wheel spin.
dealer. DIC. To turn TCS on again, press
. Flash when StabiliTrak is
activated. Turning the Systems Off and release the g button. The
and On appropriate message displays in
. Turn on and stay on when either the DIC.
system is not working.
If TCS is limiting wheel spin when
If either system fails to turn on or to
the g button is pressed, the system
activate, a message displays in the
will not turn off until the wheels stop
Driver Information Center (DIC), and
spinning.
d comes on and stays on to
indicate that the system is inactive To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,
and is not assisting the driver in The button for TCS and StabiliTrak press and hold the g button until
maintaining control. The vehicle is is on the instrument panel. the StabiliTrak Off light g comes on
safe to drive, but driving should be
adjusted accordingly. and stays on in the instrument
cluster. To turn TCS and StabiliTrak
on again, press and release the g
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
button. The StabiliTrak Off light g in Cruise Control Warning (Continued)

the instrument cluster turns off. The
appropriate message displays in With cruise control, the vehicle can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h Cruise control can be dangerous
the DIC. on slippery roads. On such roads,
(25 mph) or more without keeping
Adding accessories can affect the your foot on the accelerator. Cruise fast changes in tire traction can
vehicle performance. See control does not work at speeds cause excessive wheel slip, and
Accessories and Modifications on below 40 km/h (25 mph). you could lose control. Do not use
page 10-2. cruise control on slippery roads.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
Brake Pedal Override control shuts off.
On vehicles with the StabiliTrak® Setting Cruise Control
This vehicle has this feature that
limits engine torque when the brake feature, the system may begin to
pedal is applied. If there is one foot limit wheel spin while you are using
on the brake pedal and the other cruise control. If this happens, the
foot on the accelerator, the engine cruise control will automatically
rpm will only climb to slightly more disengage. See Traction Control/
than idle speed. Electronic Stability Control on
page 9-28.
This feature is enabled at vehicle
start. Press and release the TCS/
StabiliTrak button g to disable or { Warning
enable this feature and TCS. The Cruise control can be dangerous
appropriate message will display on where you cannot drive safely at
the DIC. See Ride Control System a steady speed. Do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or
in heavy traffic.
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
E (On/Off): Press to turn the 2. Get to the speed desired. Increasing Speed While Using
cruise control system on and off. 3. Move the thumbwheel down and Cruise Control
The indicator light on the button release it. If the cruise control system is
turns on or off. already activated:
4. Remove foot from the
RES+ (Resume/Accel): Move the accelerator. . Move the thumbwheel up toward
thumbwheel up briefly to make the RES+ and hold it until the
vehicle resume to a previously set When the cruise control has been
set to the desired speed, a green vehicle accelerates to the
speed or hold upwards to desired speed, and then release
accelerate. If cruise control is cruise control indicator appears on
the instrument cluster. the switch.
already active, use to increase
vehicle speed.
. To increase the speed in small
Resuming a Set Speed increments, move the
−SET (Set/Coast): Move the If the cruise control is set at a thumbwheel up toward RES+
thumbwheel down briefly to set the desired speed and then the brakes briefly and then release it. Each
speed and activate cruise control. are applied, the cruise control is time this is done, the vehicle
If cruise control is already active, disengaged without erasing the set goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)
use to decrease speed. speed from memory. The indicator faster.
Setting Cruise Control light on the instrument cluster goes
out when cruise control is no longer Reducing Speed While Using
If the cruise control is on when not engaged. Cruise Control
in use, it could get bumped and go If the cruise control system is
into cruise when not desired. Keep Once the vehicle reaches about
already activated:
the cruise control switch off when 40 km/h (25 mph) or greater, move
cruise is not being used. the thumbwheel up toward RES+ . Move the thumbwheel toward
briefly. The vehicle returns to the −SET and hold until the desired
1. Press E to turn cruise control previously set speed. lower speed is reached, then
on. The indicator light on the release it.
button comes on.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13

. To slow down in small downhill, you might have to brake or
increments, move the shift to a lower gear to maintain the
Driver Assistance
thumbwheel toward −SET briefly. vehicle's speed. For some vehicles Systems
Each time this is done, the the transmission may automatically
vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h downshift when going down hills to Ultrasonic Parking Assist
(1 mph) slower. help maintain the vehicle's speed.
When the brakes are applied, the If available, the Ultrasonic Rear
Passing Another Vehicle While Parking Assist (URPA) system
Using Cruise Control cruise control shuts off.
assists the driver with parking and
Use the accelerator pedal to Ending Cruise Control avoiding objects while in
increase the vehicle speed. When There are two ways to disengage R (Reverse). URPA operates at
you take your foot off the pedal, the the cruise control: speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
vehicle slows down to the previous The sensors on the rear bumper are
set cruise control speed. While
. Step lightly on the brake pedal; used to detect objects up to
pressing the accelerator pedal or when cruise control disengages, 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and
shortly following the release to the indicator light on the at least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground
override cruise control, briefly instrument cluster goes out. and below liftgate level. Detection
moving the thumbwheel toward – . Press E to turn off the cruise distances may be less during
SET will result in cruise control set control system. warmer or humid weather.
to the current vehicle speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Erasing Speed Memory { Warning
The cruise control set speed
How well the cruise control works memory is erased when the cruise The URPA system does not
on hills depends upon the vehicle's control or the ignition is turned off. detect children, pedestrians,
speed, load, and the steepness of bicyclists, animals, or objects
the hills. When going up steep hills, below the bumper or that are too
you might have to step on the close or too far from the vehicle.
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle's speed. When going (Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Turning the System On and Off ice, and slush. For cleaning
Warning (Continued) instructions, see Exterior Care
The system can be disabled through
on page 10-74.
It is not available at speeds the Driver Information Center (DIC).
greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To See “Park Assist” under Driver . The park assist sensors are
prevent injury, death, or vehicle Information Center (DIC) on covered by frost or ice. Frost or
damage, even with URPA, always page 5-24 for more information. ice can form around and behind
check the area around the vehicle the sensors and may not always
Turn off URPA when towing a trailer.
and check all mirrors before be seen; this can occur after
URPA defaults to the on setting washing the vehicle in cold
backing.
each time the vehicle is started. weather. The message may not
clear until the frost or ice has
How the System Works When the System Does Not melted.
Seem to Work Properly
URPA comes on automatically when . A trailer was attached to the
the shift lever is moved into The following messages may be vehicle, or an object was
R (Reverse). A single beep sounds displayed on the DIC: hanging out of the liftgate during
to indicate the system is working. SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this the last drive cycle. Once the
message occurs, take the vehicle to object is removed, URPA will
An obstacle is indicated by audible
your dealer to repair the system. return to normal operation.
beeps. The interval between the
beeps becomes shorter as the PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE . A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. OWNERS MANUAL: This vehicle.
When the distance is less than message can occur under the . The bumper is damaged. Take
30 cm (12 in) the beeping is following conditions: the vehicle to your dealer to
continuous for five seconds. repair the system.
. The ultrasonic sensors are not
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13

. Other conditions, such as . Reach a vehicle speed of
vibrations from a jackhammer or Warning (Continued) 8 km/h (5 mph).
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck, are affecting vehicle using only the RVC Rear Vision Camera Location
system performance. screen, during longer, higher
speed backing maneuvers,
Rear Vision or where there could be cross
Camera (RVC) traffic. Failure to use proper care
before backing may result in
The vehicle may have an RVC injury, death, or vehicle damage.
system. Read this entire section Always check behind and around
before using it. the vehicle before backing.
The RVC can assist the driver when
backing up by displaying a view of An image appears on the radio
the area behind the vehicle. screen with the message Check
Surroundings for Safety when the
{ Warning vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
The camera is above the license
The radio screen goes to the
The RVC system does not display previous screen after approximately plate.
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, 10 seconds once the vehicle is The area displayed by the camera is
animals, or any other object shifted out of R (Reverse). limited.
located outside the camera's field
To see the previous screen sooner, It does not display objects that are
of view, below the bumper,
do one of the following: close to either corner or under the
or under the vehicle. Perceived bumper and can vary depending on
distances may be different from . Press a hard key on the
infotainment system. vehicle orientation or road
actual distances. Do not back the conditions. Displayed images may
. Shift into P (Park).
(Continued) be farther or closer than they
appear.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
The following illustrations show the 2. Corner of the rear bumper. Fuel
field of view that the camera
provides. When the System Does Not Use of the recommended fuel is an
Seem To Work Properly important part of the proper
The RVC system may not work maintenance of this vehicle. When
properly or display a clear image if: driving in the U.S., to help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum
. It is dark. vehicle performance, we
. The sun or the beam of recommend using TOP TIER
headamps is shining directly into Detergent Gasolines. See
the camera lens. www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasolines.
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
1. View displayed by the camera. . The back of the vehicle is in an
accident. The position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer.
. There are extreme temperature
changes.
1. View displayed by the camera.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap, Prohibited Fuels methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
E85 or FlexFuel can be used in the Gasolines containing oxygenates, tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use
vehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel on such as ethers and ethanol, as well gasolines with MMT as they can
page 9-37. as reformulated gasolines are reduce spark plug life and affect
available in some cities. If these emission control system
Recommended Fuel gasolines comply with the performance. The malfunction
previously described specification, indicator lamp may turn on. If this
Use regular unleaded gasoline with occurs, see your dealer for service.
a posted octane rating of 87 or then they are acceptable to use.
higher. If the octane rating is less However, E85 and other fuels
than 87, an audible knocking noise containing more than 15% ethanol Gasoline Specifications
may be heard. If this occurs, use a must be used only in FlexFuel At a minimum, gasoline should meet
gasoline rated at 87 octane or vehicles. ASTM specification D 4814. Some
higher as soon as possible. If heavy gasolines contain an
knocking is heard when using { Caution octane-enhancing additive called
gasoline with a higher octane rating, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
the engine needs service. Do not use fuel containing tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
methanol. It can corrode metal against the use of gasolines
Use of Seasonal Fuels parts in the fuel system and also containing MMT. See “Prohibited
Use summer and winter fuels in the damage plastic and rubber parts. Fuels" in Recommended Fuel on
appropriate season. Driving or That damage would not be page 9-36.
starting could be affected if the covered under the vehicle
incorrect fuel is used. Drive the warranty. California Fuel
vehicle with the engine running until
the fuel is a half tank or less, then
Requirements
refuel with the current seasonal fuel. Some gasolines that are not If the vehicle is certified to meet
reformulated for low emissions can California Emissions Standards, it is
contain an octane-enhancing designed to operate on fuels that
additive called meet California specifications. See
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
the underhood emission control recommended. Costly repairs All other vehicles should use only
label. If this fuel is not available in caused by use of improper fuel the unleaded gasoline as described
states adopting California Emissions would not be covered by the vehicle in Recommended Fuel on
Standards, the vehicle will operate warranty. page 9-36.
satisfactorily on fuels meeting The use of E85 or FlexFuel is
federal specifications, but emission Fuel Additives encouraged when the vehicle is
control system performance might designed to use it. E85 or FlexFuel
be affected. The malfunction To keep fuel systems clean, TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is is made from renewable sources.
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle may not pass a smog-check recommended. See Fuel on To help locate fuel stations that
test. See Malfunction Indicator page 9-35. carry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.
Lamp on page 5-14. If this occurs, If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is Department of Energy has an
return to your authorized dealer for not available, one bottle of Fuel alternative fuel website. See
diagnosis. If it is determined that the System Treatment PLUS, part www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/
condition is caused by the type of number 88861013, added to the fuel stations.
fuel used, repairs may not be tank at every engine oil change, can E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTM
covered by the vehicle warranty. help. Fuel System Treatment PLUS Specification D 5798 or CAN/
is the only gasoline additive CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not use
Fuels in Foreign recommended by General Motors. the fuel if the ethanol content is
Countries It is available at your dealer. greater than 85%. Fuel mixtures that
Do not use additives with E85 or do not meet ASTM or CGSB
If planning to drive in countries specifications can affect driveability
FlexFuel.
outside the U.S. or Canada, the and could cause the malfunction
proper fuel might be hard to find. indicator lamp to come on.
Check regional auto club or fuel E85 or FlexFuel
retail brand websites for availability Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can
in the country where driving. Never use either unleaded gasoline or fuel
use leaded gasoline, fuel containing containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
methanol, or any other fuel not
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
The starting characteristics of E85

or FlexFuel make it unsuitable for { Caution Warning (Continued)
use when temperatures fall below
−18°C (0°F). Use gasoline or add Do not use fuel containing . Keep sparks, flames, and
gasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel. methanol. It can corrode metal smoking materials away
parts in the fuel system and also from fuel.
Because E85 or FlexFuel has less damage plastic and rubber parts.
energy per liter (gallon) than
. Do not leave the fuel pump
That damage would not be unattended.
gasoline, the vehicle will need to be covered under the vehicle
refilled more often. See Filling the . Do not reenter the vehicle
warranty.
Tank on page 9-38. while pumping fuel.
. Keep children away from the
{ Caution Filling the Tank fuel pump and never let
children pump fuel.
Some additives are not
compatible with E85 or FlexFuel
{ Warning . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
and can harm the vehicle's fuel cap is opened too quickly.
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn This spray can happen if the
system. Do not add anything to violently and can cause injury or
E85 or FlexFuel. Damage caused tank is nearly full, and is
death. more likely in hot weather.
by additives would not be covered . To help avoid injuries to you Open the fuel cap slowly and
by the vehicle warranty. wait for any hiss noise to stop
and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the fuel then unscrew the cap all
pump island. the way
. Turn off the engine when
refueling.
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not

top off or overfill the tank and wait a { Caution
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the If a new fuel cap is needed, be
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted sure to get the right type of cap
surfaces as soon as possible. See from your dealer. The wrong type
Exterior Care on page 10-74. of fuel cap might not fit properly,
might cause the malfunction
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it indicator lamp to light, and could
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
damage the fuel tank and
the cap is fully installed. The
emissions system. See
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
improperly installed. This would page 5-14.
The tethered fuel cap is located
behind a hinged fuel door on the allow fuel to evaporate into the
driver side of the vehicle. On some atmosphere. See Malfunction
vehicles with Remote Keyless Entry, Indicator Lamp on page 5-14.
the fuel door is locked and unlocked
when the vehicle doors are locked { Warning
and unlocked.
If a fire starts while you are
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel refueling, do not remove the
cap has a spring in it; if the cap is nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
released too soon, it will spring back shutting off the pump or by
to the right. To avoid fuel contact on notifying the station attendant.
the painted surface of the vehicle Leave the area immediately.
when filling the fuel tank, place the
tethered cap on the fuel filler door.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Filling a Portable Fuel Warning (Continued) Trailer Towing

Container
keep it in contact with the fill General Towing
{ Warning opening until filling is
complete.
Information
Filling a portable fuel container Only use towing equipment that has
. Fill the container no more
while it is in the vehicle can cause been designed for the vehicle.
than 95% full to allow for
fuel vapors that can ignite either Contact your dealer or trailering
expansion.
by static electricity or other dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke, light matches, the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read
means. You or others could be
or use lighters while the entire section before towing a
badly burned and the vehicle pumping fuel. trailer.
could be damaged. Always:
. Avoid using cell phones or For towing a disabled vehicle, see
. Use approved fuel other electronic devices. Towing the Vehicle on page 10-70.
containers. For towing the vehicle behind
. Remove the container from another vehicle such as a motor
the vehicle, trunk, or pickup home, see Recreational Vehicle
bed before filling. Towing on page 10-71.
. Place the container on the
ground.
. Place the nozzle inside the fill
opening of the container
before dispensing fuel, and
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Driving Characteristics Towing a trailer requires a certain

and Towing Tips
{ Warning amount of experience. The
combination you are driving is
When towing a trailer, exhaust longer and not as responsive as the
Driving with a Trailer gases may collect at the rear of vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
When towing a trailer: the vehicle and enter if the the handling and braking of the rig
. Become familiar with the state liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most before setting out for the open road.
and local laws that apply window is open.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
specifically to trailer towing. When towing a trailer: parts and attachments, safety
. Do not tow a trailer during the . Do not drive with the liftgate, chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
first 800 km (500 mi), to prevent trunk/hatch, or rear-most tires and mirrors. If the trailer has
damage to the engine, axle or window open. electric brakes, start the
other parts. combination moving and then apply
. Fully open the air outlets on the trailer brake controller by hand
. Then, during the first 800 km or under the instrument to be sure the brakes work.
(500 mi) trailer towing, do not panel.
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and During the trip, check occasionally
do not make starts at full throttle.
. Also adjust the Climate to be sure that the load is secure
Control system to a setting and the lamps and any trailer
. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive) that brings in only outside air. brakes still work.
but M (Manual Mode) is See “Climate Control
recommended. See Manual Systems” in the Index. Towing with a Stability Control
Mode on page 9-23. Use a lower System
gear if the transmission shifts For more information about
too often. Carbon Monoxide, see Engine When towing, the sound of the
Exhaust on page 9-20. stability control system might be
. Turn off Park Assist when heard. The system is reacting to the
towing. vehicle movement caused by the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
trailer, which mainly occurs during Making Turns lamps also flash, telling other
cornering. This is normal when drivers the vehicle is turning,
towing heavier trailers. { Caution changing lanes or stopping.
Following Distance When towing a trailer, the arrows on
Making very sharp turns while the instrument cluster flash for turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the trailering could cause the trailer to even if the bulbs on the trailer are
vehicle ahead as you would when come in contact with the vehicle. burned out. Check occasionally to
driving the vehicle without a trailer. The vehicle could be damaged. be sure the trailer bulbs are still
This can help to avoid situations Avoid making very sharp turns working.
that require heavy braking and while trailering.
sudden turns. Driving on Grades
Passing When turning with a trailer, make Reduce speed and shift to a lower
wider turns than normal so the gear before starting down a long or
More passing distance is needed steep downgrade. If the
when towing a trailer. Because the trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other transmission is not shifted down, the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go brakes might have to be used so
farther beyond the passed vehicle objects. Use the turn signal well in
advance and avoid jerky or sudden much that they would get hot and no
before returning to the lane. longer work well.
maneuvers.
Backing Up The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Turn Signals When Towing a Use a lower gear if the transmission
Hold the bottom of the steering Trailer
wheel with one hand. To move the shifts too often.
trailer to the left, move your hand to The turn signal indicators on the When towing at high altitude on
the left. To move the trailer to the instrument cluster flash whenever steep uphill grades, engine coolant
right, move your hand to the right. signaling a turn or lane change. boils at a lower temperature than at
Always back up slowly and, Properly hooked up, the trailer normal altitudes. If the engine is
if possible, have someone turned off immediately after towing
guide you. at high altitude on steep uphill
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
grades, the vehicle could show If parking the rig on a hill: 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
signs similar to engine overheating. 1. Press the brake pedal, but do clear of the chocks.
To avoid this, let the engine run not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 4. Stop and have someone pick up
while parked, preferably on level the wheels into the curb if facing and store the chocks.
ground, with the transmission in downhill or into traffic if facing
P (Park) for a few minutes before uphill. Maintenance When Trailer
turning the engine off. If the Towing
overheat warning comes on, see 2. Have someone place chocks
Engine Overheating on page 10-18. under the trailer wheels. The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See the
Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance Schedule on
place, release the brake pedal page 11-2. Things that are
until the chocks absorb the load.
{ Warning 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
especially important in trailer
operation are automatic
Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
the trailer attached can be into P (Park). lubricant, belts, cooling system and
dangerous. If something goes brake system. Inspect these before
5. Release the brake pedal.
wrong, the rig could start to move. and during the trip.
People can be injured, and both Leaving After Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all
the vehicle and the trailer can be 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
damaged. When possible, always while you:
park the rig on a flat surface. . Start the engine.
. Shift into a gear.
. Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Engine Cooling When Trailer Weight of the Trailer

Towing How heavy can a trailer safely be?
The cooling system may temporarily Speed, altitude, road grades,
overheat during severe operating outside temperature, special
conditions. See Engine Overheating equipment, and the amount of
on page 10-18. tongue weight the vehicle can carry
must be considered. See “Weight of
Trailer Towing the Trailer Tongue” later in this
Three important considerations section for more information.
have to do with weight: Maximum trailer weight is calculated
. The weight of the trailer assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
. The weight of the trailer tongue required trailering equipment. The
. The total weight on the vehicle's weight of additional optional
tires equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Use the following chart to determine
how much the vehicle can weigh,
based upon the vehicle model and
options.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. *GCWR

2WD – 2.4L L4 Engine 3.23 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 650 kg (5,840 lbs)
AWD – 3.0L V6 Engine 3.23 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs)
2WD – 3.0L V6 Engine 3.23 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 549 kg (7,820 lbs)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
information or advice. the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
Weight of the Trailer Tongue be carrying that weight, too. See
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options, If a weight-carrying hitch or a
equipment, passengers or cargo in weight-distributing hitch is being
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue used, the trailer tongue (1) should
weight the vehicle can carry, which weigh 10-15 percent of the total
will also reduce the trailer weight the loaded trailer weight (2).
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
After loading the trailer, weigh the Total Weight on the Vehicle's bumper-type hitches to it. Use
trailer and then the tongue, Tires only a frame-mounted hitch that
separately, to see if the weights are does not attach to the bumper.
proper. If they are not, adjustments Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These . Will any holes be made in the
might be made by moving some body of the vehicle when the
items around in the trailer. numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Vehicle trailer hitch is installed? If there
Trailering may be limited by the Load Limits on page 9-10 for more are, then be sure to seal the
vehicle's ability to carry tongue information. Do not go over the holes when the hitch is removed.
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause GVW limit for the vehicle, or the If the holes are not sealed, dirt,
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR GAWR, including the weight of the water, and deadly carbon
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or trailer tongue. If using a weight monoxide (CO) from the exhaust
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle distributing hitch, do not go over the may get into the vehicle. See
Weight Rating). The effect of rear axle limit before applying the Engine Exhaust on page 9-20.
additional weight may reduce the weight distribution spring bars.
trailering capacity more than the Safety Chains
total of the additional weight. Towing Equipment Always attach chains between the
It is important that the vehicle does vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
not exceed any of its ratings — Hitches safety chains under the tongue of
GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum It is important to have the correct the trailer to help prevent the tongue
Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large from contacting the road if it
The only way to be sure it is not trucks going by, and rough roads becomes separated from the hitch.
exceeding any of these ratings is to are a few reasons why the right Always leave just enough slack so
weigh the vehicle and trailer. hitch is needed. the rig can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
. The rear bumper on the vehicle
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Trailer Brakes Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
A loaded trailer that weighs more Add-Ons vehicle is not operating.
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to
have its own brake system that is The vehicle has an airbag system.
adequate for the weight of the Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything
trailer. Be sure to read and follow Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see
the instructions for the trailer brakes Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
so they are installed, adjusted and
maintained properly.
{ Caution Vehicle on page 3-28 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Some electrical equipment can Vehicle on page 3-28.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not try to tap into the damage the vehicle or cause
vehicle's hydraulic brake system. components to not work and
If you do, both brake systems will would not be covered by the
not work well, or at all. warranty. Always check with your
dealer before adding electrical
equipment.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
2 NOTES
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-1
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24

Vehicle Care Automatic Transmission Shift
Electrical System
Electrical System
Lock Control Function Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Fuses and Circuit
General Information Ignition Transmission Lock Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Engine Compartment Fuse
Accessories and Park Brake and P (Park) Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25 Instrument Panel Fuse
Vehicle Checks Wiper Blade Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Doing Your Own Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Wheels and Tires
Headlamp Aiming Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Engine Compartment All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Bulb Replacement Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-39
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Tire Terminology and
Automatic Transmission Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Front Turn Signal and Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Stoplamps, and Back-Up Tire Pressure Monitor
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-20 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-29 Tire Pressure Monitor
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New General Information not covered under the terms of the
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 vehicle warranty and may affect
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 For service and parts needs, visit remaining warranty coverage for
Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive affected parts.
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 genuine parts and trained and
GM Accessories are designed to
Uniform Tire Quality supported service people.
complement and function with other
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
systems on the vehicle. See your
Wheel Alignment and Tire Accessories and dealer to accessorize the vehicle
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56
Modifications using genuine GM Accessories
installed by a dealer technician.
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Adding non‐dealer accessories or
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 making modifications to the vehicle Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 can affect vehicle performance and Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-65 safety, including such things as page 3-28.
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
Jump Starting handling, emissions systems,
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 aerodynamics, durability, and
Towing the Vehicle electronic systems like antilock
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-70 brakes, traction control, and stability
Recreational Vehicle control. These accessories or
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
Appearance Care by the vehicle warranty.
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Damage to vehicle components
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
resulting from modifications or the
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
installation or use of non‐GM
certified parts, including control
module or software modifications, is
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-3
Vehicle Checks Keep a record with all parts receipts

and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed.
Doing Your Own
Service Work { Caution
{ Warning Even small amounts of
contamination can cause damage
It can be dangerous to work on to vehicle systems. Do not allow
your vehicle if you do not have contaminants to contact the fluids,
the proper knowledge, service reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
manual, tools, or parts. Always
follow owner manual procedures 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
and consult the service manual Hood lift up on the secondary hood
for your vehicle before doing any To open the hood: release lever.
service work.
3. Lift the hood.
To close the hood:
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service 1. Before closing the hood, be sure
manual. It tells you much more that all the filler caps are
about how to service the vehicle properly installed.
than this manual can. 2. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in)
1. Pull the handle with this symbol. above the vehicle and release it
This vehicle has an airbag system.
It is located below the instrument so it fully latches.
Before attempting to do your own
panel to the left of the steering
service work, see Airbag System 3. Check to make sure the hood is
wheel.
Check on page 3-29. firmly closed. Repeat the
process if necessary.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-4 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4L L4 Engine
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-5
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 10. Engine Coolant Surge Tank

page 10-12. and Pressure Cap. See
2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. “Checking Coolant” under
See Power Steering Fluid on Engine Coolant on page 10-14.
page 10-20. 11. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.
3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of See Jump Starting on
View). See Cooling System on page 10-66.
page 10-13. 12. Engine Compartment Fuse
4. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Block on page 10-31.
View). See “Checking Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on
page 10-8.
5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
Oil on page 10-8.
6. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10-20.
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Brakes on page 10-21.
8. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10-66.
9. Battery on page 10-23.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-6 Vehicle Care
3.0L V6 Engine
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 9. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. Engine Cover

page 10-12. See Jump Starting on
2. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of page 10-66.
View). See “When to Add Engine 10. Battery on page 10-23.
Oil” under Engine Oil on 11. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.
page 10-8. See “Checking Coolant” under
3. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Engine Coolant on page 10-14.
(Out of View). See Power 12. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.
Steering Fluid on page 10-20. See Jump Starting on
4. Engine Cover. See Engine page 10-66.
Cover on page 10-7. 13. Engine Compartment Fuse
5. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Block on page 10-31.
View). See “Checking Engine Engine Cover (3.0L V6)
Oil” under Engine Oil on
page 10-8. 1. Oil Fill Cap
6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of 2. Engine Cover Bolt
View). See Cooling System on 3. Engine Cover
page 10-13.
To remove:
7. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer 1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on 2. Remove the engine cover
page 10-20. bolt (2).
8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See 3. Raise the engine cover (3) to
Brakes on page 10-21. release it from the retainers.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-8 Vehicle Care
4. Lift and remove the engine

. Always dispose of engine oil
cover. properly. See “What to Do with { Warning
Used Oil” in this section.
5. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstall The engine oil dipstick handle
the engine cover. Checking Engine Oil may be hot; it could burn you.
It is a good idea to check the engine Use a towel or glove to touch the
Engine Oil oil level at each fuel fill. In order to dipstick handle.
To ensure proper engine get an accurate reading, the vehicle
performance and long life, careful must be on level ground. The 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
attention must be paid to engine oil. engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. with a paper towel or cloth, then
Following these simple, but See Engine Compartment Overview push it back in all the way.
important steps will help protect on page 10-4 for the location of the Remove it again, keeping the tip
your investment: engine oil dipstick. down, and check the level.
. Always use engine oil approved Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential: When to Add Engine Oil
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See 1. If the engine has been running
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” recently, turn off the engine and
in this section. allow several minutes for the oil
. Check the engine oil level to drain back into the oil pan.
regularly and maintain the Checking the oil level too soon
proper oil level. See “Checking after engine shutoff will not
Engine Oil” and “When to Add provide an accurate oil level
Engine Oil” in this section. reading. If the oil is below the MIN
(minimum) mark, add 1 L (1 qt) of
. Change the engine oil at the the recommended oil and then
appropriate time. See Engine Oil recheck the level. See “Selecting
Life System on page 10-10. the Right Engine Oil” in this section
for an explanation of what kind of oil
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-9
to use. For engine oil crankcase Add enough oil to put the level
capacity, see Capacities and somewhere in the proper operating
Specifications on page 12-2. range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
{ Caution Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Do not add too much oil. Oil Selecting the right engine oil
levels above or below the depends on both the proper oil { Caution
acceptable operating range specification and viscosity grade.
shown on the dipstick are harmful See Recommended Fluids and Failure to use the recommended
to the engine. If you find that you Lubricants on page 11-12. engine oil can result in engine
have an oil level above the damage not covered by the
Specification
operating range, i.e., the engine vehicle warranty. Check with your
has so much oil that the oil level Use and ask for licensed engine oils dealer or service provider on
gets above the upper mark that with the dexos1® approved whether the oil is approved to the
certification mark. Engine oils dexos1 specification.
shows the proper operating
meeting the requirements for the
range, the engine could be
vehicle should have the dexos1
damaged. You should drain out approved certification mark. This Viscosity Grade
the excess oil or limit driving of certification mark indicates that the SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
the vehicle and seek a service oil has been approved to the dexos1 grade for the vehicle. Do not use
professional to remove the specification. other viscosity grade oils such as
excess amount of oil. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
See Engine Compartment Overview area of extreme cold, where the
on page 10-4 for the location of the temperature falls below −29°C
engine oil fill cap. (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
used. An oil of this viscosity grade
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-10 Vehicle Care
will provide easier cold starting for skin and nails with soap and water, the oil life system to work properly,
the engine at extremely low or a good hand cleaner. Wash or the system must be reset every time
temperatures. When selecting an oil properly dispose of clothing or rags the oil is changed.
of the appropriate viscosity grade, containing used engine oil. See the When the system has calculated
always select an oil of the correct manufacturer's warnings about the that oil life has been diminished, it
specification. See “Specification” use and disposal of oil products. indicates that an oil change is
earlier in this section for more Used oil can be a threat to the necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
information. environment. If you change your OIL SOON message displays. See
Engine Oil Additives/Engine own oil, be sure to drain all the oil Engine Oil Messages on page 5-31.
Oil Flushes from the filter before disposal. Never If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
dispose of oil by putting it in the message displays, change the oil as
Do not add anything to the oil. The trash or pouring it on the ground, soon as possible within the next
recommended oils with the dexos into sewers, or into streams or 1 000 km (600 mi). If the CHANGE
specification and displaying the bodies of water. Recycle it by taking ENGINE OIL NOW message
dexos certification mark are all that it to a place that collects used oil. displays, change the oil as soon as
is needed for good performance and possible. It is possible that, if driving
engine protection. Engine Oil Life System under the best conditions, the oil life
Engine oil system flushes are not system might indicate that an oil
recommended and could cause When to Change Engine Oil change is not necessary for up to a
engine damage not covered by the This vehicle has a computer system year. The engine oil and filter must
vehicle warranty. that indicates when to change the be changed at least once a year
engine oil and filter. This is based and, at this time, the system must
What to Do with Used Oil on a combination of factors which be reset. Your dealer has trained
Used engine oil contains certain include engine revolutions, engine service people who will perform this
elements that can be unhealthy for temperature, and miles driven. work and reset the system. It is also
your skin and could even cause Based on driving conditions, the important to check the oil regularly
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on mileage at which an oil change is
your skin for very long. Clean your indicated can vary considerably. For
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-11
over the course of an oil drain 2. Press V for five seconds to occurs, take the vehicle to the
interval and keep it at the proper reset the oil life at 100%. dealer and have it repaired as soon
level. as possible.
Be careful not to reset the oil life
If the system is ever reset display accidentally at any time Change the fluid and filter at the
accidentally, the oil must be other than after the oil is intervals listed in Maintenance
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) changed. It cannot be reset Schedule on page 11-2, and be sure
since the last oil change. accurately until the next oil to use the transmission fluid listed in
Remember to reset the oil life change. Recommended Fluids and
system whenever the oil is changed. Lubricants on page 11-12.
The oil life system can also be reset
How to Reset the Engine Oil as follows:
Life System { Caution
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN
Reset the system whenever the with the engine off. Use of the incorrect automatic
engine oil is changed so that the 2. Fully press and release the transmission fluid may damage
system can calculate the next accelerator pedal three times the vehicle, and the damage may
engine oil change. To reset the within five seconds. not be covered by the vehicle
system: warranty. Always use the
If the OIL LIFE REMAINING value is automatic transmission fluid listed
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING not 100%, the system needs to be
on the DIC. See Driver in Recommended Fluids and
reset again. Lubricants on page 11-12.
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5-24 and Engine Oil
Automatic Transmission
For the 2.4L L4 and 3.0L
Fluid V6 engines, the transmission fluid
It is not necessary to check the will not reach the end of the dipstick
transmission fluid level. unless the transmission is at
A transmission fluid leak is the only operating temperature. If you need
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-12 Vehicle Care
to check the transmission fluid level, To inspect or replace: 3. Remove the screws (3) on the
please take the vehicle to your sides of the air cleaner cover
dealer. assembly.
4. Turn the cover upward to
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter disengage the cover hinges.
See Engine Compartment Overview 5. Lift and remove the air cleaner
on page 10-4 for the location of the cover assembly and air filter
engine air cleaner/filter. element.
When to Inspect the Engine Air 6. Inspect or replace the air filter
Cleaner/Filter element.
Inspect and replace the air cleaner/ If the air filter element is dirty,
filter at the scheduled maintenance you should replace it.
intervals. See the Maintenance 2.4L L4 Engine Shown, 3.0L Wipe all dust from inside of the
Schedule on page 11-2. If driving in V6 Engine Similar housing and inspect the air
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the 1. Electrical Connector cleaner and air outlet duct for
filter at each engine oil change. cracks, cuts, and deterioration.
2. Air Duct Clamp
How to Inspect the Engine Air The air outlet duct must be
3. Screws replaced if damaged.
Cleaner/Filter
1. Disconnect the electrical 7. Reverse Steps 1–5 to reinstall
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
connector (1). the engine air cleaner/filter cover
remove the filter from the vehicle
2. Loosen the air duct clamp (2) on and air duct hose.
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter the air duct hose. Disconnect the
remains covered with dirt, a new air duct hose.
filter is required. Never use
compressed air to clean the filter.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-13
Cooling System
{ Warning
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
3.0L V6 Engine
{ Caution 2.4L L4 Engine 1. Engine Fans (Out of View)
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt 1. Engine Fan (Out of View) 2. Coolant Surge Tank and
can easily get into the engine, Pressure Cap
2. Coolant Surge Tank and
which could damage it. Always Pressure Cap
have the air cleaner/filter in place { Warning
when you are driving.
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-14 Vehicle Care
If the coolant inside the coolant If the engine is overheating, the fan Engine Coolant
surge tank is hot, do not do anything should be running. If it is not, the
else until it cools down. The vehicle vehicle needs service. Turn off the The cooling system in the vehicle is
should be parked on a level surface. engine. filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
The coolant level should be remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
between the MIN and MAX lines. { Caution 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
If it is not, you may have a leak at occurs first, if only DEX-COOL
the radiator hoses, heater hoses, Running the engine without
coolant may cause damage or a extended life coolant is added.
radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system. fire. Vehicle damage would not be The following explains the cooling
covered by the vehicle warranty. system and how to add coolant
when it is low. If there is a problem
{ Warning with engine overheating, see Engine
Heater and radiator hoses, and Overheating on page 10-18.
other engine parts, can be very
{ Caution A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, Using coolant other than water and DEX-COOL coolant will:
you can be burned. DEX-COOL® can cause . Give freezing protection down to
Do not run the engine if there is a premature engine, heater core, −37°C (−34°F).
leak. If you run the engine, it or radiator corrosion. In addition, . Give boiling protection up to
could lose all coolant. That could the engine coolant could require 129°C (265°F).
cause an engine fire, and you changing sooner. Any repairs
would not be covered by the
. Protect against rust and
could be burned. Get any leak
vehicle warranty. Always use corrosion.
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant . Help keep the proper engine
in the vehicle. temperature.
If there seems to be no leak, with
the engine on, check to see if the . Let the warning lights and
engine cooling fan(s) is running. gauges work as they should.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-15
{ Caution { Warning Caution (Continued)

Using coolant other than Adding only plain water or some damaged. Too much water in the
DEX-COOL® can cause other liquid to the cooling system mixture can freeze and crack
premature engine, heater core, can be dangerous. Plain water engine cooling parts. The repairs
or radiator corrosion. In addition, and other liquids, can boil before would not be covered by the
the engine coolant could require the proper coolant mixture will. vehicle warranty. Use only the
changing sooner. Any repairs The coolant warning system is set proper mixture of engine coolant
would not be covered by the for the proper coolant mixture. for the cooling system. See
vehicle warranty. Always use With plain water or the wrong Recommended Fluids and
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant mixture, the engine could get too Lubricants on page 11-12.
in the vehicle. hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine If coolant has to be added more
could catch fire and you or others than four times a year, have the
What to Use
could be burned. Use a 50/ dealer check the vehicle cooling
Use a mixture of one-half clean, 50 mixture of clean, drinkable system.
drinkable water and one-half water and DEX-COOL coolant.
DEX-COOL coolant which will not Never dispose of engine coolant by
damage aluminum parts. If you use putting it in the trash, pouring it on
this coolant mixture, you do not the ground, or into sewers, streams,
need to add anything else. { Caution or bodies of water. Have the coolant
changed by an authorized service
If improper coolant mixture, center, familiar with legal
inhibitors, or additives are used in requirements regarding used
the vehicle cooling system, the coolant disposal. This will help
engine could overheat and be protect the environment and your
(Continued) health.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-16 Vehicle Care
Checking Coolant Adding Coolant How to Add Coolant to the

The coolant surge tank is located on If more coolant is needed, add the Coolant Surge Tank
the driver side of the engine proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture
compartment. See Engine at the coolant surge tank, but only { Caution
Compartment Overview on when the engine is cool. See below
page 10-4 for more information on for instructions on “How to Add This vehicle has a specific
location. Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.” coolant fill procedure. Failure to
follow this procedure could cause
{ Warning { Warning the engine to overheat and be
severely damaged.
Turning the surge tank pressure You can be burned if you spill
cap when the engine and radiator coolant on hot engine parts. If a problem yet has not been found,
are hot can allow steam and Coolant contains ethylene glycol, check to see if coolant is visible in
scalding liquids to blow out and and it will burn if the engine parts the coolant surge tank. If coolant is
burn you badly. Never turn the are hot enough. Do not spill visible but the coolant level is not at
surge tank pressure cap — even a coolant on a hot engine. between the MIN and MAX lines,
little — when the engine and add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
radiator are hot. When replacing the pressure cap, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
make sure it is hand-tight and fully coolant at the coolant surge tank,
seated. but be sure the cooling system,
The vehicle must be on a level
including the coolant surge tank
surface. When the engine is cold,
pressure cap, is cool before doing it.
the coolant level should be between
See Engine Overheating on
the MIN and MAX lines.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-17
{ Warning Warning (Continued) { Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from a The coolant warning system is set You can be burned if you spill
hot cooling system can blow out for the proper coolant mixture. coolant on hot engine parts.
and burn you badly. They are With plain water or the wrong Coolant contains ethylene glycol
under pressure, and if you turn mixture, the engine could get too and it will burn if the engine parts
the coolant surge tank pressure hot but you would not get the are hot enough. Do not spill
cap — even a little — they can overheat warning. The engine coolant on a hot engine.
come out at high speed. Never could catch fire and you or others
turn the cap when the cooling could be burned. Use a 50/
system, including the coolant 50 mixture of clean, drinkable
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Wait for the cooling system and
coolant surge tank pressure cap
to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap. { Caution
In cold weather, water can freeze 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
and crack the engine, radiator, pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
{ Warning heater core, and other parts. Use
the recommended coolant and
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no
Adding only plain water or some the proper coolant mixture. longer hot.
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-18 Vehicle Care
Turn the pressure cap slowly 4. With the coolant surge tank proper level, repeat Steps 1–3 and
counterclockwise about pressure cap off, start the reinstall the pressure cap. If the
one-quarter of a turn. If a hiss is engine and let it run until the coolant still is not at the proper level
heard, wait for that to stop. This upper radiator hose can be felt when the system cools down again,
will allow any pressure still left to getting hot. Watch out for the see the dealer.
be vented out the engine cooling fan.
discharge hose. By this time, the coolant level Engine Overheating
2. Keep turning the pressure cap inside the coolant surge tank There is a coolant temperature
slowly, and remove it. may be lower. If the level is warning light on the instrument
lower, add more of the proper panel. See Engine Coolant
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to Temperature Warning Light on
the coolant surge tank until the page 5-20.
level reaches between the MIN
and MAX lines. If Steam is Coming from the
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.
Engine
{ Caution { Warning
If the pressure cap is not tightly Steam from an overheated engine
installed, coolant loss and can cause serious injury, even if
possible engine damage may the hood is opened just a little.
occur. Be sure the cap is properly Stay away from the engine if
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with and tightly secured. steam is seen or heard coming
the proper DEX-COOL coolant from it. Just turn it off and get
mixture, to between the MIN and everyone away from the vehicle
MAX lines. Check the level in the surge tank
(Continued)
when the cooling system has cooled
down. If the coolant is not at the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-19
If No Steam is Coming from 3. Try to minimize engine load. If in

Warning (Continued) the Engine a traffic jam, shift to N (Neutral);
otherwise, shift to the highest
until it cools down. Wait until there If there is an engine overheat gear possible while driving.
is no sign of steam or coolant warning, but no steam can be seen
before opening the hood. or heard, the problem may not be If the overheat warning is no longer
too serious. Sometimes the engine on, the vehicle can be driven. Just
If driving continues when the can get a little too hot when the to be safe, drive slowly for about
engine is overheated, the liquids vehicle: 10 minutes. If the warning does not
in it can catch fire. Someone come back on, drive normally.
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
could get badly burned. Stop the
If the warning continues and the
engine if it overheats, and get out . Stops after high-speed driving. vehicle is not stopped, pull over,
of the vehicle until the engine has stop, and park the vehicle
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
cooled. right away.
. Tows a trailer.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle
If there is an overheat warning with
the engine for three minutes while
no sign of steam, try this for a
{ Caution minute or so:
parked. If the warning continues,
turn off the engine and get everyone
Running the engine without 1. If there is an a/c and it is on, turn out of the vehicle until it cools down.
coolant may cause damage or a it off.
The decision may be made to not lift
fire. Vehicle damage would not be 2. Turn on the heater to full hot at the hood but to get service help
covered by the vehicle warranty. the highest fan speed and open right away.
the windows as necessary.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-20 Vehicle Care
Power Steering Fluid 2. Remove the engine cover,

if required. See Engine Cover on { Caution
page 10-7.
Use of the incorrect fluid may
3. Wipe the cap and the top of the damage the vehicle and the
reservoir clean. damages may not be covered by
4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the the vehicle warranty. Always use
dipstick with a clean rag. the correct fluid listed in
5. Replace the cap and completely Recommended Fluids and
See Engine Compartment Overview Lubricants on page 11-12.
on page 10-4 for reservoir location. tighten it.
6. Remove the cap again and look
When to Check Power Steering at the fluid level on the dipstick. Washer Fluid
Fluid
The fluid level should be within the What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly area indicated on the dipstick when
check power steering fluid unless a the engine is cold. If necessary, add When windshield washer fluid is
leak in the system is suspected or only enough fluid to bring the level needed, be sure to read the
an unusual noise is heard. A fluid within the area indicated. manufacturer instructions before
loss in this system could indicate a use. If operating the vehicle in an
problem. Have the system inspected What to Use area where the temperature can fall
and repaired. To determine what kind of fluid to below freezing, use a fluid that has
use, refer to Recommended Fluids sufficient protection against
How to Check Power Steering freezing.
Fluid and Lubricants on page 11-12.
Always use the proper fluid.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the ignition off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-21
Adding Windshield Washer

Fluid Caution (Continued) { Warning
to freeze and damage the The brake wear warning sound
washer fluid tank and other means that soon the brakes will
parts of the washer system. not work well. That could lead to
. When using concentrated a crash. When the brake wear
washer fluid, follow the warning sound is heard, have the
manufacturer instructions for vehicle serviced.
adding water.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until . Fill the washer fluid tank only
the tank is full. See Engine three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for fluid
{ Caution
Compartment Overview on
page 10-4. expansion if freezing occurs, Continuing to drive with worn-out
which could damage the tank brake pads could result in costly
{ Caution if it is completely full. brake repair.
. Do not use engine coolant

(antifreeze) in the windshield
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
washer. It can damage the This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brakes are first applied or lightly
windshield washer system brake pads have built-in wear applied. This does not mean
and paint. indicators that make a high-pitched something is wrong with the brakes.
. Do not mix water with warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
ready-to-use washer fluid. necessary to help prevent brake
Water can cause the solution The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time when the vehicle pulsation. When tires are rotated,
(Continued) is moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-22 Vehicle Care
proper sequence to torque new, approved replacement parts. There are only two reasons why the
specifications. See Capacities and If this is not done, the brakes might brake fluid level in the reservoir
Specifications on page 12-2. not work properly. For example, might go down:
Brake pads should be replaced as installing disc brake pads that are . The brake fluid level goes down
complete sets. wrong for the vehicle, can change because of normal brake lining
the balance between the front and wear. When new linings are
Brake Pedal Travel rear brakes — for the worse. The installed, the fluid level goes
braking performance expected can back up.
See your dealer if the brake pedal
change in many other ways if the
does not return to normal height, . A fluid leak in the brake
wrong replacement brake parts are
or if there is a rapid increase in hydraulic system can also cause
installed.
pedal travel. This could be a sign a low fluid level. Have the brake
that brake service might be hydraulic system fixed, since a
required. Brake Fluid
leak means that sooner or later
Brake Adjustment the brakes will not work well.
Every time the brakes are applied, Do not top off the brake fluid.
with or without the vehicle moving, Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
the brakes adjust for wear. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
Replacing Brake System Parts when new brake linings are
The braking system on a vehicle is The brake master cylinder reservoir installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
complex. Its many parts have to be is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as as necessary, only when work is
of top quality and work well together indicated on the reservoir cap. See done on the brake hydraulic system.
if the vehicle is to have really good Engine Compartment Overview on
braking. The vehicle was designed page 10-4 for the location of the
and tested with top-quality brake reservoir.
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-23
{ Warning { Warning Caution (Continued)

If too much brake fluid is added, it With the wrong kind of fluid in the . If brake fluid is spilled on the
can spill on the engine and burn, brake hydraulic system, the vehicle's painted surfaces,
if the engine is hot enough. You brakes might not work well. This the paint finish can be
or others could be burned, and could cause a crash. Always use damaged. Be careful not to
the vehicle could be damaged. the proper brake fluid. spill brake fluid on the
Add brake fluid only when work is vehicle. If you do, wash it off
done on the brake hydraulic immediately.
system.
{ Caution Battery
. Using the wrong fluid can
When the brake fluid falls to a low Refer to the replacement number
level, the brake warning light comes badly damage brake shown on the original battery label
on. See Brake System Warning hydraulic system parts. For when a new battery is needed. See
Light on page 5-16. example, just a few drops of Engine Compartment Overview on
mineral-based oil, such as page 10-4 for battery location.
What to Add engine oil, in the brake
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid hydraulic system can damage
from a sealed container. brake hydraulic system parts { Warning
so badly that they will have to
Always clean the brake fluid Battery posts, terminals, and
be replaced. Do not let
reservoir cap and the area around related accessories contain lead
someone put in the wrong
the cap before removing it. This and lead compounds, chemicals
kind of fluid.
helps keep dirt from entering the known to the State of California to
reservoir. (Continued) cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-24 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage noise is heard. A fluid loss could If the vehicle starts in any other
indicate a problem. Have it position, contact your dealer for
{ Warning inspected and repaired. service.
Batteries have acid that can burn Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission
you and gas that can explode. Shift Lock Control
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
{ Warning Function Check
page 10-66 for tips on working When you are doing this
around a battery without inspection, the vehicle could { Warning
getting hurt. move suddenly. If the vehicle
When you are doing this
moves, you or others could be
inspection, the vehicle could
injured.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the move suddenly. If the vehicle
black, negative (−) cable from the moves, you or others could be
battery to keep the battery from 1. Before starting this check, be injured.
running down. sure there is enough room
Extended Storage: Remove the around the vehicle.
1. Before starting this check, be
black, negative (−) cable from the 2. Apply both the parking brake sure there is enough room
battery or use a battery trickle and the regular brake. around the vehicle. It should be
charger. Do not use the accelerator parked on a level surface.
pedal, and be ready to turn off 2. Apply the parking brake. Be
All-Wheel Drive the engine immediately if it ready to apply the regular brake
When to Check Lubricant starts. immediately if the vehicle begins
3. Try to start the engine in each to move.
It is not necessary to regularly
check the transfer case fluid unless gear. The vehicle should start
a leak is suspected or an unusual only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-25

. To check the P (Park)
3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to
regular brake, try to move the P (Park). Then release the
shift lever out of P (Park) with { Warning parking brake followed by the
normal effort. If the shift lever regular brake.
moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
Contact your dealer if service is
your dealer for service. the vehicle could begin to move. required.
You or others could be injured
Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be
If equipped with a key type ignition, roll. Be ready to apply the regular inspected for wear and cracking.
while parked and with the parking brake at once should the vehicle See Maintenance Schedule on
brake set, try to turn the ignition to begin to move. page 11-2.
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever Replacement blades come in
position. different types and are removed in
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
. The ignition should turn to vehicle facing downhill. Keeping different ways. For proper type and
LOCK/OFF only when the shift your foot on the regular brake, set length, see Maintenance
lever is in P (Park). the parking brake. Replacement Parts on page 11-13.
. The ignition key should come . To check the parking brake's
out only in LOCK/OFF. holding ability: With the engine
Contact your dealer if service is running and the transmission in
required. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-26 Vehicle Care
2. Push the release lever (2) to 2. Turn the bottom edge of the
{ Caution disengage the hook and push blade assembly (2) slightly away
the wiper arm (1) out of the from the underside of the
Allowing the wiper arm to touch blade assembly (3). wiper arm.
the windshield when no wiper
blade is installed could damage 3. Push the new blade assembly 3. Apply downward pressure to the
the windshield. Any damage that securely on the wiper arm until blade assembly and remove
occurs would not be covered by the release lever clicks into from the wiper arm.
your warranty. Do not allow the place. 4. Install the new wiper blade.
wiper arm to touch the windshield. 4. Lower the wiper arm. 5. Return the wiper arm and blade
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement assembly to the rest position on
Front Wiper Blade the window.
To replace the rear wiper blade:
Replacement
To replace the windshield wiper
blade:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
1. Lift the rear wiper arm (1) from

the window.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-27
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement 1. Open the hood. See Hood on

page 10-3.
Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement
should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 10-30.
the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulb‐changing procedure
If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ Warning
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or 2. Remove the filler panel
fasteners (1) and remove the
others could be injured. Be sure
filler panel.
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package. 3. Remove the three screws (2)
retaining the headlamp
assembly.
Headlamps 4. Pull the headlamp assembly
To replace one of the headlamp straight forward releasing the
bulbs, use the following procedure. retaining studs from the
To replace the parking/turn signal grommets.
lamp bulb, see Front Turn Signal
and Parking Lamps on page 10-28.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-28 Vehicle Care
2. Remove the bulb by turning it

counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out of the assembly.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb
assembly.
4. Install the new bulb by turning it
clockwise into the assembly.
5. Reconnect the electrical
connector.
5. Disconnect the electrical Front Turn Signal and 2. Turn the bulb to be replaced
connector from the bulb Parking Lamps counterclockwise to remove it
assembly. from the headlamp assembly.
To replace a front turn signal or
6. Turn the bulb assembly 3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb
parking lamp bulb:
counterclockwise to remove it socket assembly.
from the housing. 1. Follow Steps 1–4 under
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb
Headlamps on page 10-27 to
7. Replace the old bulb with a socket assembly.
access the front turn signal or
new one. 5. Insert the bulb assembly into the
parking lamp.
8. Reverse Steps 1–6 to reinstall. headlamp assembly.
6. Turn the bulb assembly
Fog Lamps clockwise until seated.
To replace the front fog lamp bulb: 7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the
1. Locate the fog lamp located headlamp assembly.
under the front fascia.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-29
Taillamps, Turn Signal, License Plate Lamp

Stoplamps, and Back-Up To replace one of these bulbs:
Lamps 1. Remove the two screws holding
To replace one of these bulbs: each of the license plate lamps
to the fascia.
2. Remove the two screws holding

in the taillamp assembly.
3. Slide the taillamp assembly
rearward and away from the
vehicle.
4. Turn the bulb socket being
1. Back-Up Lamp
replaced counterclockwise to 2. Turn and pull the license plate
2. Turn Signal Lamp disconnect it. lamp forward through the fascia
3. Stoplamp/Taillamp 5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb opening.
4. Taillamp socket. 3. Turn the bulb socket
6. Push the new bulb into the bulb counterclockwise and pull the
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
socket. bulb straight out of the socket.
on page 2-8.
7. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstall
the taillamp assembly.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-30 Vehicle Care
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb Replacement Bulbs Electrical System
socket and turn it clockwise to
lock it into place. Exterior Lamp Bulb
Number Electrical System
5. Push and turn the license plate
lamp back through the fascia Back-Up Lamp 921 Overload
opening. Front Fog Lamp H11 The vehicle has fuses and circuit
6. Reinstall the two screws holding breakers to protect against an
Front Turn Signal/ 3157K electrical system overload.
the license plate lamp to the Parking Lamp
fascia. When the current electrical load is
Headlamps too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
High-Beam 9005 and closes, protecting the circuit
or HB3 until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed. This
Low-Beam/DRL 9006 greatly reduces the chance of circuit
or HB4 overload and fire caused by
License Plate Lamp 168LL electrical problems.
Rear Stoplamp, and 7443 Fuses and circuit breakers protect
Taillamp power devices in the vehicle.
Rear Turn 3757 NAK Replace a bad fuse with a new one
Signal Lamp of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road and
For replacement bulbs not listed a fuse needs to be replaced, the
here, contact your dealer. same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-31
Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit

An electrical overload may cause Breakers
{ Caution
the lamps to go on and off, or in Spilling liquid on any electrical
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
some cases to remain off. Have the component on the vehicle may
protected from short circuits by
headlamp wiring checked right away damage it. Always keep the
fuses. This greatly reduces the
if the lamps go on and off or covers on any electrical
chance of circuit overload and fire
remain off. component.
caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wipers There are two fuse blocks — the
If the wiper motor overheats due to engine compartment fuse block, and
heavy snow or ice, the windshield the instrument panel fuse block.
wipers will stop until the motor cools To identify and check fuses and
and will then restart. relays, refer to the Fuse Usage
Although the circuit is protected Chart on the inside surface of the
from electrical overload, overload fuse panel door or cover.
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage. Engine Compartment
Always clear ice and heavy snow Fuse Block
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers. The engine compartment fuse block
is on the right side of the engine
If the overload is caused by an compartment, near the battery.
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-32 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
BATT2 Instrument Panel
Fuse Block Main
Feed 2
BATT3 Instrument Panel
Fuse Block Main
Feed 3
BCM Body Control
Module
ECM Engine Control
Module
ECM Engine Control
PWR TRN Module/Powertrain
ENG SNSR Miscellaneous
Engine Sensors
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage EPB Electric Parking
with all of the fuses, relays, and Brake
features shown. A/C Heater, Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning FAN1 Cooling Fan 1
Fuses Usage
System FAN3 Cooling Fan 3
ABS Antilock Brake
BATT1 Instrument Panel FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps
System
Fuse Block Main
Feed 1 FRT WPR Front Wiper Motor
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-33
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage

FUEL/VAC Fuel Pump/ PRK Parking Lamps FRT Front Fog Lamps
Vacuum Pump LP RH* (Right) (Europe Park FOG RLY
Lamps)
HDLP Headlamp Washer FUEL/VAC Fuel Pump/Vacuum
WASHER PWM FAN Pulse Width PUMP RLY Pump Relay
Modulation Fan
HI High-Beam HDLP Headlamp Washer
BEAM LH Headlamp (Left) REAR Rear Window WSHR RLY
DEFOG Defogger
HI High-Beam HI High-Beam
BEAM RH Headlamp (Right) REAR WPR Rear Wiper Motor BEAM RLY Headlamps
HORN Horn SPARE Not Used LO Low-Beam
BEAM RLY Headlamps
HTD Heated Washer STOP Stoplamps
WASH/MIR Fluid/Heated Mirrors LAMP PWR/ Powertrain
TRN RLY
IGN COIL A Ignition Coil A STRTR Starter
REAR Rear Window
IGN COIL B Ignition Coil B TCM Transmission
DEFOG Defogger
Control Module
LO Low-Beam RLY
BEAM LH Headlamp (Left) TRLR Trailer Parking
STOP Stoplamps
PRK LP Lamps
LO Low-Beam LAMP RLY
BEAM RH Headlamp (Right)
Relays Usage STRTR RLY Starter
PRK LP LH Parking Lamps (Left)
FAN1 RLY Cooling Fan 1 WPR Wiper Control
PRK LP RH Parking Lamps CNTRL RLY
(Right) FAN2 RLY Cooling Fan 2
WPR Wiper Speed
FAN3 RLY Cooling Fan 3 SPD RLY
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-34 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse

Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
on the passenger side of the lower
console.
Pull the latch of the fuse box cover

straight back to access the fuses.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-35
The vehicle may not have all of the Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
fuses, relays, and features shown.
Fuses Usage BCM Body Control FSCM Fuel System
(TRN SIG) Module (Turn Control Module
AMP Amplifier Signal)
FSCM Fuel System
APO JACK Auxiliary Power BCM Body Control VENT SOL Control Module
(CONSOLE) Outlet Jack (VBATT) Module (Battery Vent Solenoid
APO JACK Auxiliary Power Voltage)
HEATING Heating Mat Switch
(REAR Outlet Jack Rear CIGAR Cigarette Lighter MAT SW
CARGO) Cargo
CIM Communications HTD Heated Seat
AWD/VENT All-Wheel Drive/ Integration Module SEAT PWR Power
Ventilation
CLSTR Instrument Cluster HVAC BLWR Heating,
BCM (CTSY) Body Control Ventilation, and Air
Module (Courtesy) DRL Daytime Running
Conditioning
Lamps
BCM Body Control Blower
(DIMMER) Module (Dimmer) DR/LCK Driver Door Lock
IPC Instrument Panel
BCM (INT Body Control DRVR Driver Power Seat Cluster
LIGHT) Module (Interior PWR SEAT
ISRVM/RCM Inside Rearview
Light) DRV/ Driver Power Mirror/Remote
BCM Body Control PWR WNDW Window Compass Module
(PRK/TN) Module (Parking/ F/DOOR Fuel Door Lock KEY Key Capture
Turn Signal) LOCK CAPTURE
BCM (STOP) Body Control FRT WSR Front Washer L/GATE Liftgate
Module (Stoplamp)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-36 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage

LOGISTIC Logistic Mode S/ROOF Sunroof Battery ACC/ Accessory/Run
MODE BATT RAP RLY Accessory Power
OSRVM Outside Rearview SSPS Speed Sensitive CIGAR Cigarette and
Mirror Power Steering APO Auxiliary Power
JACK RLY Outlet
PASS Passenger Power STR/ Steering Wheel
PWR WNDW Window WHL SW Switch RUN/ Run/Crank
CRNK RLY
PWR DIODE Power Diode TRLR Trailer
RUN RLY Run
PWR/ Power Moding TRLR BATT Trailer Battery
MODING
XBCM Export Body
RADIO Radio Control Module
RR FOG Rear Defogger XM/ SiriusXM Satellite
HVAC/DLC Radio (If
RUN 2 Power Battery Key
Equipped)/Heating,
On Run
Ventilation, and Air
RUN/CRNK Run Crank Conditioning/Data
Link Connection
SDM (BATT) Safety Diagnosis
Module (Battery)
SDM (IGN 1) Safety Diagnosis
Module (Ignition 1)
SPARE Spare
S/ROOF Sunroof
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-37
Wheels and Tires Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

Tires and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can
Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread
high-quality tires made by a page 9-10. is badly worn,
leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose replace them.
the warranty manual for the same danger as . Replace any tires that
information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The have been damaged by
warranty and where to get resulting crash could impacts with potholes,
service. For additional cause serious injury. curbs, etc.
information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently . Improperly repaired tires
manufacturer. to maintain the can cause a crash. Only
recommended pressure. the dealer or an
{ Warning Tire pressure should be authorized tire service
checked when the tires center should repair,
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are replace, dismount, and
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires.
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in
. Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a excess of 56 km/h
impact — such as when (35 mph) on slippery
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout surfaces such as snow,
tires at the recommended mud, ice, etc. Excessive
(Continued) pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued) tires to explode.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-38 Vehicle Care
See Tire Pressure for traction or performance as winter

. Use only radial ply tires of the
High-Speed Operation on tires on snow or ice-covered roads. same size, load range, and
See Winter Tires on page 10-38. speed rating as the original
page 10-46 for inflation pressure equipment tires.
adjustment for high-speed
driving. Winter Tires Winter tires with the same speed
This vehicle was not originally rating as the original equipment tires
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
All-Season Tires equipped with winter tires. Winter
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
tires are designed for increased
This vehicle may come with tires with a lower speed rating are
traction on snow and ice-covered
all-season tires. These tires are chosen, never exceed the tire's
roads. Consider installing winter
designed to provide good overall maximum speed capability.
tires on the vehicle if frequent
performance on most road surfaces
driving on ice or snow covered
and weather conditions. Original
roads is expected. See your dealer Summer Tires
equipment tires designed to GM's
for details regarding winter tire This vehicle may come with high
specific tire performance criteria
availability and proper tire selection. performance summer tires. These
have a TPC specification code
Also, see Buying New Tires on tires have a special tread and
molded onto the sidewall. Original
page 10-52. compound that are optimized for
equipment all-season tires can be
identified by the last two characters With winter tires, there may be maximum dry and wet road
of this TPC code, which will decreased dry road traction, performance. This special tread and
be “MS.” increased road noise, and shorter compound will decrease
tread life. After changing to winter performance in cold climates, and
Consider installing winter tires on on ice and snow. We recommend
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
the vehicle if frequent driving on installing winter tires on the vehicle
handling and braking.
snow or ice-covered roads is if frequent driving in cold
expected. All-season tires provide If using winter tires: temperatures or on snow or ice
adequate performance for most . Use tires of the same brand and covered roads is expected. See
winter driving conditions, but they tread type on all four wheel Winter Tires on page 10-38.
may not offer the same level of positions.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-39
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the DOT Tire Date of
“Tire Size” illustration later in this Manufacture: The last four
Useful information about a tire is section. digits of the TIN indicate the tire
molded into its sidewall. The manufactured date. The first two
examples show a typical (2) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria digits represent the week (01–
passenger vehicle tire and a 52) and the last two digits, the
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to year. For example, the third
GM's specific tire performance week of the year 2010 would
criteria have a TPC specification have a four-digit DOT date
code molded onto the sidewall. of 0310.
GM's TPC specifications meet or (4) Tire Identification Number
exceed all federal safety (TIN): The letters and numbers
guidelines. following the DOT (Department
(3) DOT (Department of of Transportation) code are the
Transportation): The Tire Identification Number (TIN).
Department of Transportation The TIN shows the
(DOT) code indicates that the manufacturer and plant code,
tire is in compliance with the tire size, and date the tire was
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example manufactured. The TIN is
U.S. Department of
(1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle molded onto both sides of the
combination of letters and Safety Standards. tire, although only one side may
numbers used to define a have the date of manufacture.
particular tire's width, height, (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
aspect ratio, construction type, of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-40 Vehicle Care
(6) Uniform Tire Quality spare tire, see Compact Spare

Grading (UTQG): Tire Tire on page 10-65 and If a Tire
manufacturers are required to Goes Flat on page 10-57.
grade tires based on three (3) Tire Identification Number
performance factors: treadwear, (TIN): The letters and numbers
traction, and temperature following the DOT (Department
resistance. For more information of Transportation) code are the
see Uniform Tire Quality Tire Identification Number (TIN).
Grading on page 10-54. The TIN shows the
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation manufacturer and plant code,
Load Limit: Maximum load that tire size, and date the tire was
can be carried and the Compact Spare Tire Example manufactured. The TIN is
maximum pressure needed to (1) Tire Ply Material : The type molded onto both sides of the
support that load. of cord and number of plies in tire, although only one side may
the sidewall and under the tread. have the date of manufacture.
(2) Temporary Use Only: The (4) Maximum Cold Inflation
compact spare tire or temporary Load Limit: Maximum load that
use tire should not be driven at can be carried and the
speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). maximum pressure needed to
The compact spare tire is for support that load.
emergency use when a regular (5) Tire Inflation: The
road tire has lost air and gone temporary use tire or compact
flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire should be inflated to
420 kPa (60 psi).
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-41
For more information on tire Tire Designations (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
pressure and inflation see Tire number that indicates the tire
Pressure on page 10-44. Tire Size height-to-width measurements.
(6) Tire Size: A combination of The following is an example of a For example, if the tire size
letters and numbers define a typical passenger vehicle aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, tire size. item 3 of the illustration, it would
construction type, and service mean that the tire's sidewall is
description. The letter T as the 60 percent as high as it is wide.
first character in the tire size (4) Construction Code: A letter
means the tire is for temporary code is used to indicate the type
use only. of ply construction in the tire.
(7) TPC Spec (Tire The letter R means radial ply
Performance Criteria (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: construction; the letter D means
Specification): Original The United States version of a diagonal or bias ply
equipment tires designed to metric tire sizing system. The construction; and the letter B
GM's specific tire performance letter P as the first character in means belted-bias ply
criteria have a TPC specification the tire size means a passenger construction.
code molded onto the sidewall. vehicle tire engineered to (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
GM's TPC specifications meet or standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches.
exceed all federal safety and Rim Association. (6) Service Description: These
guidelines. (2) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load
number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents
sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-42 Vehicle Care
is certified to carry. The speed Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
rating is the maximum speed a cords between the plies and the and coolant, but without
tire is certified to carry a load. tread. Cords may be made from passengers and cargo.
steel or other reinforcing DOT Markings: A code molded
Tire Terminology and materials. into the sidewall of a tire
Definitions Bead: The tire bead contains signifying that the tire is in
Air Pressure: The amount of steel wires wrapped by steel compliance with the U.S.
air inside the tire pressing cords that hold the tire onto Department of Transportation
outward on each square inch of the rim. (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
the tire. Air pressure is Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
or psi (pounds per square inch). alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
Accessory Weight: The identify the tire manufacturer,
combined weight of optional the tread.
production plant, brand, and
accessories. Some examples of Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production.
optional accessories are amount of air pressure in a tire,
automatic transmission, power measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
windows, power seats, and air or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
conditioning. before a tire has built up heat on page 9-10.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship from driving. See Tire Pressure GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
of a tire's height to its width. on page 10-44. Rating for the front axle. See
Curb Weight: The weight of a Vehicle Load Limits on
motor vehicle with standard and page 9-10.
optional equipment including the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-43
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
Rating for the rear axle. See load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same
Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall
page 9-10. pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
The side of an asymmetrical tire Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
that must always face outward weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and
when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight. Recommended Inflation
unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire used on light duty trucks and is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown
some multipurpose passenger 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load on the tire placard. See Tire
vehicles. Limits on page 9-10. Pressure on page 10-44 and
Occupant Distribution : Vehicle Load Limits on
Load Index: An assigned page 9-10.
number ranging from 1 to 279 Designated seating positions.
that corresponds to the load Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
carrying capacity of a tire. side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at
Maximum Inflation Pressure: 90 degrees to the centerline of
The maximum air pressure to outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire
molded onto the sidewall. white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-44 Vehicle Care
Sidewall: The portion of a tire tire's traction, temperature, and recommended inflation pressure.
between the tread and the bead. treadwear. Ratings are See “Tire and Loading
Speed Rating: An determined by tire Information Label” under Vehicle
alphanumeric code assigned to manufacturers using Load Limits on page 9-10.
a tire indicating the maximum government testing procedures.
speed at which a tire can The ratings are molded into the Tire Pressure
operate. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tires need the correct amount of
Tire Quality Grading on air pressure to operate
Traction: The friction between page 10-54.
the tire and the road surface. effectively.
The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
Tread: The portion of a tire that
number of designated seating { Caution
positions multiplied by
comes into contact with 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated Neither tire underinflation nor
the road. cargo load. See Vehicle Load overinflation is good.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Limits on page 9-10. Underinflated tires, or tires
bands, sometimes called wear that do not have enough air,
Vehicle Maximum Load on the can result in:
bars, that show across the tread Tire: Load on an individual tire
of a tire when only 1.6 mm due to curb weight, accessory . Tire overloading and
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See weight, occupant weight, and overheating which could
When It Is Time for New Tires cargo weight. lead to a blowout.
on page 10-51. . Premature or
Vehicle Placard: A label
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality permanently attached to a irregular wear.
Grading Standards): A tire vehicle showing the vehicle . Poor handling.
information system that provides capacity weight and the original
consumers with ratings for a (Continued)
equipment tire size and
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-45
How the vehicle is loaded Remove the valve cap from the
Caution (Continued) affects vehicle handling and ride tire valve stem. Press the tire
. Reduced fuel economy. comfort. Never load the vehicle gauge firmly onto the valve to
with more weight than it was get a pressure measurement.
Overinflated tires, or tires that designed to carry. If the cold tire inflation pressure
have too much air, can matches the recommended
result in: When to Check
pressure on the Tire and
. Unusual wear. Check the tires once a month or Loading Information label, no
more. Do not forget the compact further adjustment is necessary.
. Poor handling. spare, if the vehicle has one. If the inflation pressure is low,
. Rough ride. The cold compact spare tire add air until the recommended
. Needless damage from pressure should be at 420 kPa pressure is reached. If the
road hazards. (60 psi). See Compact Spare inflation pressure is high, press
Tire on page 10-65. on the metal stem in the center
How to Check of the tire valve to release air.
The Tire and Loading
Information label on the vehicle Use a good quality pocket-type Recheck the tire pressure with
indicates the original equipment gauge to check tire pressure. the tire gauge.
tires and the correct cold tire Proper tire inflation cannot be Return the valve caps on the
inflation pressures. The determined by looking at the tire. valve stems to prevent leaks
recommended pressure is the Check the tire inflation pressure and keep out dirt and moisture.
minimum air pressure needed to when the tires are cold, meaning
support the vehicle's maximum the vehicle has not been driven
load carrying capacity. See for at least three hours or no
Vehicle Load Limits on more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
page 9-10.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-46 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure for Vehicles with P235/55R18 size tires Tire Pressure Monitor
require inflation pressure adjustment
High-Speed Operation when driving the vehicle at speeds
System
of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. The Tire Pressure Monitor System
{ Warning Set the cold inflation pressure to the (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
maximum inflation pressure shown technology to check tire pressure
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h on the tire sidewall, levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
(100 mph) or higher, puts an or 262 kPa (38 psi), whichever is the air pressure in your tires and
additional strain on tires. lower. See the example following. transmit tire pressure readings to a
Sustained high-speed driving Return the tires to the receiver located in the vehicle.
causes excessive heat buildup recommended cold tire inflation
Each tire, including the spare (if
and can cause sudden tire failure. pressure when high-speed driving
provided), should be checked
You could have a crash and you has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits
monthly when cold and inflated to
or others could be killed. Some on page 9-10 and Tire Pressure on
the inflation pressure recommended
high-speed rated tires require page 10-44.
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
inflation pressure adjustment for Example: vehicle placard or tire inflation
high-speed operation. When pressure label. (If your vehicle has
speed limits and road conditions The maximum load and inflation
pressure is molded on the tire tires of a different size than the size
are such that a vehicle can be indicated on the vehicle placard or
sidewall, in small letters, near the
driven at high speeds, make sure tire inflation pressure label, you
rim flange. It will read something like
the tires are rated for high-speed this: Maximum load should determine the proper tire
operation, in excellent condition, 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) inflation pressure for those tires.)
and set to the correct cold tire Max. Press. As an added safety feature, your
inflation pressure for the vehicle has been equipped with a
vehicle load. For this example, set the inflation
pressure for high‐speed driving at tire pressure monitoring system
262 kPa (38 psi). (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-47
pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is See Radio Frequency Statement on
of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure page 13-15.
under-inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for Tire Pressure Monitor
approximately one minute and then
pressure telltale illuminates, you
remain continuously illuminated.
Operation
should stop and check your tires as
This sequence will continue upon This vehicle may have a Tire
soon as possible, and inflate them
subsequent vehicle start-ups as Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
long as the malfunction exists. The TPMS is designed to warn the
significantly under-inflated tire
driver when a low tire pressure
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation illuminated, the system may not be
mounted onto each tire and wheel
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
assembly, excluding the spare tire
tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
sensors monitor the air pressure in
ability. of reasons, including the installation
the tires and transmit the tire
Please note that the TPMS is not a of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure readings to a receiver
substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
located in the vehicle.
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction
pressure, even if under-inflation has telltale after replacing one or more
not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to
illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
Your vehicle has also been properly.
equipped with a TPMS malfunction When a low tire pressure condition
indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
system is not operating properly. Operation on page 10-47.
the low tire pressure warning light
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-48 Vehicle Care
on the instrument cluster. If the of the Tire and Loading Information TPMS Malfunction Light
warning light comes on, stop as label and its location. Also see Tire
The TPMS will not function properly
soon as possible and inflate the Pressure on page 10-44.
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
tires to the recommended pressure The TPMS system can warn about are missing or inoperable. When the
shown on the tire loading a low tire pressure condition but it system detects a malfunction, the
information label. See Vehicle Load does not replace normal tire low tire pressure warning light
Limits on page 9-10. maintenance. See Tire Inspection flashes for about one minute and
The low tire pressure warning light on page 10-50, Tire Rotation on then stays on for the remainder of
comes on at each ignition cycle until page 10-50 and Tires on the ignition cycle. The malfunction
the tires are inflated to the correct page 10-37. light comes on at each ignition cycle
inflation pressure. until the problem is corrected. Some
The low tire pressure warning light { Caution of the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light to come on are:
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then Tire sealant materials are not all . One of the road tires has been
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This the same. A non-approved tire replaced with the spare tire. The
may be an early indicator that the sealant could damage the TPMS spare tire does not have a
air pressure is getting low and sensors. TPMS sensor damage TPMS sensor. The malfunction
needs to be inflated to the proper caused by using an incorrect tire light should go off after the road
pressure. sealant is not covered by the tire is replaced and the sensor
vehicle warranty. Always use only matching process is performed
A Tire and Loading Information label
shows the size of the original the GM approved tire sealant successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
equipment tires and the correct available through your dealer or Matching Process" later in this
inflation pressure for the tires when included in the vehicle. section.
they are cold. See Vehicle Load . The TPMS sensor matching
Limits on page 9-10, for an example process was not done or not
completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle's tires. The
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-49
malfunction light should go off TPMS Sensor Matching The TPMS matching process is:
once the TPMS sensor matching Process 1. Set the parking brake.
process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Each TPMS sensor has a unique 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
Matching Process” later in this identification code. The identification the engine off.
section. code needs to be matched to a new
tire/wheel position after rotating the 3. Press and hold the RKE
. One or more TPMS sensors are vehicle’s tires or replacing one or transmitter's Q and K buttons at
missing or damaged. The more of the TPMS sensors. Also, the same time, for about
malfunction light should go off the TPMS sensor matching process three seconds. The horn will
when the TPMS sensors are should be performed after replacing sound twice to indicate the
installed and the sensor a spare tire with a road tire receiver is ready for the sensor
matching process is performed containing the TPMS sensor. The matching process to begin.
successfully. See your dealer for malfunction light should go off at the
service. 4. Start with the driver side front
next ignition cycle. The sensors are tire. The driver side turn signal
. Replacement tires or wheels do matched to the tire/wheel positions, lamp comes on.
not match the original equipment using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels following order: driver side front tire, 5. Place the relearn tool against
other than those recommended passenger side front tire, passenger the tire sidewall, near the valve
could prevent the TPMS from side rear tire, and driver side rear. stem. Then press the button to
functioning properly. See Buying See your dealer for service or to activate the TPMS sensor.
New Tires on page 10-52. purchase a relearn tool. A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
. Operating electronic devices or There are two minutes to match the been matched to this tire and
being near facilities using radio first tire/wheel position, and wheel position.
wave frequencies similar to the five minutes overall to match all four
TPMS could cause the TPMS tire/wheel positions. If it takes 6. Proceed to the passenger side
sensors to malfunction. longer, the matching process stops front tire. The passenger side
and must be restarted. front turn signal lamp comes on.
Repeat the procedure in Step 5.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-50 Vehicle Care
7. Proceed to the passenger side Replace the tire if: Tire Rotation
rear tire. The passenger side
rear turn signal lamp comes on.
. The indicators at three or Tires should be rotated every
Repeat the procedure in Step 5. more places around the tire 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
can be seen. Maintenance Schedule on
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire. The driver side rear turn . There is cord or fabric page 11-2.
signal lamp comes on. Repeat showing through the tire's Tires are rotated to achieve a
the procedure in Step 5. The rubber. uniform wear for all tires. The
horn sounds two times to first rotation is the most
indicate the sensor identification
. The tread or sidewall is
code has been matched to the cracked, cut, or snagged important.
driver side rear tire, and the deep enough to show cord or Anytime unusual wear is
TPMS sensor matching process fabric. noticed, rotate the tires as soon
is no longer active. as possible, check for proper tire
. The tire has a bump, bulge,
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. or split. inflation pressure, and check for
10. Set all four tires to the damaged tires or wheels. If the
. The tire has a puncture, cut, unusual wear continues after the
recommended air pressure
or other damage that cannot rotation, check the wheel
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label. be repaired well because of alignment. See When It Is Time
the size or location of the for New Tires on page 10-51
Tire Inspection damage. and Wheel Replacement on
page 10-56.
We recommend that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-51
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor Lightly coat the center of the
System. See Tire Pressure wheel hub with wheel bearing
Monitor Operation on grease after a wheel change or
page 10-47. tire rotation to prevent corrosion
Check that all wheel nuts are or rust build-up. Do not get
properly tightened. See “Wheel grease on the flat wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities mounting surface or on the
and Specifications on wheel nuts or bolts.
page 12-2.
When It Is Time for New
{ Warning Tires
Use this rotation pattern when Factors such as maintenance,
rotating the tires. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the temperatures, driving speeds,
parts to which it is fastened, can vehicle loading, and road conditions
Do not include the compact make wheel nuts become loose affect the wear rate of the tires.
spare tire in the tire rotation. after time. The wheel could come
Adjust the front and rear tires to off and cause an accident. When
the recommended inflation changing a wheel, remove any
pressure on the Tire and rust or dirt from places where the
Loading Information label after wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
the tires have been rotated. See
towel can be used; however, use
Tire Pressure on page 10-44
a scraper or wire brush later to
and Vehicle Load Limits on remove all rust or dirt.
page 9-10.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-52 Vehicle Care
equipped, be replaced after six at least a month, remove the tires or

years, regardless of tread wear. The raise the vehicle to reduce the
tire manufacturer date is the last weight from the tires.
four digits of the DOT Tire
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires
molded into one side of the tire
sidewall. The first two digits GM has developed and matched
represent the week (01–52) and the specific tires for the vehicle. The
last two digits, the year. For original equipment tires installed
example, the third week of the year were designed to meet General
2010 would have a four-digit DOT Motors Tire Performance Criteria
date of 0310. Specification (TPC Spec)
Treadwear indicators are one way to Vehicle Storage system rating. When
tell when it is time for new tires. replacement tires are needed,
Tires age when stored normally GM strongly recommends
Treadwear indicators appear when
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
a vehicle that will be stored for at
buying tires with the same TPC
or less of tread remaining. See Tire Spec rating.
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
Inspection on page 10-50 and Tire
area away from direct sunlight to GM's exclusive TPC Spec
Rotation on page 10-50.
slow aging. This area should be free system considers over a dozen
The rubber in tires ages over time. of grease, gasoline, or other critical specifications that impact
This also applies to the spare tire, substances that can deteriorate
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
the overall performance of the
rubber.
never used. Multiple factors vehicle, including brake system
Parking for an extended period can performance, ride and handling,
including temperatures, loading
cause flat spots on the tires that traction control, and tire
conditions, and inflation pressure
may result in vibrations while pressure monitoring
maintenance affect how fast aging
driving. When storing a vehicle for
takes place. GM recommends that performance. GM's TPC Spec
tires, including the spare if
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-53
number is molded onto the tire's Winter tires with the same speed
sidewall near the tire size. If the rating as the original equipment { Warning
tires have an all-season tread tires may not be available for H, Mixing tires of different sizes,
design, the TPC Spec number V, W, Y and ZR speed rated brands, or types may cause
will be followed by MS for mud tires. Never exceed the winter loss of control of the vehicle,
and snow. See Tire Sidewall tires’ maximum speed capability resulting in a crash or other
Labeling on page 10-39. when using winter tires with a vehicle damage. Use the
GM recommends replacing worn lower speed rating. correct size, brand, and type
tires in complete sets of four. of tires on all wheels.
Uniform tread depth on all tires { Warning
will help to maintain the Tires could explode during
performance of the vehicle. improper service. Attempting { Warning
Braking and handling to mount or dismount a tire
performance may be adversely could cause injury or death. Using bias-ply tires on the
affected if all the tires are not Only your dealer or authorized vehicle may cause the wheel
replaced at the same time. tire service center should rim flanges to develop cracks
If proper rotation and mount or dismount the tires. after many miles of driving.
maintenance have been done, A tire and/or wheel could fail
all four tires should wear out at suddenly and cause a crash.
about the same time. See Tire Use only radial-ply tires with
Rotation on page 10-50. the wheels on the vehicle.
However, if it is necessary to
replace only one axle set of If the vehicle tires must be
worn tires, place the new tires replaced with a tire that does not
on the rear axle. have a TPC Spec number, make
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-54 Vehicle Care
sure they are the same size, may be affected. If the vehicle has Uniform Tire Quality
load range, speed rating, and electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
Grading
construction (radial) as the
original tires. control, electronic stability control, Quality grades can be found
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance where applicable on the tire
Vehicles that have a tire of these systems can also be sidewall between tread shoulder
pressure monitoring system affected. and maximum section width. For
could give an inaccurate example:
low-pressure warning if non-TPC { Warning
Spec rated tires are installed. Treadwear 200 Traction AA
See Tire Pressure Monitor If different sized wheels are used, Temperature A
System on page 10-46. there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety if The following information relates
The Tire and Loading tires not recommended for those to the system developed by the
Information label indicates the wheels are selected. This United States National Highway
original equipment tires on the increases the chance of a crash Traffic Safety Administration
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits and serious injury. Only use GM (NHTSA), which grades tires by
on page 9-10. specific wheel and tire systems treadwear, traction, and
developed for the vehicle, and temperature performance. This
Different Size Tires and have them properly installed by a applies only to vehicles sold in
Wheels GM certified technician. the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of
If wheels or tires are installed that most passenger car tires. The
are a different size than the original See Buying New Tires on
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle page 10-52 and Accessories and Uniform Tire Quality Grading
performance, including its braking, Modifications on page 10-2. (UTQG) system does not apply
ride and handling characteristics, to deep tread, winter tires,
stability, and resistance to rollover compact spare tires, tires with
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-55
nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include
or to some limited-production the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
tires. graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
While the tires available on performance of tires depends characteristics.
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of
Temperature
and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A
respect to these grades, they
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C,
must also conform to federal
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance
safety requirements and
differences in road to the generation of heat and its
additional General Motors Tire
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
Performance Criteria (TPC)
tested under controlled
standards. Traction conditions on a specified indoor
All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade
The treadwear grade is a specified government test C corresponds to a level of
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
specified government test Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and
course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-56 Vehicle Care
performance on the laboratory surface variations such as troughs Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
test wheel than the minimum or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
required by law. Warning: The vibrating when driving on a smooth System (TPMS) sensors with new
temperature grade for this tire is road, the tires and wheels may need GM original equipment parts.
to be rebalanced. See your dealer
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
for proper diagnosis. { Warning
overloaded. Excessive speed, Wheel Replacement Using the wrong replacement
underinflation, or excessive wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
loading, either separately or in Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or nuts can be dangerous. It could
combination, can cause heat affect the braking and handling of
buildup and possible tire failure. corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
wheel nuts should be replaced. and cause loss of control, causing
Wheel Alignment and Tire If the wheel leaks air, replace it. a crash. Always use the correct
Balance Some aluminum wheels can be wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
repaired. See your dealer if any of nuts for replacement.
The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to these conditions exist.
provide the longest tire life and best Your dealer will know the kind of
overall performance. Adjustments to wheel that is needed.
wheel alignment and tire balancing Each new wheel should have the
are not necessary on a regular same load-carrying capacity,
basis. Consider an alignment check diameter, width, offset, and be
if there is unusual tire wear or the mounted the same way as the one it
vehicle is significantly pulling to one replaces.
side or the other. Some slight pull to
the left or right, depending on the
crown of the road and/or other road
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-57
Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat

{ Caution
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
The wrong wheel can also cause { Warning while driving, especially if the tires
problems with bearing life, brake are maintained properly. See Tires
cooling, speedometer or Do not use tire chains. There is on page 10-37. If air goes out of a
odometer calibration, headlamp not enough clearance. Tire chains tire, it is much more likely to leak
aim, bumper height, vehicle used on a vehicle without the out slowly. But if there ever is a
ground clearance, and tire or tire proper amount of clearance can blowout, here are a few tips about
chain clearance to the body and cause damage to the brakes, what to expect and what to do:
chassis. suspension, or other vehicle
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
parts. The area damaged by the
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
tire chains could cause loss of toward that side. Take your foot off
Used Replacement Wheels control and a crash. the accelerator pedal and grip the
Use another type of traction steering wheel firmly. Steer to
{ Warning device only if its manufacturer maintain lane position, and then
recommends it for the vehicle's gently brake to a stop, well off the
Replacing a wheel with a used
tire size combination and road road, if possible.
one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been conditions. Follow that A rear blowout, particularly on a
driven may be unknown. It could manufacturer's instructions. To curve, acts much like a skid and
fail suddenly and cause a crash. avoid vehicle damage, drive slow may require the same correction as
When replacing wheels, use a and readjust or remove the used in a skid. Stop pressing the
new GM original equipment traction device if it contacts the accelerator pedal and steer to
wheel. vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. straighten the vehicle. It may be
If traction devices are used, install very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
them on the front tires. to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-58 Vehicle Care
{ Warning { Warning { Warning

Driving on a flat tire will cause Lifting a vehicle and getting under Changing a tire can be
permanent damage to the tire. it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous. The vehicle can slip
Re-inflating a tire after it has been dangerous without the off the jack and roll over or fall
driven on while severely appropriate safety equipment and causing injury or death. Find a
underinflated or flat may cause a training. If a jack is provided with level place to change the tire. To
blowout and a serious crash. the vehicle, it is designed only for help prevent the vehicle from
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire changing a flat tire. If it is used for moving:
that has been driven on while anything else, you or others could 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
severely underinflated or flat. be badly injured or killed if the
Have your dealer or an authorized vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 2. Put an automatic
tire service center repair or is provided with the vehicle, only transmission in P (Park) or a
replace the flat tire as soon as use it for changing a flat tire. manual transmission in
possible. 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
not restart while the vehicle
and wheel damage by driving slowly
is raised.
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible. Turn on the hazard 4. Do not allow passengers to
warning flashers. See Hazard remain in the vehicle.
Warning Flashers on page 6-3. 5. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
being changed.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-59
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),

use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of
the wheel blocks (1).
2. Push the levers on the load floor. 4. Remove the tire protector foam.
1. Wheel Block 3. Lift the load floor and hang the
hook to the tailgate opening.
2. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
To access the spare tire:
1. Open the liftgate.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-60 Vehicle Care
5. Remove the wheel retainer bolt 1. Remove the wing-bolt (2) from
holding down the spare tire by the jack.
turning it counterclockwise. 2. Remove the jack (3) and
6. Remove the compact spare tire. tool bag (1).
See Compact Spare Tire on 3. Remove the straps holding the
page 10-65 for more information. bag containing the wheel wrench
The tools are located between the and extension jack handle, if the
compact spare tire and the liftgate. vehicle has one.
To access the tools: Remove the wheel wrench and
extension jack handle, if the
vehicle has one, from the bag.
Removing the Flat Tire and 2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen
Installing the Spare Tire all the wheel nuts. Do not
remove them yet.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10-57 for more
information.
1. Tool Bag
2. Wing-bolt
3. Jack
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-61
{ Warning { Warning
Getting under a vehicle when it is Lifting a vehicle and getting under
lifted on a jack is dangerous. it to do maintenance or repairs is
If the vehicle slips off the jack, dangerous without the
you could be badly injured or appropriate safety equipment and
killed. Never get under a vehicle training. If a jack is provided with
when it is supported only by the vehicle, it is designed only for
a jack. changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
3. Position the lift head at the jack { Warning is provided with the vehicle, only
location nearest the flat tire.
Make sure all of the jack lift Raising the vehicle with the jack use it for changing a flat tire.
head is touching the jacking improperly positioned can
flange under the body. Do not damage the vehicle and even
place the jack under a body
panel. The lower body panel has
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
{ Caution
an arrow to aid in locating the damage, be sure to fit the jack lift Make sure that the jack lift head
jacking location. head into the proper location is in the correct position or you
before raising the vehicle. may damage your vehicle. The
repairs would not be covered by
your warranty.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-62 Vehicle Care
4. If you have a coin/pierce jack,

attach the jack handle extension { Warning
to the jack by sliding the hook
through the end of the jack and Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
insert the other end of the jack parts to which it is fastened, can
handle into the wrench. make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
If you have a hex-head jack, off and cause an accident. When
attach the jack lift-assist tool by changing a wheel, remove any
placing the hex of the jack
rust or dirt from places where the
lift-assist tool over the hex head
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
of the jack.
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Hex Head Jack and Wrench towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the remove all rust or dirt.
jack handle clockwise. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room 9. Place the compact spare tire on
for the road tire to be removed. the wheel-mounting surface.
6. Remove all of the wheel nuts. 10. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
Tighten each nut by hand until
7. Remove the flat tire. the wheel is held against
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the the hub.
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces
Coin/Pierce Jack and Wrench and spare wheel.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-63
{ Warning { Warning Caution (Continued)

Never use oil or grease on bolts Wheel nuts that are improperly or sequence and to the proper
or nuts because the nuts might incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification. See
come loose. The vehicle's wheel the wheels to become loose or Capacities and Specifications for
could fall off, causing a crash. come off. The wheel nuts should the wheel nut torque specification.
be tightened with a torque wrench
11. Lower the vehicle by turning to the proper torque specification 13. Lower the jack all the way and
the jack handle after replacing. Follow the torque remove the jack from under the
counterclockwise. specification supplied by the vehicle.
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel 14. Tighten the bolts firmly with the
nuts. See Capacities and wheel wrench.
Specifications on page 12-2 for When reinstalling full plastic covers
original equipment wheel nut or center caps, tighten all the plastic
torque specifications. caps hand snug, then tighten with
the wheel wrench an additional
one-quarter of a turn.
{ Caution { Caution
Improperly tightened wheel nuts Wheel covers will not fit on the
can lead to brake pulsation and vehicle's compact spare. If you try
rotor damage. To avoid expensive to put a wheel cover on the
12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in brake repairs, evenly tighten the compact spare, the cover or the
a crisscross sequence, as wheel nuts in the proper spare could be damaged.
shown.
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-64 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire To store the flat or spare tire and 3. Reverse Steps 1–3 under
and Tools tools: “Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools” to replace the floor and
lock in place.
{ Warning
4. Place the flat, or damaged tire,
Storing a jack, a tire, or other face down, on the bottom of the
equipment in the passenger spare tire compartment.
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
1. Tool Bag
2. Wing-bolt
3. Jack
1. Place the wheel wrench and
Before
extension, if the vehicle has one,
into the tool bag (1) and use the
straps to secure the tool bag (1)
to the fully collapsed jack (3).
2. Install the jack (3) between the
back of the trunk and the
compact spare tire and secure
with the wing bolt (2).
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-65
Compact Spare Tire
{ Warning
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
After 6. Place the wheel retainer bolt
onto the wheel stow rod and If this vehicle has a compact spare
5. Remove the disk from the tire, it was fully inflated when new;
retainer bolt. Turn the disk over tighten by turning it clockwise.
however, it can lose air over time.
and place it back on the The compact spare is for temporary Check the inflation pressure
retainer bolt. use only. Replace the compact regularly. It should be 420 kPa
Return the disk back to its spare tire with a full-size tire as (60 psi).
original position after removing soon as possible.
Stop as soon as possible and check
the flat tire from the spare tire that the spare tire is correctly
compartment and before storing inflated after being installed on the
the spare tire. vehicle. The compact spare tire is
designed for temporary use only.
The vehicle will perform differently
with the spare tire installed and it is
recommended that the vehicle
speed be limited to 80 km/h
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-66 Vehicle Care
(50 mph). To conserve the tread of Do not mix the compact spare tire or Jump Starting
the spare tire, have the standard tire wheel with other wheels or tires.
repaired or replaced as soon as They will not fit. Keep the spare tire For more information about the
convenient and return the spare tire and its wheel together. vehicle battery, see Battery on
to the storage area. page 10-23.
When using a compact spare tire, { Caution If the vehicle battery has run down,
the ABS and Traction Control you may want to use another
systems may engage until the spare Tire chains will not fit the compact vehicle and some jumper cables to
tire is recognized by the vehicle, spare. Using them can damage start your vehicle. Be sure to use
especially on slippery roads. Adjust the vehicle and the chains. Do not the following steps to do it safely.
driving to reduce possible use tire chains on the compact
wheel slip. spare. { Warning
{ Caution Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
When the compact spare is . They contain acid that can
installed, do not take the vehicle burn you.
through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact
. They contain gas that can
spare can get caught on the rails explode or ignite.
which can damage the tire, wheel, . They contain enough
and other parts of the vehicle. electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
Do not use the compact spare on exactly, some or all of these
other vehicles. things can hurt you.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-67
2. Get the vehicles close enough

{ Caution so the jumper cables can reach, Caution (Continued)
but be sure the vehicles are not
Ignoring these steps could result touching each other. If they are, warranty. Whenever possible, turn
in costly damage to the vehicle it could cause a ground off or unplug all accessories on
that would not be covered by the connection you do not want. You either vehicle when jump starting.
vehicle warranty. Trying to start would not be able to start your
the vehicle by pushing or pulling it vehicle, and the bad grounding 3. Turn off the ignition on both
will not work, and it could damage could damage the electrical vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
the vehicle. systems. accessories plugged into the
To avoid the possibility of the cigarette lighter or the accessory
1. Check the other vehicle. It must vehicles rolling, set the parking power outlet. Turn off the radio
have a 12-volt battery with a brake firmly on both vehicles and all lamps that are not
negative ground system. involved in the jump start needed. This will avoid sparks,
procedure. Put the transmission helping save both batteries and
the radio.
{ Caution in P (Park) before setting the
parking brake.
If the other vehicle does not have
a 12-volt system with a negative { Caution
ground, both vehicles can be
damaged. Only use a vehicle that If any accessories are left on or
has a 12-volt system with a plugged in during the jump
negative ground for jump starting. starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-68 Vehicle Care
4. Open the hood on the other Your vehicle is equipped with a Your vehicle is equipped with a
vehicle and locate the remote positive (+) terminal. This remote negative (−) terminal.
positive (+) and negative (−) is located in the engine This is a stud next to the engine
terminal locations on that compartment on the driver side coolant surge tank, located at
vehicle. of the vehicle, on the underhood the back of the engine
Open the hood on your vehicle fuse block. See Engine compartment on the driver side
and find the remote positive (+) Compartment Overview on of the vehicle. See Engine
and remote negative (−) jump page 10-4 for more information Compartment Overview on
starting terminals. on location. page 10-4 for more information
To uncover the remote on location.
positive (+) terminal, press the
tab on the bottom of the fuse { Warning
block and lift the cover up.
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-69
cable to the negative (−) terminal

{ Warning { Warning on the dead battery because this
can cause sparks.
Using an open flame near a Fans or other moving engine
battery can cause battery gas to parts can injure you badly. Keep 6. Connect the red positive (+)
explode. People have been hurt your hands away from moving cable to the positive (+) terminal
doing this, and some have been parts once the engine is running. on the vehicle with the dead
blinded. Use a flashlight if you battery. Use a remote
need more light. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
5. Check that the jumper cables do has one.
Be sure the battery has enough not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could 7. Do not let the other end touch
water. You do not need to add
get a shock. The vehicles could metal. Connect it to the
water to the battery installed in positive (+) terminal of the good
your new vehicle. But if a battery also be damaged.
battery. Use a remote
has filler caps, be sure the right Before you connect the cables, positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, here are some basic things you has one.
add water to take care of that should know. Positive (+) will go
first. If you do not, explosive gas to positive (+) or to a remote 8. Now connect the black
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle negative (−) cable to the
could be present.
has one. Negative (−) will go to a negative (−) terminal of the good
Battery fluid contains acid that battery. Use a remote
heavy, unpainted metal engine
can burn you. Do not get it on part or to a remote negative (−) negative (−) terminal if the
you. If you accidentally get it in terminal if the vehicle has one. vehicle has one.
your eyes or on your skin, flush Do not let the other end touch
the place with water and get Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a anything until the next step. The
medical help immediately. other end of the negative (−)
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts. cable does not go to the dead
Do not connect the negative (−) battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-70 Vehicle Care
to a remote negative (−) terminal Towing the Vehicle

on the vehicle with the dead { Caution
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the
If the jumper cables are { Caution
connected or removed in the
negative (−) cable away from the wrong order, electrical shorting Incorrectly towing a disabled
dead battery, but not near may occur and damage the vehicle may cause damage. The
engine parts that move. The vehicle. The repairs would not be damage would not be covered by
electrical connection is just as covered by the vehicle warranty. the vehicle warranty. Do not lash
good there, and the chance of or hook to the chassis
Always connect and remove the
sparks getting back to the components — including the front
jumper cables in the correct order,
battery is much less.
making sure that the cables do and rear subframes, suspension
10. Now start the vehicle with the not touch each other or other control arms, and links — during
good battery and run the metal. towing and recovery of a disabled
engine for a while. vehicle, or when securing the
11. Press the unlock symbol on the vehicle. Use the proper nylon
Jumper Cable Removal
remote keyless entry strap harnesses around the tires
transmitter to disarm your Reverse the sequence exactly when to secure the vehicle.
security system, if equipped. removing the jumper cables.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
the dead battery. If it will not car carrier. A wheel lift tow truck
start after a few tries, it could damage the vehicle.
probably needs service. Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-71
To tow the vehicle behind another Here are some important things to vehicles can also be towed by
vehicle for recreational purposes, consider before recreational vehicle placing them on a platform trailer
such as behind a motor home, see towing: with all four wheels off of the
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” . What is the towing capacity of ground. For other towing options,
following. the towing vehicle? Be sure to see “Dolly Towing” following in this
read the tow vehicle section.
Recreational Vehicle manufacturer's For vehicles being dinghy towed,
Towing recommendations. the vehicle should be run at the
. What is the distance that will be beginning of each day and at each
Recreational vehicle towing means
traveled? Some vehicles have RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
towing the vehicle behind another
restrictions on how far and how This will ensure proper lubrication of
vehicle, such as behind a motor
long they can tow. transmission components.
home. The two most common types
of recreational vehicle towing are . Is the proper towing equipment
known as dinghy towing and dolly going to be used? See your
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the dealer or trailering professional
vehicle with all four wheels on the for additional advice and
ground. Dolly towing is towing the equipment recommendations.
vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
. Is the vehicle ready to be
device known as a dolly. towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
Dinghy Towing
Front-wheel-drive and
all-wheel-drive vehicles may be
dinghy towed from the front. These
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-72 Vehicle Care
To tow the vehicle from the front 4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/
with all four wheels on the ground: Caution (Continued) OFF and remove the key from
1. Position the vehicle that will be the ignition.
automatic transmission could be
towed and secure it to the damaged. Be sure to follow all
towing vehicle. steps of the dinghy towing { Caution
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ procedure prior to and after Do not tow a vehicle with the front
ACCESSORY. towing the vehicle. drive wheels on the ground if one
3. Shift the transmission to of the front tires is a compact
N (Neutral). spare tire. Towing with two
4. Turn fog lamps and all { Caution different tire sizes on the front of
the vehicle can cause severe
accessories off.
If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded damage to the transmission.
5. To prevent the battery from while towing the vehicle, it could
draining while the vehicle is be damaged. Never exceed
being towed, remove the 2 amp Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive
105 km/h (65 mph) while towing
PWR/MODING fuse from the Vehicles)
the vehicle.
instrument panel fuse block and All-wheel-drive vehicles should not
store it in a safe location. See be towed with two wheels on the
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on Once the destination has been ground. To properly tow these
page 10-34. reached: vehicles, they should be placed on
1. Set the parking brake. a platform trailer with all four wheels
{ Caution 2. Shift the transmission to off of the ground or dinghy towed
P (Park). from the front. See “Dinghy Towing”
If the vehicle is towed without earlier in this section.
performing each of the steps 3. Reinstall the 2 amp PWR/
listed under “Dinghy Towing,” the MODING fuse to the instrument
(Continued) panel fuse block.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-73
Dolly Towing 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

(Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles) 7. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle from
the Rear
{ Caution
Towing the vehicle from the rear
To tow the vehicle from the front could damage it. Also, repairs
with the rear wheels on the ground: would not be covered by the
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. vehicle warranty. Never have the
vehicle towed from the rear.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
5. Remove the key from the
ignition.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-74 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care Caution (Continued)

washed. This could cause damage
that would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Exterior Care products can be obtained from
your dealer. Follow all If using an automatic car wash,
Locks manufacturer directions regarding follow the car wash instructions. The
Locks are lubricated at the factory. correct product usage, necessary windshield wiper and rear window
Use a de-icing agent only when safety precautions, and wiper, if equipped, must be off.
absolutely necessary, and have the appropriate disposal of any Remove any accessories that may
locks greased after using. See be damaged or interfere with the car
vehicle care product.
Recommended Fluids and wash equipment.
Lubricants on page 11-12. Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
Washing the Vehicle { Caution cleaning agents completely. If they
To preserve the vehicle's finish, are allowed to dry on the surface,
wash it often and out of direct Avoid using high-pressure they could stain.
sunlight. washes closer than 30 cm (12 in)
to the surface of the vehicle. Use Dry the finish with a soft, clean
of power washers exceeding chamois or an all-cotton towel to
{ Caution 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
Do not use petroleum-based, in damage or removal of paint
acidic, or abrasive cleaning and decals. Finish Care
agents as they can damage the Application of aftermarket clearcoat
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic The e symbol is on any sealant/wax materials is not
parts. If damage occurs, it would underhood compartment electrical recommended. If painted surfaces
not be covered by the vehicle center that should not be power are damaged, see your dealer to
warranty. Approved cleaning have the damage assessed and
(Continued) repaired. Foreign materials such as
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-75
calcium chloride and other salts, ice The bright metal moldings on the
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree Caution (Continued) vehicle are aluminum. To prevent
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from damage always follow these
industrial chimneys, etc., can may damage it. Use only cleaning instructions:
damage the vehicle's finish if they non-abrasive waxes and polishes
. Be sure the molding is cool to
remain on painted surfaces. Wash that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the the touch before applying any
the vehicle as soon as possible. cleaning solution.
If necessary, use non-abrasive vehicle.
cleaners that are marked safe for . Use a cleaning solution
painted surfaces to remove foreign approved for aluminum. Some
To keep the paint finish looking new,
matter. keep the vehicle garaged or cleaners are highly acidic or
covered whenever possible. contain alkaline substances and
Occasional hand waxing or mild can damage the moldings.
polishing should be done to remove Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
residue from the paint finish. See . Always dilute a concentrated
Moldings cleaner according to the
your dealer for approved cleaning
products. manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
{ Caution . Do not use chrome cleaners.
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, Failure to clean and protect the . Do not use cleaners that are not
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint bright metal moldings can result intended for automotive use.
as damage can occur. in a hazy white finish or pitting. . Use a nonabrasive wax on the
This damage would not be
vehicle after washing to protect
{ Caution covered by the vehicle warranty. and extend the molding finish.
Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
(Continued)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-76 Vehicle Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, Air Intakes
Lenses, Emblems, Decals and or other harsh cleaners.
.
Clear debris from the air intakes,
Stripes Ice scrapers or other hard items. between the hood and windshield
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a . Aftermarket appearance caps or when washing the vehicle.
soft cloth, and a car washing soap covers while the lamps are
illuminated, due to excessive Windshield and Wiper Blades
to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
emblems. Follow instructions under heat generated. Clean the outside of the windshield
"Washing the Vehicle" previously in with glass cleaner.
this section. { Caution Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
Lamp covers are made of plastic, cloth or paper towel soaked with
and some have a UV protective Failure to clean lamps properly windshield washer fluid or a mild
coating. can cause damage to the lamp detergent. Wash the windshield
cover that would not be covered thoroughly when cleaning the
Use only lukewarm water, a soft by the vehicle warranty. blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
cloth, and mild car washing soap to
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
clean exterior lamps and lenses. Do
treatments may cause wiper
not clean or wipe them while they
streaking.
are dry. { Caution Replace the wiper blades if they are
Do not use any of the following on
Using wax on low gloss black worn or damaged. Damage can be
lamp covers:
finish stripes can increase the caused by extreme dusty
. Abrasive or caustic agents. gloss level and create a conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
. Washer fluids and other cleaning non-uniform finish. Clean low snow, and ice.
agents in higher concentrations gloss stripes with soap and
Weatherstrips
than suggested by the water only.
manufacturer. Apply Dielectric silicone grease on
weatherstrips to make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-77
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at Wheels and Trim — Aluminum

least once a year. Hot, dry climates or Chrome { Caution
may require more frequent
application. Black marks from Use a soft, clean cloth with mild To avoid surface damage, do not
rubber material on painted surfaces soap and water to clean the wheels. use strong soaps, chemicals,
can be removed by rubbing with a After rinsing thoroughly with clean abrasive polishes, cleaners,
clean cloth. See Recommended water, dry with a soft, clean towel. brushes, or cleaners that contain
Fluids and Lubricants on A wax may then be applied. acid on aluminum or
page 11-12. chrome-plated wheels. Use only
Tires
{ Caution approved cleaners. Also, never
drive a vehicle with aluminum or
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to Chrome wheels and other chrome chrome-plated wheels through an
clean the tires. trim may be damaged if the automatic car wash that uses
vehicle is not washed after driving silicone carbide tire cleaning
on roads that have been sprayed
{ Caution with magnesium, calcium,
brushes. Damage could occur
and the repairs would not be
Using petroleum-based tire or sodium chloride. These covered by the vehicle warranty.
dressing products on the vehicle chlorides are used on roads for
may damage the paint finish and/ conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the chrome with Steering, Suspension, and
or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any soap and water after exposure. Chassis Components
overspray from all painted Visually inspect steering,
surfaces on the vehicle. suspension, and chassis
components for damaged, loose or
missing parts or signs of wear at
least once a year. Inspect the power
steering for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-78 Vehicle Care
check constant velocity joints, material to parts repaired or Interior Care

rubber boots, and axle seals for replaced to restore corrosion
leaks. protection. To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Body Component Lubrication Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils. Note
parts will provide the corrosion that newspapers or dark garments
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, protection while maintaining the
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the that can transfer color to home
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently
fuel door hinge unless the
components are plastic. Applying Finish Damage transfer color to the vehicle's
silicone grease on weatherstrips interior.
Quickly repair minor chips and
with a clean cloth will make them scratches with touch-up materials Use a soft bristle brush to remove
last longer, seal better, and not stick available from your dealer to avoid dust from knobs and crevices on the
or squeak. corrosion. Larger areas of finish instrument cluster. Using a mild
damage can be corrected in your soap solution, immediately remove
Underbody Maintenance hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
dealer's body and paint shop.
At least twice a year, Spring and repellent from all interior surfaces or
Fall, use plain water to flush dirt and Chemical Paint Spotting permanent damage may result.
debris from the vehicle's underbody. Airborne pollutants can fall upon Your dealer may have products for
Your dealer or an underbody car and attack painted vehicle surfaces cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
washing system can do this. If not causing blotchy, ring-shaped specifically designed for the
removed, rust and corrosion can discolorations, and small, irregular surfaces being cleaned to prevent
develop. dark spots etched into the paint permanent damage. Apply all
Sheet Metal Damage surface. See “Finish Care” cleaners directly to the cleaning
previously in this section. cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
If the vehicle is damaged and on any switches or controls.
requires sheet metal repair or Cleaners should be removed
replacement, make sure the body quickly. Never allow cleaners to
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-79
remain on the surface being 3.8 L (1 gal) of water. Cleaning the windshield with water
cleaned for extended periods A concentrated soap solution will during the first three to six months
of time. leave a residue that creates of ownership will reduce tendency
Cleaners may contain solvents that streaks and attracts dirt. Do not to fog.
can become concentrated in the use solutions that contain strong
or caustic soap. Speaker Covers
interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions . Do not heavily saturate the Vacuum around a speaker cover
on the label. While cleaning the upholstery when cleaning. gently, so that the speaker will not
interior, maintain adequate be damaged. Clean spots with just
. Do not use solvents or cleaners water and mild soap.
ventilation by opening the doors and containing solvents.
windows. Coated Moldings
To prevent damage, do not clean Interior Glass
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
the interior using the following To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
cleaners or techniques: dampened with water. Wipe droplets
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a
left behind with a clean dry cloth. sponge or soft lint-free cloth
. Never use a razor or any other dampened with water.
sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be
from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning . When heavily soiled, use warm
the interior glass with plain water. soapy water.
. Never use a brush with stiff
bristles.
{ Caution
. Never rub any surface
aggressively or with excessive To prevent scratching, never use
pressure. abrasive cleaners on automotive
. Do not use laundry detergents or glass. Abrasive cleaners or
dishwashing soaps with aggressive cleaning may damage
degreasers. For liquid cleaners, the rear window defogger.
use approximately 20 drops per
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-80 Vehicle Care
Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and
Start by vacuuming the surface
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays
using a soft brush attachment. If a
a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being For vehicles with high gloss
prevent forcing the soil in to the
used during vacuuming, only use it surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
following techniques: longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners
solution followed only by plain or solvents. Periodically hand wash
. For solid soils, remove as much the microfiber cloth separately,
water.
as possible prior to vacuuming. using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use.
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
colorfast cloth with water. cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
Microfiber cloth is recommended hidden area for colorfastness before { Caution
to prevent lint transfer to the using a commercial upholstery
fabric or carpet. Do not attach a device with a
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
formation occurs, clean the entire suction cup to the display. This
2. Remove excess moisture by may cause damage and would
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not be covered by the warranty.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Vehicle Care 10-81
Instrument Panel, Leather, Cargo Cover and

Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Caution (Continued) Convenience Net
Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and these solvents can permanently Wash with warm water and mild
Natural Open Pore Wood change the appearance and feel detergent. Do not use chlorine
Surfaces of leather or soft trim and are not bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
Use a soft microfiber cloth recommended. then dry completely.
dampened with water to remove Care of Safety Belts
dust and loose dirt. For a more Do not use cleaners that increase
thorough cleaning, use a soft Keep belts clean and dry.
gloss, especially on the instrument
microfiber cloth dampened with a panel. Reflected glare can decrease
mild soap solution. visibility through the windshield { Warning
under certain conditions.
{ Caution Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
Soaking or saturating leather, { Caution a crash, they might not be able to
especially perforated leather, as Use of air fresheners may cause provide adequate protection.
well as other interior surfaces, permanent damage to plastics Clean safety belts only with mild
may cause permanent damage. and painted surfaces. If an air soap and lukewarm water.
Wipe excess moisture from these freshener comes in contact with
surfaces after cleaning and allow any plastic or painted surface in
them to dry naturally. Never use the vehicle, blot immediately and
heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot clean with a soft cloth dampened
removers. Do not use cleaners with a mild soap solution.
that contain silicone or wax-based Damage caused by air fresheners
products. Cleaners containing would not be covered by the
(Continued) vehicle warranty.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
10-82 Vehicle Care
Floor Mats brake pedal. Always check that

the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
{ Warning . Use the floor mat with the
If a floor mat is the wrong size or correct side up. Do not turn
is not properly installed, it can it over.
interfere with the pedals. . Do not place anything on top of
Interference with the pedals can the driver side floor mat.
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
. Use only a single floor mat on
distance which can cause a crash the driver side.
and injury. Make sure the floor . Do not place one floor mat on
mat does not interfere with the top of another. Removing and Replacing the
pedals. Floor Mats
The driver side floor mat is held in
place by two hook-type retainers. 1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
remove it from the hooks.
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage. 2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
mat retainer openings over the
. The original equipment floor
carpet retainers and hook into
mats were designed for your
position.
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended 3. Make sure the floor mat is
that GM certified floor mats be properly secured and verify that
purchased. Non-GM floor mats it does not interfere with the
may not fit properly and may pedals.
interfere with the accelerator or
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Maintenance Schedule
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
{ Caution
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 also help to maintain the value of Damage caused by improper
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the maintenance can lead to costly
Special Application Services responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application repairs and may not be covered
all required maintenance performed. by the vehicle warranty.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Your dealer has trained technicians Maintenance intervals, checks,
Additional Maintenance who can perform required inspections, recommended fluids,
and Care maintenance using genuine and lubricants are important to
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have keep the vehicle in good working
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 up-to-date tools and equipment for condition.
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids dealers have extended evening and
Recommended Fluids and Saturday hours, courtesy The Tire Rotation and Required
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 transportation, and online Services are the responsibility of the
Maintenance Replacement scheduling to assist with service vehicle owner. It is recommended to
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 needs. have your dealer perform these
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Maintenance Records Your dealer recognizes the Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15 importance of providing keep the vehicle in good working
competitively priced maintenance condition, improves fuel economy,
and repair services. With trained and reduces vehicle emissions.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use

. Frequently towing a trailer.
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
Maintenance
. Used for high speed or
There may need to be more competitive driving. Schedule
frequent checks and services. The
Additional Required Services -
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery Owner Checks and Services
Normal are for vehicles that: service.
At Each Fuel Stop
. Carry passengers and cargo Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Check the engine oil level. See
within recommended limits on Engine Oil on page 10-8.
the Tire and Loading Information Required Services - Severe chart.
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Once a Month
on page 9-10. { Warning . Check the tire inflation
. Are driven on reasonable road Performing maintenance work can pressures. See Tire Pressure on
surfaces within legal driving page 10-44.
be dangerous and can cause
limits. serious injury. Perform . Inspect the tires for wear. See
. Use the recommended fuel. See maintenance work only if the Tire Inspection on page 10-50.
Recommended Fuel on required information, proper tools, . Check the windshield washer
page 9-36. and equipment are available. fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
Refer to the information in the If they are not, see your dealer to page 10-20.
Maintenance Schedule Additional have a trained technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own Engine Oil Change
Required Services - Normal chart.
Service Work on page 10-3. When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
The Additional Required Services -
SOON message displays, have the
Severe are for vehicles that are:
engine oil and filter changed within
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic the next 1 000 km/600 mi. When the
in hot weather. CHANGE ENGINE OIL NOW
. Mainly driven in hilly or message displays, have the engine
mountainous terrain. oil and filter changed as soon as
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
possible. If driven under the best reset oil life system. See Engine
. Inspect brake system.
conditions, the engine oil life system Oil on page 10-8 and Engine Oil . Visually inspect steering,
might not indicate the need for Life System on page 10-10. suspension, and chassis
vehicle service for more than a year. . Check engine coolant level. See components for damaged, loose,
The engine oil and filter must be Engine Coolant on page 10-14. or missing parts or signs of
changed at least once a year and wear. See Exterior Care on
the oil life system must be reset. . Check windshield washer fluid page 10-74.
Your trained dealer technician can level. See Washer Fluid on
perform this work. If the engine oil page 10-20.
. Check restraint system
life system is reset accidentally, components. See Safety System
. Visually inspect windshield wiper Check on page 3-16.
service the vehicle within 5 000 km/ blades for wear, cracking,
3,000 mi since the last service. or contamination. See Exterior
. Visually inspect fuel system for
Reset the oil life system when the Care on page 10-74. Replace damage or leaks.
oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life worn or damaged wiper blades. . Visually inspect exhaust system
System on page 10-10. See Wiper Blade Replacement and nearby heat shields for
Tire Rotation and Required on page 10-25. loose or damaged parts.
Services Every 12 000 km/ . Check tire inflation pressures. . Lubricate body components. See
7,500 mi See Tire Pressure on Exterior Care on page 10-74.
page 10-44.
Rotate the tires, if recommended for . Check starter switch. See Starter
the vehicle, and perform the . Inspect tire wear. See Tire Switch Check on page 10-24.
following services. See Tire Inspection on page 10-50. . Check automatic transmission
Rotation on page 10-50. . Visually check for fluid leaks. shift lock control function. See
. Check engine oil level and oil . Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Automatic Transmission Shift
life percentage. If needed, See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Lock Control Function Check on
change engine oil and filter, and page 10-12. page 10-24.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13

. Check ignition transmission lock.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10-25.
. Check parking brake and
automatic transmission park
mechanism. See Park Brake and
P (Park) Mechanism Check on
page 10-25.
. Check accelerator pedal for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.
. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 2-14.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
AWD. (4)
@
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Footnotes — Maintenance (5) Or every five years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System on
Services - Normal page 10-13.
(1) Or every two years, whichever (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. More frequent comes first. Inspect for fraying,
replacement may be needed if the excessive cracking, or damage;
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy replace, if needed.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, (7) Or every 10 years, whichever
or areas with high dust levels. comes first.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Do not directly power wash the
transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the
seals and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@ @ @
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
AWD. (4)
@ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Footnotes — Maintenance (5) Or every five years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System on
Services - Severe page 10-13. Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever (6) Or every 10 years, whichever . Severe Commercial Use
comes first. More frequent comes first. Inspect for fraying, Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
replacement may be needed if the excessive cracking, or damage; components every 5 000 km/
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy replace, if needed. 3,000 mi.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, (7) Or every 10 years, whichever . Have underbody flushing service
or areas with high dust levels. comes first. performed. See "Underbody
Replacement may also be needed if
Maintenance" in Exterior Care
there is a reduction in air flow,
on page 10-74.
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Do not directly power wash the
transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the
seals and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
It is recommended that your dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
perform these services — their corrosion-free.
trained dealer technicians know Fluids
your vehicle best. Your dealer can Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
also perform a thorough . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
assessment with a multi-point squeak or show signs of and components. See
inspection to recommend when your cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
vehicle may need attention. Lubricants on page 11-12 for GM
. Trained dealer technicians have
The following list is intended to access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
explain the services and conditions to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
to look for that may indicate recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be
services are required. replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Hoses Shocks and Struts rubber; cracks or cuts in the

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. split in the tire.
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include
. Trained dealer technicians can
With a multi-point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ inspect and recommend the right
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer tires. Your dealer can also
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven provide tire/wheel balancing
tire wear. services to ensure smooth
Lamps vehicle operation at all speeds.
Properly working headlamps, . As part of the multi-point Your dealer sells and services
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer name brand tires.
important to see and be seen on technicians can visually inspect
the road. the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care
of leaking, blown seals, To help keep the vehicle looking like
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise
attention include dimming, failure new, vehicle care products are
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be Tires information on how to clean and
checked periodically to ensure protect the vehicle’s interior and
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on
that they light when braking. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 10-78 and Exterior Care on
. With a multi-point inspection, the tires can save money and fuel, page 10-74.
your dealer can check the lamps and can reduce the risk of tire
and note any concerns. failure.
. Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Wheel Alignment Wiper Blades

Wheel alignment is critical for Wiper blades need to be cleaned
ensuring that the tires deliver and kept in good condition to
optimal wear and performance. provide a clear view.
. Signs that the alignment may . Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include skipping across the windshield,
pulling, improper vehicle and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear. . Trained dealer technicians can
. Your dealer has the required check the wiper blades and
equipment to ensure proper replace them when needed.
wheel alignment.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the
best viewing, keep the windshield
clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include
scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
if needed.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Recommended Fluids
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE
viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See
Engine Oil on page 10-8.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-14.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88900401).
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668) or lubricant meeting
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Liftgate Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241).
Sunroof Track Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770) or Dielectric Silicone
Grease (GM Part No. 12345579).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96815102 —
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.0L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 20901295 CF177
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108
3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 60.0 cm (24.0 in) 95479599 —
Passenger Side – 40.0 cm (16.0 in) 95479597 —
Rear – 30.0 cm (12.0 in) 96624648 —
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Odometer
Reading
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Odometer
Reading
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Odometer
Reading
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 8.5 L 9.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 10.9 L 11.5 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank 63.1 L 16.6 gal
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 (LEA) K Automatic 0.75–0.90 mm (0.030–
0.035 in)
3.0L V6 (LFW) 5 Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.4L L4 Engine
3.0L V6 Engine
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Radio Frequency been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Radio Frequency STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business Bureaus,
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Center
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From U.S. Virgin Islands:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9994
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user in I (Service History): View

the U.S. can communicate with printable dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
Chevrolet by dialing: records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records.
CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicle’s
The Chevrolet online owner
Telephone devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
experience is a one-stop resource
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
that allows interaction with J (Recall Information): View
Chevrolet and keeps important active recalls or search by Vehicle
Overseas vehicle-specific information in one Identification Number (VIN). See
place. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General
on page 12-1.
Motors Business Unit. Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information): H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view
radio, and OnStar account
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific how-to videos.
information.
Users G (Maintenance Information): F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
View maintenance schedules,
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
required alerts, OnStar onboard
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
vehicle diagnostic information, and
and who use Text Telephones
schedule service appointments. your vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca
Reimbursement Program or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner for details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips, and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
Chevrolet-recommended home telephone number.
maintenance services for your . Telephone number of your
vehicle. location.
. Location of the vehicle.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13

. Model, year, color, and license claims are made too often, or the
. Flat Tire Change: Service to
plate number of the vehicle. same type of claim is made many change a flat tire with the spare
. Odometer reading, Vehicle times. tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Identification Number (VIN), and must be in good condition and
Services Provided properly inflated. It is the owner's
delivery date of the vehicle.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: responsibility for the repair or
. Description of the problem. replacement of the tire if it is not
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest covered by the warranty.
Coverage
service station. . Battery Jump Start: Service to
Services are provided up to 5 years/
. Lock-Out Service: Service to jump start a dead battery.
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first. unlock the vehicle if you are Services Not Included in
locked out. A remote unlock may Roadside Assistance
In the U.S., anyone driving the be available if you have OnStar.
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a For security reasons, the driver . Impound towing caused by
person driving the vehicle without must present identification violation of any laws.
permission from the owner is not before this service is given.
covered.
. Legal fines.
. Emergency Tow from a Public . Mounting, dismounting,
Roadside Assistance is not a part of Road or Highway: Tow to the
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. or changing of snow tires,
nearest Chevrolet dealer for chains, or other traction devices.
Chevrolet and General Motors of warranty service, or if the vehicle
Canada Limited reserve the right to was in a crash and cannot be
. Towing or services for vehicles
make any changes or discontinue driven. Assistance is also given driven on a non-public road or
the Roadside Assistance program at when the vehicle is stuck in the highway.
any time without notification. sand, mud, or snow.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Services Specific to Assistance advisor may give safety related. If it is, please call
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles permission to get local your dealership, let them know this,
emergency road service. You will and ask for instructions.
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement receive payment, up to $100,
is approximately $5 Canadian. If your dealer requests you to bring
after sending the original receipt the vehicle for service, you are
Diesel fuel delivery may be to Roadside Assistance.
restricted. Propane and other urged to do so as early in the work
Mechanical failures may be day as possible to allow for
fuels are not provided through covered, however any cost for
this service. same-day repair.
parts and labor for repairs not
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle covered by the warranty are the
registration is required. owner responsibility. Courtesy Transportation
. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Program
Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service To enhance your ownership
250 kilometers from where your Appointments experience, we and our participating
trip was started to qualify. dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
When the vehicle requires warranty Transportation, a customer support
General Motors of Canada
service, contact your dealer and program for vehicles with the
Limited requires
request an appointment. By Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
pre-authorization, original
scheduling a service appointment Coverage period in Canada),
detailed receipts, and a copy of
and advising the service consultant extended powertrain, and/or
the repair orders. Once
of your transportation needs, your hybrid-specific warranties in both
authorization has been received,
dealer can help minimize your the U.S. and Canada.
the Roadside Assistance advisor
inconvenience.
will help to make arrangements Several Courtesy Transportation
and explain how to receive If the vehicle cannot be scheduled options are available to assist in
payment. into the service department reducing inconvenience when
immediately, keep driving it until it warranty repairs are required.
. Alternative Service: If
can be scheduled for service,
assistance cannot be provided
unless, of course, the problem is
right away, the Roadside
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Courtesy Transportation is not a one-way or round-trip shuttle service Courtesy Rental Vehicle
part of the New Vehicle Limited within reasonable time and distance Your dealer may arrange to provide
Warranty. A separate booklet parameters of your dealer's area. you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
entitled “Limited Warranty and reimburse you for a rental vehicle
Owner Assistance Information” Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
furnished with each new vehicle for an overnight warranty repair.
provides detailed warranty coverage If the vehicle requires overnight Rental reimbursement will be limited
information. warranty repairs, and public and must be supported by original
transportation is used instead of receipts. This requires that you sign
Transportation Options your dealer's shuttle service, the and complete a rental agreement
Warranty service can generally be expense must be supported by and meet state/provincial, local, and
completed while you wait. However, original receipts and can only be up rental vehicle provider requirements.
if you are unable to wait, GM helps to the maximum amount allowed by Requirements vary and may include
to minimize inconvenience by GM for shuttle service. In addition, minimum age requirements,
providing several transportation for U.S. customers, should you insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
options. Depending on the arrange transportation through a You are responsible for fuel usage
circumstances, your dealer can offer friend or relative, limited charges and may also be
one of the following: reimbursement for reasonable fuel responsible for taxes, levies, usage
expenses may be available. Claim fees, excessive mileage, or rental
Shuttle Service amounts should reflect actual costs usage beyond the completion of the
Shuttle service is the preferred and be supported by original repair.
means of offering Courtesy receipts. See your dealer for
Transportation. Dealers may provide information regarding the allowance It may not be possible to provide a
shuttle service to get you to your amounts for reimbursement of fuel like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
destination with minimal interruption or other transportation costs.
of your daily schedule. This includes
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Additional Program value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts
Information be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
All program options, such as shuttle related failures are not covered by
service, may not be available at Collision Parts that warranty.
every dealer. Please contact your
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also
dealer for specific information about
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by
availability. All Courtesy
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may
Transportation arrangements will be
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle.
administered by appropriate dealer
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit
personnel.
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/
General Motors reserves the right to ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not
unilaterally modify, change, appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent
or discontinue Courtesy are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
Transportation at any time and to GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle
resolve all questions of claim New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
eligibility pursuant to the terms and failure related to such parts is not
Recycled original equipment parts
conditions described herein at its covered by that warranty.
may also be used for repair. These
sole discretion.
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility
Collision Damage Repair prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you
If the vehicle is involved in a parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that
collision and it is damaged, have the undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever
damage repaired by a qualified A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer
technician using the proper part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center
equipment and quality replacement maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and
parts. Poorly performed collision designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
repairs diminish the vehicle resale performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
center that has GM-trained If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information:
technicians and comparable company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and
equipment. insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Insuring the Vehicle Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number.
Protect your investment in the GM Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Owner name, address, and
vehicle with comprehensive and parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
collision insurance coverage. There you may be charged at the end of
are significant differences in the the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number.
quality of coverage afforded by . Vehicle make, model, and
various insurance policy terms.
If a Crash Occurs model year.
Many insurance policies provide If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification
reduced protection to the GM emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN).
vehicle by limiting compensation for leave the scene of a crash until all
damage repairs through the use of matters have been taken care of. . Insurance company and policy
aftermarket collision parts. Some Move the vehicle only if its position number.
insurance companies will not puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the
specify aftermarket collision parts. instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle.
When purchasing insurance, we officer.
recommend that you ensure that the Choose a reputable repair facility
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts.
vehicle will be repaired with GM to police and other parties involved
original equipment collision parts. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
in the crash. section.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What
insurance carrier, consider switching Roadside Assistance Program on Will You See after an Airbag
to another insurance carrier. page 13-5. Inflates? on page 3-22.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Managing the Vehicle Damage If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions
Repair Process company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
In the event that the vehicle requires repair valuation based on that
damage repairs, GM recommends insurance company's collision policy Owner Information
that you take an active role in its repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written
repair. If you have a pre-determined contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended
repair facility of choice, take the In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational
vehicle there, or have it towed there. of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The
Specify to the facility that any long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the
required replacement collision parts reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all
be original equipment parts, either
models.
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
recycled parts will not be covered by Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty
the GM vehicle warranty. Manual.
Service Manuals
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, RETAIL SELL PRICE:
but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
Depending on your policy limits, and repair information on the shipping fees.
your insurance company may engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: Owner
initially value the repair using Manual only.
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with steering, body, etc.
the repair professional, and insist on RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Bulletins
Genuine GM parts. Remember, $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
if the vehicle is leased, you may be Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees.
obligated to have the vehicle technical service information
repaired with Genuine GM parts, needed to knowledgeably service
even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks.
does not pay the full cost.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Current and Past Models Reporting Safety To contact NHTSA, you may call
Technical Service Bulletins and the Vehicle Safety Hotline
Manuals are available for current
Defects toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
and past model GM vehicles. (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Reporting Safety Defects http://www.safercar.gov; or
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday to the United States write to:
8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time Government Administrator, NHTSA
For Credit Card Orders Only If you believe that your vehicle 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see has a defect which could cause Washington, D.C. 20590
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. a crash or could cause injury or You can also obtain other
Or write to: death, you should immediately information about motor
Helm, Incorporated inform the National Highway vehicle safety from
Attention: Customer Service Traffic Safety Administration http://www.safercar.gov.
47911 Halyard Drive (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Plymouth, MI 48170 General Motors.
Prices are subject to change without If NHTSA receives similar
notice and without incurring complaints, it may open an
obligation. Allow ample time for investigation, and if it finds that
delivery. a safety defect exists in a group
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. of vehicles, it may order a recall
funds. Make checks payable in U.S. and remedy campaign.
funds. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data

to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy
If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors. The vehicle has a number of
defect, notify Transport Canada computers that record information
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
immediately, and notify General about the vehicle’s performance and
Chevrolet Motor Division how it is driven. For example, the
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Chevrolet Customer Assistance vehicle uses computer modules to
Transport Canada at
Center monitor and control engine and
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170 transmission performance, to
Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170 monitor the conditions for airbag
Road Safety Branch deployment and deploy them in a
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
80 rue Noel crash, and, if equipped, to provide
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1 antilock braking to help the driver
(French), or write:
control the vehicle. These modules
General Motors of Canada Limited may store data to help the dealer
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: technician service the vehicle.
CA1-163-005 Some modules may also store data
1908 Colonel Sam Drive about how the vehicle is operated,
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
radio presets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a if the vehicle is leased, with the
better understanding of the consent of the lessee; in response
This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and to an official request by police or
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are similar government office; as part of
main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a GM's defense of litigation through
record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no the discovery process; or, as
crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under required by law. Data that GM
bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no collects or receives may also be
obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender, used for GM research needs or may
understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are be made available to others for
systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties, research purposes, where a need is
designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could shown and the data is not tied to a
vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
routinely acquired during a crash OnStar®
investigation.
record such data as: If the vehicle is equipped with
To read data recorded by an EDR, OnStar® and has an active
. How various systems in your special equipment is required, and subscription, additional data may be
vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is collected through the OnStar
. Whether or not the driver and needed. In addition to the vehicle system. This includes information
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as about the vehicle’s operation;
buckled/fastened; law enforcement, that have the collisions involving the vehicle; the
.
special equipment, can read the use of the vehicle and its features;
How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
depressing the accelerator and/ and, in certain situations, the
the vehicle or the EDR. location and approximate GPS
or brake pedal; and,
GM will not access this data or speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
. How fast the vehicle was share it with others except: with the
traveling. consent of the vehicle owner or,
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
OnStar Terms and Conditions and Communications Commission (FCC)

Privacy Statement on the OnStar rules and with Industry Canada
website. Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following
Radio Frequency two conditions:
Identification (RFID) 1. The device may not cause
RFID technology is used in some harmful interference.
vehicles for functions such as tire 2. The device must accept any
pressure monitoring and ignition interference received, including
system security, as well as in interference that may cause
connection with conveniences such undesired operation of the
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) device.
transmitters for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and Changes or modifications to any of
in-vehicle transmitters for garage these systems by other than an
door openers. RFID technology in authorized service facility could void
GM vehicles does not use or record authorization to use this equipment.
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.
Radio Frequency
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
2 NOTES
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Press Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicle’s key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an Press the OnStar Emergency button
Advisor. > to get a priority connection to an
Emergency Advisor available
24/7 to:
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
14-2 OnStar
. Get help for an emergency.
OnStar Services Navigation
. Be a Good Samaritan or
OnStar navigation requires the
respond to an AMBER Alert.
Emergency Directions and Connections
. Get assistance in severe service plan.
With Automatic Crash Response,
weather or other crisis and
the built-in system can automatically Press Q to receive directions or
evacuation routes.
connect to help in most crashes, have them sent to the vehicle
even if help cannot be requested. navigation screen, if equipped.
Press > to connect to an Destinations can also be forwarded
Emergency Advisor. GPS to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
technology is used to identify the The OnStar mapping database is
vehicle location and can provide continuously updated. For coverage
critical information to emergency maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)
personnel. The Advisor is also or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
trained to offer critical assistance in Turn-by-Turn Navigation
emergency situations.
1. Press Q to connect to a live
Security Advisor.
OnStar provides services like Stolen 2. Request directions.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition 3. Directions are downloaded to the
Block, and Roadside Assistance, vehicle.
if equipped. OnStar can unlock the
vehicle doors remotely, if equipped 4. Follow the voice-guided
with automatic door locks, and can commands.
help police locate the vehicle if it is
stolen.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds After the call ends, press the “Go”
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then button on the navigation screen to
responds with “OnStar ready,” begin driving directions.
Cancel Route then a tone. If directions are downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: Get My Destination navigation system, the route can
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say only be canceled through the
“Cancel route.” System 1. Press =. System responds: navigation system.
responds: “Do you want to “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
Destinations can also be
cancel directions?” 2. Say “Get my destination.” downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: System responds with the information about eNav, Destination
“OK, request completed, thank address and the distance to the Download, and coverage maps see
you, goodbye.” destination, then responds with www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Route Preview
Other Navigation Services
1. Press =. System responds: Available from OnStar Connections
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
2. Say “Route preview.” System to send destinations from calls to be made and received from
responds with the next three MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
maneuvers. Navigation or screen-based controlled through the OnStar
navigation system. When ready, the RemoteLink® mobile app. For
Repeat coverage maps, see
directions will be downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: vehicle. www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Destination Download: Press Q,
then request the Advisor to
download directions to the
navigation system in the vehicle.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
14-4 OnStar
OnStar Mobile App Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed
Download the OnStar RemoteLink Dialing
1. Press =. System responds:
mobile app to select Apple®, “OnStar ready,” followed by 1. Press =. System responds:
Android™, and BlackBerry® devices a tone. “OnStar ready.”
to check vehicle fuel level, oil life,
or tire pressure; to start the vehicle 2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
(if equipped) or unlock it; or to “Please say the name or number “Please say the number you
connect to an OnStar Advisor. For to call.” would like to store.”
OnStar RemoteLink information and 3. Say “911” without pausing. 3. Say the entire number without
compatibility, see www.onstar.com System responds: “911.” pausing. System responds:
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada). “Please say the name tag.”
4. Say “Call.” System responds:
Hands-Free Calling “OK, dialing 911.” 4. Pick a name tag. System
responds: “About to store <name
1. Press =. System responds: Retrieve My Number tag>. Does that sound OK?”
“OnStar ready.”
1. Press =. System responds: 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
2. Say “Call.” System responds: “OnStar ready.” again. System responds: “OK,
“Please say the name or number storing <name tag>.”
to call.” 2. Say “My number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar Place a Call Using a Stored
3. Say the entire number without Hands-Free Calling number is,”
pausing, including a “1” and the Number
then says the number.
area code. System responds: 1. Press =. System responds:
“OK calling.” End a Call
“OnStar ready.”
Press =. System responds: “Call 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
ended.” responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.”
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
OnStar 14-5
Verify Minutes and Expiration OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works
Press = and say “Minutes” then Information Automatic Crash Response,
“Verify” to check how many minutes Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
remain and their expiration date. Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
Diagnostics eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
perform a vehicle check every account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
month. It will check the engine, receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
transmission, antilock brakes, and ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
major vehicle systems. It also may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
checks the tire pressures, if the vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
vehicle is equipped with the Tire information. conditions:
Pressure Monitoring System. If an
Reactivation for Subsequent . Call 888-4-ONSTAR
On-Demand Diagnostics check is
Owners (888-466-7827).
needed between e-mails, press Q,
. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
and an Advisor can run a check. Press Q and follow the prompts to
. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible after acquiring the vehicle. . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
The Advisor will update vehicle
records and will explain the OnStar . Press Q to speak with an
service offers and options available. Advisor.
OnStar services require a vehicle
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
14-6 OnStar
to function properly. These systems vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a system can provide in-vehicle
may not operate if the battery is crash, or wireless phone network access to all of the OnStar services,
discharged or disconnected. congestion or jamming. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
your vehicle is in a place where page 13-15. OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca
OnStar has an agreement with a (Canada)
wireless service provider for service Services for People with
in that area, and the wireless Disabilities The website provides access to
service provider has coverage, Advisors provide services to help account information, allows
network capacity, reception, and subscribers with physical disabilities management of the OnStar
technology compatible with OnStar and medical conditions. subscription, and viewing of videos
service. Service involving location of each service. Get subscription
information about the vehicle cannot Press Q for help with: plan pricing and sign up for OnStar
work unless GPS signals are .
Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the
Locating a gas station with an “My Account” tab on the home
available, unobstructed, and attendant to pump gas.
compatible with the OnStar page. The website navigation and
hardware. OnStar service may not
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., services provided may vary by
work if the OnStar equipment is not that meets accessibility needs. country.
properly installed or it has not been . Providing directions to the OnStar Personal Identification
properly maintained. If equipment or closest hospital or pharmacy in
software is added, connected,
Number (PIN)
urgent situations.
or modified, OnStar service may not A PIN is needed to access some of
work. Other problems beyond the TTY Users the OnStar services, like Remote
control of OnStar may prevent OnStar has the ability to Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
service such as hills, tall buildings, communicate to the deaf, Assistance. You will be prompted to
tunnels, weather, electrical system hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired change the PIN the first time when
design and architecture of the customers while in the vehicle. The speaking with an Advisor. To
available dealer-installed TTY
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
OnStar 14-7
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar Roadside Assistance and a route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the locksmith to help gain access to the after the vehicle is driven into an
current number. vehicle. open area.
Warranty Global Positioning Cellular and GPS Antennas
OnStar equipment may be System (GPS) Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the New . Obstruction of the GPS can antenna to prevent blocking cellular
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The occur in a large city with tall and GPS signal reception. Cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle buildings; in parking garages; reception is required for OnStar to
furnishes detailed warranty around airports; in tunnels, send remote signals to the vehicle.
information. underpasses, or parking
garages; or in an area with very
Unable to Connect to OnStar
Languages dense trees. If GPS signals are Message
The vehicle can be programmed to not available, the OnStar system If there is limited cellular coverage
respond in multiple languages. should still operate to call or the cellular network has reached
Press Q and ask an Advisor. OnStar. However, OnStar could maximum capacity, this message
Advisors are available in English, have difficulty identifying the may come on. Press Q to try the
Spanish and French. Available exact location. call again or try again after driving a
languages may vary by country. . In emergency situations, OnStar few miles into another cellular area.
can use the last stored GPS
Potential Issues location to send to emergency Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote responders. OnStar services require a vehicle
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle electrical system, wireless service,
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance after the vehicle has and GPS satellite technologies to be
cause loss of the ability to send
been off continuously for five days. available and operating for features
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
After five days, OnStar can contact to function properly. These systems
The Advisor may give a verbal
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
14-8 OnStar
Add-on Electrical Equipment OnStar - libcurl and unzip THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
acknowledgments “AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
The OnStar system is integrated
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
into the electrical architecture of the Certain OnStar components include IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
vehicle. Do not add any electrical libcurl and unzip software. Below LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
equipment. See Add-On Electrical are the notices and licenses OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
Equipment on page 9-47. Added associated with this software: FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
electrical equipment may interfere
libcurl: AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
with the operation of the OnStar
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
system and cause it to not operate. COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
NOTICE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
Privacy
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
The complete OnStar Privacy Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
Statement may be found at WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
www.onstar.com (U.S.), All rights reserved.
CONTRACT, TORT OR
or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Permission to use, copy, modify, OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
Privacy-sensitive users of wireless and distribute this software for any OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
communications are cautioned that purpose with or without fee is WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
the privacy of any information sent hereby granted, provided that the USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
via wireless cellular communications above copyright notice and this THE SOFTWARE.
cannot be assured. Third parties permission notice appear in all
may unlawfully intercept or access Except as contained in this notice,
copies.
transmissions and private the name of a copyright holder shall
communications without consent. not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
OnStar 14-9
unzip: Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception
Info-ZIP copyright and license. The Rich Wales, Mike White to this condition is redistribution
definitive version of this document This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary
should be available at ftp:// without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a
ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is
license.html indefinitely. Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of
liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All normal SFX banner has not
rights reserved. incidental, special or consequential
damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or
For the purposes of this copyright inability to use this software. disabled.
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as 3. Altered versions–including, but
the following set of individuals: Permission is granted to anyone to
use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces,
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris restrictions: library versions–must be plainly
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, marked as such and must not be
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, 1. Redistributions of source code misrepresented as being the
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, must retain the above copyright original source. Such altered
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, notice, definition, disclaimer, and versions also must not be
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, this list of conditions. misrepresented as being
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, 2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releases–including, but
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai (compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, notice, definition, disclaimer, and “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
14-10 OnStar
“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or

“MacZip” without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP. Such
altered versions are further
prohibited from
misrepresentative use of the
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
and “MacZip” for its own source
and binary releases.
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Assistance Program,

What Will You See after an Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
About Driving the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . iii
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Accessories and
When Should an Airbag CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19 Audio System
Add-On Electrical
Airbags Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Adding Equipment to the Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Additional Information
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-13 Automatic
Adjustments
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-5
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Air Filter, Passenger
Alarm Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-25, 10-24 Automatic Transmission
Airbag System
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Shift Lock Control
How Does an Airbag
Antenna Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Auxiliary
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
What Makes an Airbag
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont'd) CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-29 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Stoplamps, and Check
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Ignition
Bluetooth
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Brake C Child Restraints
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Infants and Young
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16
California Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Lower Anchors and
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Camera Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-38
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Rear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Capacities and Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-46
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Carbon Monoxide Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Cleaning
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 10-28
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Front Turn Signal and
Cargo Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Cautions, Danger, and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
INDEX i-3
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Diagnostics

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Compartments Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Door
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Connections Text Telephone (TTY) Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Control Customer Information Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Traction and Electronic Service Publications Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Customer Satisfaction Drive Systems
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-25, 10-24
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Driver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Coolant D Driver Information
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Engine Temperature Danger, Warnings, and Driving
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Characteristics and
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Daytime Running Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Courtesy Transportation Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Cover Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Devices Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont'd) Engine F

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Filter,
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Check and Service Engine
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-4
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Driving the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Coolant Temperature
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
FlexFuel
E Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Cooling System Messages . . .5-30
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Fluid
Economy Mode Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-17 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Electrical Equipment, Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Fog Lamps
Electrical System Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 6-4, 10-28
Engine Compartment Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-22
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-21
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fuses and Circuit Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17 Front Fog Lamp
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Instrument Panel Fuse Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Front Seats
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Emergency Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
INDEX i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 G H
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Gasoline Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Filling a Portable Fuel
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Gauges Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-36
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Daytime Running
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-21
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Requirements, California . . . . .9-36
Warning Lights and High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
General Information Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Fuses
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Engine Compartment
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Heating and Air
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-5
Fuses and Circuit
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 GM Mobility Reimbursement High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-46
Instrument Panel Fuse
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
i-6 INDEX
I L Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-39
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Ignition Transmission Lock Lamps
Antilock Brake System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16
Infants and Young Children, Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Front Turn Signal and
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-17
Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14
Engine Coolant
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-20
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-13 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii LATCH System
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Replacing Parts after a
Gate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
J Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Liftgate
K Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Low Washer Fluid Warning . . .5-23
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-32 Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-22
Lighting
Keyless Entry Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-16
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont'd) M Mirrors

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Maintenance
Traction Control System Automatic Dimming
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
(TCS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-19 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Recommended Fluids
Locks Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Messages
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-13
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Monitor System, Tire
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-21
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-30
Low Washer Fluid Warning
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 N
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Navigation
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Lower Anchors and Tethers OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
for Children (LATCH Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Object Detection System . . . . .5-33
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-33 O
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Object Detection System
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
i-8 INDEX
Off-Road Outlets Phone

Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Oil Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Power
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Overview, Infotainment Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30 P Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Park Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-22
OnStar® Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
OnStar® Additional Parking Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Brake and P (Park) Power Steering Warning
OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-20 Pregnancy, Using Safety
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Parking Assist Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Privacy
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Passenger Airbag Status Radio Frequency
Operation, Infotainment Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Passenger Compartment Air Program
Ordering Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24
Personalization
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
INDEX i-9
R Reimbursement Program, Roadside Assistance

GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Radio Frequency
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roof
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Radios
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Replacement Parts Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Running the Vehicle While
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-30
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-34
Replacing LATCH System S
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4
Replacing Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-17 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Reporting Safety Defects How to Wear Safety Belts
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Recommended
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Recommended Fluids and
Restraints Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-17
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15
Records
Retained Accessory Safety Defects Reporting
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Recreational Vehicle
Ride Control Systems General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Reduced Engine Power
Roads Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
i-10 INDEX
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Service (cont'd) Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Seats Publications Ordering Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-19
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Storage Areas
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Shift Lock Control Function Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Check, Automatic Cargo Management System . . . 4-2
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Securing Child Shifting Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-46 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Security Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Signals, Turn and Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Spare Tire Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Service Specifications and Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Accessories and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 StabiliTrak Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 System
Maintenance, General Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
INDEX i-11
T Tires (cont'd) Transportation Program,

Uniform Tire Quality Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Taillamps
Wheel Alignment and Tire Turn and Lane-Change
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56 Turn Signal
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-10
When It Is Time for New Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Tires
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 U
Towing Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-32
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-41 Uniform Tire Quality
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-42
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-71 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Traction
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-47
Control System Warning
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 V
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Vehicle
Traction Control/Electronic
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Trailer
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-46 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Identification
Transmission
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Terminology and Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
6014141) - 2014 - crc - 8/13/13
i-12 INDEX
Vehicle (cont'd) Wheels

Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Alignment and Tire
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 When It Is Time for New
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Vehicle Care Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
W Winter
Warning Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Wipers
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Washer Fluid, Low Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

2014 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owners PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2014 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owners PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.

/Mexico- Black plate (1,1)

2014 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2014 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Please refer to the purchase About Driving the Vehicle

A circle with a slash through it is a Vehicle Symbol Chart

j : LATCH System Child

In Brief Passenger Sensing Driver Information

Initial Drive See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote

doors will be locked and the climate Door Locks

Liftgate Windows Express-Down Window

Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster Power Seats

If available, move the lever up or If available, move the control

Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

To raise or lower the front or rear

Automatic Climate Control System

To adjust the steering wheel:

Turn the control to the following Windshield Wiper/Washer

The exterior lamp control is on the

3: Sets a delay between wipes. Climate Controls

1. Fan Control 7. Driver and Passenger Heated

3. Temperature Control 8. Rear Window Defogger

4. Recirculation See Climate Control Systems on

K : Press to reject an incoming upwards to accelerate. If cruise DIC Buttons

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

On some models, the fuel door will Programming Transmitters to

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Door Locks Warning (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

Automatic Door Unlock Safety Locks

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Doors Warning (Continued)

If the vehicle must be driven with

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Power Mirrors Automatic Dimming Feature Heated Mirrors

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Interior Mirrors Windows Power Windows

Interior Rearview Mirrors { Warning { Warning

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

1. Open/Close: Slide and release

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the

Seats and Restraints 3-3

Rear Seats Front Seats 2. Slide the seat to the desired

If available, move the lever up or

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

3-4 Seats and Restraints

Power Seat Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment